Abyss

ABYSS Book three Timeless Series Laura Kreitzer Obsidian Mountain Publishing Abyss Copyright © 2011 by Laura Kreitzer All rights reserved. No part of this book may be used or reproduced by any means, graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, taping or by any information storage retrieval system without the written permission of the publisher except in the case of brief quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews. This is a work of fiction. All of the characters, names, incidents, organizations, and dialogue in this novel are either the products of the author’s imagination or are used fictitiously. Obsidian Mountain books may be ordered through booksellers or by contacting: Obsidian Mountain Publishing http://www.obsidianmtpublishing.com [email protected] Because of the dynamic nature of the internet, any web addresses or links contained in this book may have changed since publication and may no longer be valid. The views expressed in this work are solely those of the author and do not necessarily reflect the views of the publisher, and the publisher hereby disclaims any responsibility for them. ABYSS, TIMELESS #3 Front cover artwork by Igor ćekić Library of Congress Control Number: 2011926721 ISBN: 9780982903360 Printed in the United States of America Dedicated to my fans. I’d be nowhere without you. <> Life has a bright side and a dark side, for the world of relativity is composed of light and shadows. If you permit your thoughts to dwell on evil, you yourself will become ugly. Look only for the good in everything so you absorb the quality of beauty. Paramahansa Yogananda PROLOGUE Sunlight filtered through the trees in jagged lines of golden flares and streaks. The direction of the light either meant it was early morning or late afternoon. She lay flat on her back as her heart pounded erratically. She tried to

fight the dizziness; her vision blurred and focused in such irregular patterns that it made her sick. Something warm and wet covered her chest where the aching throb was the worst. Darkness carved out the light as a shadow fell over her limp body. She blinked erratically, unsure where she was or how she got there. Or, most importantly, what her name was. She was an it. A nobody. Someone without a name. She wasn’t sure if this scared her more than the figure that now hovered over her sore and broken body. “She’s alive,” said a deep voice. The profound and complex tone surprised her. It was familiar. She took a ragged breath, and the movement made her chest constrict painfully. “Are you sure?” another asked in a similar voice. Fathomless. Abysmal. Like it held the secrets of several lifetimes. “Her chest is moving, and her eyes are open and blinking,” said the first. The shadow disappeared as he lowered himself next to her, but was back in an instant as his face came into focus. A scream lodged in her throat when she focused on him. His eyes. They were on fire—literally a violent, sizzling flame devouring her as his gaze penetrated her. There were furious cracks in his blackened skin full of liquid fire. An inferno. “Eva?” whispered the man—creature?—while gently brushing her hair from her face. Her mind grasped the name and tried to place it. Why did it sound so familiar? Eva. Eva . . . Eva? Wait! That was her name! She was Eva. “It’s me, Vasco. Your brother,” the thing said when he saw her confused expression. “My brother?” she croaked, her voice raspy and broken. With a Herculean effort, her fingertips brushed her face for the cracks she saw in the thing above her. “Yes,” he said softly. “Do you remember what happened?” Her forehead scrunched in thought as she tried her best to think of the events that led to her lying in the middle of a forest. “No.” “The Illuminator stabbed you. We all thought you were dead, but then we saw you moving.” The creature looked away from her toward whoever else stood close by. “Vito thought it was your nerves after death.” “It very well could’ve been,” the man barked crossly. Eva let the words absorb into her as she tried to place the names with faces and memories. She attempted to sit up but was too weak. Vasco placed his arm behind her shoulders and lifted. Everything came into startling focus. The other creature—man—thing—whatever it was, looked just like Vasco, and she once again wondered if she looked the same. “The Empyrean Guard came, and we fled,” Vasco continued. “When we came back, this was what we came across.” He waved his hand around the dense forest. There were two bodies lying in the distance, a smattering of gold and red littered the trees and ground, and, around her, there was a black tar-like substance pooled where she sat. Part of a tree looked like it had been chewed to pieces by a beaver—wood shavings covered the forest floor. Eva inventoried her arms and saw that her skin was not the charcoal color of her brothers, though she was drenched in the tar-like substance. There was a gaping hole in her shirt where the black stuff had apparently come from, and, in the center of it all, was a trickling of gold. She dipped her fingers into the substance and glanced up at Vasco, her eyes questioning. “How’d I get here?” It was all too much to take in. “You infiltrated the Ladies of Light,” Vasco explained. “They gave you the name Karen so you could take the soul

of the Illuminator: Gabriella.” At the word soul, Eva’s memories exploded like a nuclear bomb. She gripped Vasco as everything that had happened over the past 3500 years rammed into her, the memory sending her flying backward and arching off the ground. Vasco caught her before her head slammed into a rock and started to yell at Vito, their words indiscernible. The memories flooded her like poison, burning her veins like a ravenous fire. It was a cold winter’s day 3500 years ago when she met the most beautiful man she’d ever seen—Kael. It was so unlike her to pursue a man she was interested in, but she couldn’t help it. There was something alluring about him; she had to have him, and he was more than willing. He was mortal and could feel how different Eva was—she was an immortal, an Angel. They made sweet love one night and that was when everything changed. Kael tricked her—he was possessed with a Phantom from the Abyss. The Phantom had jumped from human to human for centuries and knew it had limited time in such a weak, mortal body. It sensed Eva’s immortality and entered her, took hold of her very being, and possessed her. Kael left confused and mumbling while Eva was left screaming on the bed, fighting against the Phantom inside her. She struggled for a year before it had taken root and pushed everything that was Eva aside. She hadn’t been in control of her body or mind since. The things her body did when she was hidden deep inside herself saturated into her memory, and she recoiled in horror and shame. She had been a monster. Completely and utterly the worst kind of monster. The Phantom had a fetish of devouring souls, and she tried to shake the memories from her head. But then the most important memory of them all hit her, the one she felt the most pain over . . . Gabriella. The Illuminator—the one who was supposed to save the Angels from the Ladies of Light. Eva almost killed her—but worst of all, she realized why the Phantom no longer possessed her: it had found someone stronger. With more strength than Eva thought she had, she rose to her feet and approached the lumps on the ground. They were no one she knew, though she recognized their size, clothing, and an upside-down Fleur-de-Lis symbol as one of the Empyrean Guards’. So they came back after all these years? Determination gripped her, and she suddenly knew what she had to do. She remembered all the Phantom’s thoughts and memories, even from before it possessed her. And she knew how to rid it once and for all. All she had to do was find the Illuminator before it was too late. 1 MURDEROUS DESIRE Seriously? This is where we’re staying?” I asked excitedly. I threw my shoes off and ran across the warm sand as the sun blazed down on us. Andrew laughed and shook his head at me when I turned and kicked sand his direction. “Yes.” His smile grew. “I’m pleased you like it.” “Like it?” I gave him a look of mock-shock. “I love it!” He followed me as I backed toward the ocean crashing against the beach, my skirt whipping around in the wind. My toes met the warm water, and I thought for a moment the pearly gates just opened, and I was in heaven. But then Andrew joined me, and we collided into the water with a huge splash. Now I was in heaven. The air filled with our laughter as we dunked each other and acted like we were teenagers. That day was the first day in what seemed like forever I actually had a bit of fun. After everything that happened in Italy, I decided I didn’t want to see that country for a long, long, long . . . long time. Aiden—a very angelic Aiden—came up with the idea of a vacation, and I couldn’t believe he actually thought it was a wise idea. The Empyrean Guard was on a rampage, the Ladies of Light were nowhere to be found, and Aiden was susceptible to death now that he was no longer a Shadow. If anything, I needed to work harder, not take a vacation. But now that I was here, on a beach in Hawaii, I couldn’t think of a better idea. Maybe it was selfish of me to be happy that I wasn’t dealing with all the war I left behind, but it was hard to feel guilty when Andrew was enticing me with words like “beach” and “relaxation.” And especially now when he was tempting me with more than words—like with his body.

The water lapped at us as he held me close, his white shirt clinging deliciously to his skin. Every ripple in his abs clearly showed through the thin fabric of his soaked T-shirt. Our laughter quieted and the moment veered immediately to Seriousville. It was surreal, and I knew the fun and games wouldn’t last. There were important things we needed to discuss—things that had more to do with us than the Angelic war nipping at our heels. “Now that we’re alone, will you tell me what’s going on?” Andrew asked, pushing my soaked hair back from my face. We stood in waist-high water, and I wanted to laugh that he chose this moment to ask. But the answer to the question made me push the laughter away. My moods had been all over the place, like I was a teenager with raging hormones and not a twenty-four year old. “You know what’s been going on,” I said feebly. “You can read my thoughts every time we touch.” I looked away, ashamed. Wickedness sometimes seeped into my veins and turned me into someone I didn’t recognize. I didn’t deserve Andrew or his gentleness over this subject. He placed a tentative finger on my chin and turned my face so I was eye-to-eye with him. “I’d rather hear the words from you, not from your thoughts.” When I stayed silent, he sighed dejectedly. “Please don’t be ashamed. You can tell me anything, and we can work through these problems together. I know you’d do the same for me. You helped me when I first came into this new and strange world. Still are.” “Okay,” I relented and let out a long breath. “Can we at least change out of our soaked clothes and grab something to eat first? I’m starving.” Honestly, I just wanted to take his shirt off. Andrew chuckled and planted a soft kiss on my lips, and I knew immediately that I was busted for lusting over his abs and pectorals. “That sounds like a fantastic idea.” A smile grew across his face with a hint of dimples. I wasn’t sure if it was him shirtless or the food he thought was a fantastic idea. Maybe both . . . maybe at the same time. We waded out of the ocean hand-in-hand and made our way up to the isolated beach house. The sand went all the way up to the deck and vines with orange and yellow flowers decorated the wood. The house was large with massive windows facing the beach. I’d wager we could easily see the beach from almost every room. The sandcolored stone of the house blended well with the luscious green of the tropical forest surrounding it. It was paradise. “So, how long do we have this house for?” Andrew squeezed my hand. “For as long as you want.” “Really?” “Definitely. I know you’ll want to go back soon, but I was hoping you’d let me spoil you a bit before we have to face the real world.” Inside was just as beautiful as I pictured it to be: large, open rooms, light-colored walls with beach-type decorations, and a kitchen big enough to cook for a hundred people. “Will you help me with my powers?” I asked as I leaned against one of the many kitchen counters. He smirked, and I realized how those words could be construed. “I mean—” I could feel my face redden. “You know, teach me?” His smile grew wider until he burst into laughter. “How about you show me how to cook using one of these contraptions, and then we can discuss this—” he pointed between us “—with more detail.” His eyebrows rose suggestively. My face heated even more. There was a gleam to his eyes, one that promised things that made my stomach flutter in delight and terror. It might have been because the idea of what the conversation would entail, or the fact his

eyes had turned a dark maroon color the second we stepped off the plane. I could only imagine what that color meant. “I can handle that,” I conceded. “Shall we change first?” His eyes roamed over my soaked appearance appreciatively. “If you insist.” This playful side I could definitely get used to. There was still a heavy weight on my shoulders, but being here with Andrew made me stronger somehow. “Come here,” I said with a small smile. He took a few steps and closed the distance between us, his eyes burning with an intensity I’d never seen before. I liked the way he looked at me. I stood on tiptoe, wrapped my arms around his neck, and kissed him softly. A chaste kiss, really. “What was that for?” he breathed, his chest heaving even though it was such a subtle touch of skin. “Does there need to be a reason?” I asked, faux offended. “Or is it okay that I just want to show you some affection?” He placed two hands on either side of me and pinned me against the counter. There was hunger in his eyes as they consumed me with a darkening red I could only assume was lust, or love, or both. He leaned in and put his lips against my soaked hair, his hot breath in my ear, sending chills down my spine, and said, “I want more than affection.” And that was all it took before I jerked back, grabbed his hair, and yanked him down on my lips. The kiss was rough and passionate at first, but then turned gentle and sweet. He pushed his body against mine as his mouth begged for entrance. I obliged willingly and our tongues touched for a brief moment as I melted into his every curve. His hands were everywhere; stroking my hair, caressing my cheek, gliding up and down my back, pulling me closer, and, finally, grabbing my hips. With little effort, he hoisted me up on the counter to gain easier access to my mouth. My hands were lost in his wet hair, raking my fingernails against his scalp smoothly. A moan escaped his throat and that only fueled my fire as I pulled him in closer by wrapping my legs around his waist. One of his hands came around my lower back to hold me closer, and the other clutched my neck while massaging tenderly. My heart fluttered violently and knots formed in my stomach. There was a rush of pure, raw emotion as I clung to him, our tongues darting in and out each other’s mouths. Our kisses grew deeper along with my desperation to find some way to be closer to him still. We were literally wrapped around each other and it wasn’t enough. It’d never be enough; I had to have more. My hands roamed down his chest on their own accord, feeling where his wet T-shirt clung to his muscled chest and stomach. I hooked a finger under the hem and peeled the fabric away. We broke from our kiss to yank his shirt free. It landed with a splattering noise. My gaze wandered over his defined physique with appreciation. I pulled him back to me with my legs, and he obeyed. We were breathing heavily, unsure where to go from here. This was as far as we’d gotten in the past few weeks. Andrew put his forehead against mine and his eyes consumed me. My fingers roamed over his naked chest, and electricity crackled with the light touch. His muscles jerked under my palms as I rubbed up around his shoulders, wanting to learn and know every part of his body. Andrew’s eyes closed as his breath caught in his throat. “That feels unbelievably good.” His voice was ragged with emotion and need. I closed my eyes too, and let the salty water on our skin intensify the electrical current as it surged through him and back through me, over and over. It was nothing like being shocked; it was like every cell in my body had come alive with some wild craving. A craving to have the man in my arms. “We need to stop,” I choked out, warring with myself. He was silent as we continued to let our hands wander around each other’s body. His eyes opened slowly,

wistfully. “I’m . . . not ready,” I admitted. And that was true on so many levels. I wasn’t ready to put him in danger for a night of love-making, and I was still innocent in that aspect. Though I’d never said the word “virgin” before, he knew. “I’m . . .” I trailed off, blushing. This was a replay of how it always ended between us. Always “I’m not ready” or “I’m . . .” a virgin. I never let the last words escape—but he knew. Andrew stood up straight and reached toward my face to tuck my tangled, wet hair behind my ears. “I know,” he whispered, always incredibly patient. I knew he could hear all of my thoughts. All the warring I constantly did with myself. And, just like every other time, I was again incredibly embarrassed. His lips twitched a little as he gazed down at me. “Don’t be embarrassed.” Right on cue. “It’s one of my favorite things about you.” “Which?” I asked with a raised eyebrow. “The fact that I’m untouched or that I don’t want to put you in danger?” Now we were in new territory. He laughed and the sound was like melting honey. “I love that you saved yourself and that you’ve chosen me to explore this new path. I’m flattered, really. And how selfless you’ve been through all of this.” He paused, his eyes considering me. “This trip is all about you and me. That includes all the subjects in between. We have time to talk and explore each other without going beyond whatever boundaries you feel necessary.” He came forward and placed the softest, sweetest kiss on my lips. It lasted for several seconds, and he’d have to peel me off the counter if he let go. “Whoa,” I sighed stupidly when he backed away. He smirked knowingly as I dropped my legs from around his waist, still melting. “I put our things in the hallway. You can change in the bathroom and I’ll take the office,” he said. “Uh-huh,” was my floundering response. He laughed again and helped me off the counter. When he turned his back to me I saw the new, intricate tattoo of wings that covered his whole back. The markings were a heavenly white. Ever since Andrew and I flew away from the Empyrean Guard, our skin had been marked with pure white tattoos in the shape of folded wings at our back. I’d never been one for tattoos, but this was different and I loved it—like it was a part of me. <> Andrew followed me around the kitchen as I inventoried food for dinner. I began to pile ingredients together to make a simple meal of pasta and garlic bread. It reminded me of Zola after I rescued her—how she engulfed more food than I’d thought possible. We weren’t close, but my heart hurt when I thought about her sacrifice to save me. Something fractured inside, and a trickle of unnatural joy slithered through me. A small smile spread across my face at the thought of the stupid prophetess being dead. My knuckles whitened as I gripped the knife I was using to cut fresh mushrooms. The evil thoughts coated my mind like syrup, and I fought to keep them at bay. With my left hand, I seized my right wrist to stop any movement with the sharp knife. I could feel Andrew at my back as I struggled with whatever it was inside me. “Gabriella?” he whispered. “What’s —” I shot around and put the knife to his throat. His eyes grew wide as the blade bit into his skin. He didn’t move or fight back, and the evil thing inside of me was disappointed. Murderous desire ripped through me, and all I wanted to do was . . . kill and devour. “Andrew,” I cried out, barely keeping it together. Barely keeping the knife from slicing him open. The knife dug in deeper as silver blood ran down the blade. I wasn’t in control of my hand.

So slowly, as if not to startle me, he placed his palms on my cheeks and the fracture inside me mended. I dropped the knife in horror and tried to run away, but Andrew seized my arm and cornered me between his arms as he placed them on either side of my waist. “Don’t run. Please.” His voice was pleading. I wanted to cry but held back the tears. “I just held a knife to your throat, Andrew!” Hysteria was about to bubble over. “I didn’t miss that,” he said dryly with a small twitch of his lips. “This isn’t a joke; this is my life! And your life!” I protested. “Our life.” “I know, and that’s one of the reasons we’re here. What just happened?” He didn’t seem angry or pissed off, which blew my mind. Understanding and determination filled his thoughts as our connection grew stronger. He could read my thoughts clearly, but I still had trouble focusing on his. “If we can pin-point the trigger to these reactions then we might be able to find out what’s making you want to slice my throat open . . . and choke Ehno.” “You’re right.” And I hated that fact. He was willing to be my guinea pig to my randomly murderous ways. Honestly, when Aiden suggested a vacation, I’m sure he meant “rehabilitation.” Especially after I tried to choke Ehno with my mother’s scarf. I still had no idea what had come over me. Andrew’s fingers traced down my chin and his breath filled the air between us. “Now tell me—what happened?” His voice was as soft as flower petals caressing my skin. “I’m not sure. I was making the pasta, thinking about Zola eating the food I made for her in Italy and about her sacrifice to save me. But then the thought of her death pleased me.” I paused and glanced at his deeply hypnotic maroon eyes. “It disappeared when you touched me, but before then all I could think about was the metaphorical taste of blood.” I hesitated. “I . . . wanted to kill.” “Who?” he asked in the most reasonable tone. “Anyone. Everyone.” The thought scared me. “I have an idea,” he whispered and moved closer until most of his body touched mine. “How about I don’t stop touching you tonight and we worry about everything tomorrow. I know you’re exhausted, and I am too. Plus,” he added as an afterthought, “Aiden, Ehno, and I have noticed that your hunger for evil-doing disappears when we make contact. That’s why I touched your face.” I had to admit it would be nice to get some rest after the long flight out there—no, we didn’t use our wings or magic. I was still working on my talents, or lack thereof, and didn’t want to end up in Antarctica. “Okay,” I whispered. Andrew was so close to me now I didn’t need to speak above a murmur for him to hear me. “Dinner now or later?” “You decide.” He’d taken the fight out of me as soon as he pushed himself against me, his thumbs rubbing gentle circles up my ribs. “I’m awfully tired. I need to put everything away first.” “You let me take care of that.” With a gentle wave of his hand, the food on the counter disappeared. Andrew grabbed a towel to wipe the bloody evidence from his neck. Guilt surged through me, and I knew he could read me easily. He dropped the towel and cradled my face with his large palms. He was so close there was nothing else I could look at unless I closed my eyes. “I’m only going to say this once, so listen.” I bobbed my head between his hands. “I’m listening.” “You won’t hurt me. A little slice to my neck, barely breaking the skin, is nothing. And look”—he lifted his chin so I could see—“it’s already healed. I fear there’s something making you lust for the kill. Feel no guilt over something

that’s clearly not your fault. If there’s another incident I want you to remember I hold nothing against you. Understand?” His voice was firm and commanding. “Perfectly.” “I’m here for you—to help you heal and move on from whatever demon has taken root in your soul.” His words softened to a mere whisper. “I’m afraid something happened when you killed the Soul Stalker. But that’s why we’re here: to find out what’s causing these intense personality changes.” Andrew’s thumbs traced over my cheek bones before he placed a gentle kiss on my forehead. He let go to only grab one of my hands with his. “I wish things weren’t this way . . . and I’m thankful you’re willing to help me,” I stated with sincerity. “I’m not just willing—I want to.” He smiled gently down at me from his incredibly tall frame. He pulled me toward the open staircase accented with glass sides. He paused at the top. “You have two options for sleeping arrangements. Option one: you sleep in the bedroom with the recliner so I can be close enough to touch you. Option two: we go to the master bedroom and share a bed.” 2 INNOCENT Now how am I supposed to do this—” I pulled him down for a passionate kiss “—if you’re in a recliner?” “Good point,” he conceded with a wicked grin. For some reason I was in a bold mood. Electricity exploded from me and into Andrew, our bodies bowing into each other over the sensation. His thoughts suddenly came in loud and clear, and I couldn’t help but blush. How did I get so lucky? It’s a blessing I don’t deserve—to have this woman alive and here with me. I raised my eyebrows at his sincere thoughts, wondering where all the male macho crap was. A memory flashed in his mind of me drenched from the ocean, my clothes sticking to my skin. As soon as his thoughts accompanied that image I had to push him out; I felt like I was invading his privacy. For some reason the fact that he thought I was beautiful and sexy made me even bolder than I had already planned on being. “I’m the lucky one,” I breathed as I fisted his shirt with one hand and yanked him down to my lips again. Yup. Uber bold. Andrew’s eyes grew wide at my courage, but he didn’t deny me what I wanted. He wrapped both arms around my lower back and lifted me up so he wouldn’t have to bend down to kiss me. My arms enveloped him, holding him close to me as he walked us into the master bedroom and playfully dumped me on the bed, a teasing smirk on his lips. “Not what I was expecting, but I’m definitely not complaining,” he declared. I bit my bottom lip, my nerves filtering in finally. Regardless, I wasn’t about to back down. I fought to save him and wasn’t going to let any of our time together go to waste. Who knew when we’d have a chance to be like this again? Maybe never. “You quit touching me,” I barely whispered. Longing filled his eyes as they branded my skin with silent promises. “I guess I better remedy that.” Already shirtless, he leaned down on the bed, grasped my ankle, and slowly pulled me toward him. Electricity raced between us and lit his skin with a blinding blue and white. His fingers kneaded their way up my bare legs until he reached my skirt and stopped. His knee dropped down between my legs as he hefted himself onto the bed, hovering over me. His stomach muscles bunched as he crawled over top of me. I couldn’t help but watch the lines of his body, the curve of his shoulders. He held himself up with a palm lying flat next to my head while his other hand traced my bare skin between my shirt and skirt. My skin rose under his fingertips, trying to get up and follow his precious touch.

There were so many emotions flooding through me I wasn’t sure which one to listen to. There was longing, lust, and deep down a love that made me ache for more and more of him. I wanted him to caress, kiss, and stroke parts of me that no other person had. But I knew that sealing the bond between us with sex would place Andrew in danger. As long as I needed him for my powers to work the Empyrean Guard wouldn’t kill him. He’d be safe. How far could we go before we went too far? How many soft touches and extreme intimate connections could we both take before we gave in? I didn’t know and that scared me. Andrew’s eyes jumped up to mine and his fingers immediately stopped their rhythmic motion. A whimper almost escaped my lips at the loss of that simple contact. “You’re anxious.” I nodded, hating that he probably heard my internal monologue. “You’re afraid of our bodies bonding?” His eyebrows came together in confusion and . . . hurt. “For many different reasons,” I choked out, worried. I turned away from his intense gaze and tried to find anything to look at but the pain in his deep, fathomless eyes. He cupped the side of my face with his big palm and made me turn to face him. “Explain.” The one simple word was full of torture. “When we finally . . .” I paused, searching for the appropriate word. “Join souls?” It came out as a question. He nodded, his eyes seeking answers. “I won’t need you anymore.” Andrew rose immediately, stood next to the bed, and began pacing before I realized how wrong my words sounded. “Oh, I didn’t realize—” “Not like that!” I cut in, frustrated with myself as I sat up on the bed. “I just mean that the Empyrean Guard won’t have any qualms killing you if we’re joined. Because if you die . . .” “My powers will be transferred to you.” He stopped pacing and faced me. “Exactly,” I exclaimed and rose to my knees, willing him to understand I was acting this way because I loved him with so much passion and intensity I thought I might explode. He was suddenly a few inches away. His hands gripped my waist and pulled me toward him. “And your other reasons?” he demanded, his voice soft in my ear. “I’ve never been touched like that before.” “Like this?” he asked as he kissed my neck lightly. “No,” I murmured. My breath caught in my throat as his hands roamed down my ribs and to my slightly exposed stomach. He eased me down onto the bed, his hands holding my waist gently. His warm mouth made contact with the small sliver of skin exposed, and I shivered under his touch. His eyes shot up to mine. “Like this?” “Not quite.” My heart pounded harder. Andrew’s hands pushed my shirt up to expose my belly button as he trailed kisses in areas no one ever had. A moan escaped me, and I could feel his lips turn up into a smile against my skin. “And what about this?” he breathed across my skin, making me shiver again.

“Exactly like that,” I said quietly, feeling something new and wonderful growing inside me, tightening all my muscles. He lifted up to see my face, which I could feel was flushed with desire. This was the situation I didn’t want to get myself into, because when he looked at me with that fervent stare I knew I’d do anything he wanted me to. “I’d never do anything you didn’t want,” he promised. “The problem is . . . I know what you want. I also know what you wish to prevent to protect me.” I sighed, hating this stupid situation. “Of course I want you, more than I thought possible. It’s just that—” “What?” He looked at me intently, raising up to hover over me again. “Do you not think I can take care of myself?” “Of course I do, but why risk you in the first place?” “And why risk yourself?” he countered. “What do you mean?” “Listen,” he said as he sat beside me and pulled me between his legs so my back was to his chest. “To me, this isn’t about just . . . sesso. It’s more. To find your kindred soul . . . there are no words to describe it. It’s precious. Virtuous. Pure. Absolute.” His fingers trailed up and down my arms softly. “To not seal, or in this case, consummate our undeniable, unconditional bond would put us both at risk.” His mouth lowered to my ear so his breath tickled along my neck and through my hair. “I know what you’re doing—trying to keep me safe. But you’re asking me to, not only put myself at risk, but you as well. The one person I can’t lose again.” “Quit using your Jedi mind tricks on me,” I teased, trying to lighten the atmosphere. “Jedi mind tricks?” Andrew asked, confused. “Oh, never mind. It’s from this movie.” “I promise no mind tricks. I just need you to look at it from all angles. Okay?” he pleaded. I turned toward his face and let our lips meet softly and sweetly. His arms snaked around my stomach and turned me so he was practically cradling me in his lap. He held my neck tenderly, his thumb stroking right below my ear as his lips moved so carefully against mine. My hands got lost in his hair, kneading his scalp and pulling him closer and closer. He moved just a few inches away, gazing into my eyes. “I love you,” he whispered. That’s when I attacked him. Our lips collided, and I rose to my knees and straddled his waist. His hands grabbed at my hips greedily, trying to pull me as close as I could possibly get, like our souls were grabbing at each other. When my breathing became panting I backed off to catch my breath. “I love you too,” I said breathlessly. “And I want to make love to you.” He stopped breathing for a second. “But not tonight.” Andrew’s hands moved up and down my back gently over my marked skin. “Of course.” “I need you to be patient with me, Andrew. This is all so new to me. Maybe we could work on moving forward, a little at a time?” My voice was cautious, unsure. This was already a big step for me. “I’ll be as patient as you need me to be,” he swore. He laid us down and held me close to his chest. Our legs tangled together as he nestled his nose right under my ear, his breath warm, lulling me to sleep.

<> When I woke up the next morning, the bed was a complete mess. Andrew’s arm was draped over my stomach, his leg over one of mine, his nose nestled right under my ear. “Morning,” he breathed and tightened his grip on me. I immediately covered my mouth and mumbled through my fingers, “Morning.” He laughed, the sound musical. “I cheated,” he admitted. “I brushed my teeth while you were sleeping.” I turned on my side to face him, my hand firmly in place, and narrowed my eyes. “That is cheating!” He smiled brightly. “Honestly, I’m still getting used to toothpaste. My mouth feels like it has been assaulted with mint leaves.” “Smells like it too.” Andrew sat up suddenly. “I’m going to make breakfast while you take a shower.” He looked over his shoulder at me. “You’ll be fine, right?” “The real question is will you be fine making breakfast?” He rolled his eyes. “Of course. “We have some things we need to talk about, though.” His face turned serious. “I’m worried about you.” I sat up beside him. “I’m so sorry about yesterday.” I dropped my hand and let the depth of my remorse show. He gave a mirthless laugh. “You’re sorry? Don’t be ridiculous.” He encircled me in his arms and placed a kiss on the top of my head. “You have nothing to be sorry about. This isn’t your fault.” He let go and hopped off the bed, a wide smile on his face. “Time for food!” I couldn’t help but grin at him as he disappeared down the stairs. For a second, I wondered idly how he was going to cook breakfast considering he didn’t know how to work the oven or stove. In Italy I taught him how to brew coffee, so at least he knew how to make the most important part of breakfast. After my shower and a thorough brushing of my teeth, I dressed in a white skirt, blue tank top, and flip flops. Winter be damned. Underneath it all I was wearing my bikini. I let my long, brown hair flow freely down my back in tangled wet waves. We were in Hawaii; I was expecting at least some beach time. Downstairs was a feast. A feast that would out-do any of Joseph’s, and that was saying something. “What’s this all about?” I asked when I saw Andrew rearranging strawberry and melon slices. He looked up, his dimples showing. “I cheated again,” he admitted. “I might have used my powers. I didn’t want to burn the house down trying to cook on that.” He pointed his thumb over his shoulder at the oven. “It wasn’t the food I was talking about.” I raised my eyebrows, taking in his appearance. His black hair was unkempt and a little curly, his chest bare, and he wore white board shorts with red tropical flowers on them. “Looks like you’re ready to catch a wave, dude.” He attempted to hide his grin, but it was useless as he circled around the table and engulfed me in a hug. “And you look stunning.” His fingers fiddled with the strings of my bathing suit that stuck out. “And this is?” “My bathing suit.” “Oh really? I’m definitely glad the style of the 1700s is no longer an issue. I’m enjoying this”—he fiddled with the strings again—“much more.”

“And what kind of style was that?” I asked, curious. “Every important inch covered.” He kissed my collar bone. “They actually wore smock dresses, none of the fabric transparent, and sometimes women even wore shoes!” “Blasphemy!” I cried out. He chuckled. “Then I’m glad too,” I said as I ran my fingers down his bare abs. Wars, armies, Shadows . . . all out of my mind. Andrew front and center. “So, what’s on the agenda today?” I wondered as he pulled out a chair for me. “I thought we’d work on some of your powers.” He took a seat across from me. “Joseph told me about the incident with the hot dogs . . . and the squirrel.” He laughed, and I blushed. “You can’t hold that against me. We were apart,” I argued. “I’m not holding it against you, Ella. I find it quite endearing, actually. I was just hoping I could help you with your talents, and maybe give you some ideas.” “Ideas, eh?” “If you’re nice I’ll show you how to cut a melon perfectly without a knife.” “Oh.” I looked down quickly, remembering the knife I put to his throat. “I’m—” He cut me off before I could apologize again. “I didn’t mean it that way. I’m just saying I’ve got some tricks up my sleeve. I am a few thousand years old.” “When you say it like that it’s kinda creepy,” I teased. He tossed a piece of cubed cheese at me. I caught it and popped it in my mouth. “I thought we’d start with controlling your electricity.” I raised my eyebrows. “I love it when you lose control of it when we’re kissing and touching,” he said quickly, reaching across the table and taking my hand in his. “Definitely love that. But it’d be good if you could turn it on and off at will.” I nodded. “I can control it somewhat, though I’d really like to learn to zone it in and zap me some Empyrean Guards.” Andrew frowned. “Did I say something wrong?” I asked hastily. “No. No, it’s just that it’s weird to think they aren’t on our side anymore.” Through our connection, I heard the doubt in his mind and quickly released his hand. He gave me a startled look. “You don’t believe me?” My voice was surprisingly small. “That’s not it at all. What if it’s a misunderstanding?” he asked sincerely. “Or what if we’re on the wrong side?” I frowned, upset that yet another person was questioning what was so obviously in front of our faces. Didn’t he see them surround us? Didn’t he feel the tension in the air? How could their plans be in the right? “I didn’t hear wrong, nor did I misunderstand.” I rose to my feet, feeling hurt. “Wait,” I said suddenly. Andrew froze. “Are we . . . fighting?”

Andrew looked confused for a second and then grinned. “If we are, then I better make it up to you immediately.” He rose to his feet too and used his powers to shift the table away so there was nothing but air between us. With two small strides he was holding me, apologizing over and over. “And, of course, I believe you. It was an errant thought you picked up on. I’m sorry I ever doubted or questioned you. It won’t happen again.” “Promise?” I asked, my cheek against his chest, his hand in my hair. “I swear.” 3 PHANTOM Water collided against the shore in roaring waves as warm wind rustled through my hair. Andrew threw a red blanket out across the sandy beach, the color stark against the brown sand. It undulated in the wind before it settled. He smoothed out the corners and sat atop it, his muscles bunching across his stomach. He patted the space before him. “Sit,” he invited. “I thought you were going to teach me how to use my powers?” I eyed him skeptically. Not like I didn’t want to snuggle with him while taking in the fantastic view. He smirked and patted in front of him again. Of course, I couldn’t deny him and went over to the blanket, tossing my flip flops to the side. Before I sunk down, he twirled his finger to tell me to turn away from him. When I did, he grabbed my waist and pulled me down in front of him. “Now relax,” he said softly, his breath hot against my ear. “It’s kind of hard to do that when you breathe into my ear like that,” I teased. He didn’t say a word, only drew me against his chest and propped his knees up on both sides of me. His fingers lightly brushed my hair as he gathered it in his hands and moved it from my neck. Andrew’s chin settled on my shoulder as he lightly stroked my arms resting on his knees. His thoughts whispered through my mind like a cool breeze. Relax, Ella. Just melt into my arms. You’re safe here. I lay my head against his shoulder, my eyes closed. He had light stubble on his face that deliciously scratched my cheek as he breathed against my skin. There was a crackle of electricity as it reached out and connected with Andrew. “What am I thinking?” he whispered. “Told me I was safe.” My eyes fluttered open to glance at him. “Close them,” he commanded. I did. “I heard those thoughts because I let you. Now I want you to tell me what I’m thinking right now. What I’m feeling.” I let all of my muscles go slack in his protective arms and tried to send my electricity out to him so I could hear his thoughts. “Without the current,” he said. “You don’t need it for this.” I reeled it in with surprising ease and concentrated on the man whose arms were wrapped around me. But no matter how much I wanted to hear what he was thinking, there was nothing but silence and the feel of his warm touch. “I can’t hear a thing,” I muttered, frustrated. “Relax,” he repeated, out loud this time. “The Halo of the Sun and the Guardians are the only ones who I allow to

hear my thoughts.” “Well that explains it!” “But,” he continued quickly, “you should be able to hear my thoughts from across the world no matter how much I try to block you.” “Why’s that?” I asked, keeping my eyes closed and forgetting there was anything except me and him in the entire universe. “Because you’re my kindred soul. I have nothing to hide from you,” he explained seriously, his Italian accent strong. “Maybe it’s because we aren’t . . . bonded that I can’t hear your thoughts.” “No.” He shook his head. “I can read your thoughts every time we touch, and it should be the same for you. When I was in danger, I was able to connect with you even though we were far from each other. Of course, when we’re apart it will be hard until we . . .” he trailed off. “And when I was escaping you spoke to me. I remember,” I said ignoring the words that were hovering around us but remained unsaid. “Yes,” he said softly. “I could feel your distress and was worried. Ehno lent me some of his strength so I could keep in contact.” “You can do that?” I asked, opening my eyes and staring at his angular jaw. “It only worked because of his psychic gift,” he admitted. “Now close your eyes and concentrate. Let your body feel mine, become familiar with it.” So I did as he asked. I felt his muscular chest at my back, his warm biceps around my waist, his knees straddling me, his warm breath against my cheek, and his soul consuming every inch of my skin. Suddenly, that was exactly how I felt. Consumed. Needed. Wanted. I drank in his presence, letting all of my senses focus on the man wrapped around me. Not just physically, but mentally as well. All of my thoughts were immersed in this man. My lover. His thoughts collided into my mind, almost as if I’d been lost without them all this time. It felt natural and . . . essential. Feel my mind, body, and soul. Know how much you consume me. I love you, Ella. Understand and realize how devoted I am to you. To doing everything in my power to make you whole again. Not only did his thoughts intermingle with mine, but I could feel his feelings, know his heart. His soul. His pure intentions burned sweetly as I melted into his touch, relaxed into his strong arms, and let my emotions sweep over him. In that moment we were one. I nestled my nose into his neck and breathed in the scent of him, like a warm fire or the crisp taste of honeysuckle on the air. My lips gently caressed skin, and he shuddered in pleasure. I would know; I could hear his erratic thoughts and passionate feelings. He sucked in a shaky breath, and I could hear his inner turmoil. He had so much to teach me, so many boundaries he wanted to help me surpass, yet I was wrapped around his every aching thought and feeling. I urged him to lose the fight. Just for five minutes. He gasped as I sucked on one of his earlobes, my head lying back on his shoulder. “You’re killing me,” he rasped. “Just five minutes,” I pleaded. “A reward for my breaking through.” “Okay,” he said raggedly. I rose to my knees and encircled him in my arms, our noses touching. “That’s better.” “Mmm-hmm,” he agreed. He captured me in his arms and brought his mouth to mine, exploring our new

connection. It had possibilities. Like how I knew he loved it when I ran my fingers through his hair, or how he picked up on the fact that I loved it when he nibbled slightly on my lower lip. We reveled in each other’s presence, absorbing and consuming each other. We broke free after several amazing minutes. It was back to work, and I knew it. “What next?” I hedged. “Just because you’ve heard my thoughts doesn’t mean you have it down.” He chuckled. “Let’s work on communicating without speaking.” Okay, I thought and smirked. Andrew turned me back around so I was leaning against his chest again. “From here on I’ll only talk if we are having issues, okay?” Let’s get down to business! I closed my eyes in anticipation. There was nothing but silence for almost a whole minute until all of a sudden I was assaulted with thoughts, feelings, deeply hidden secrets that were all contained in Andrew’s mind. I gasped audibly at the onslaught. He felt so many things all at once, but there was one that knocked the breath out of me: fear. Undeniable fear. He was scared he was going to lose me, and he knew there was something terribly wrong with me, though he was hiding some of his thoughts from me. It was like there was a huge barrier around them and no matter how hard I pounded against it, it was solid and unbreakable. I thought he said there was nothing he could do to stop me from reading his thoughts. . . . Something happened in Italy, he thought, pulling me away from delving too deep into his head. When? While we were being held captive by the V brothers. Andrew mentally sighed. Your thoughts weren’t wrong. I turned in his arms, confused by what he meant. What do you mean my thoughts weren’t wrong? About what? My eyes searched his. His forehead bunched up as if concentrating hard on a single thought. The Soul Stalker didn’t lie to you, Ella. She told the truth. He looked away from me, and I grasped his cheeks between my palms and made him turn toward me. She said a lot of things, Andrew. What did she not lie about? My mind began to race through that horrible day. So many things happened then, and I didn’t want to relive any of it. She spoke of my blood, of torturing me, of souls . . . of killing Andrew. “No,” I whispered aloud. “No speaking,” he said softly, his face tortured. She killed you? My thoughts seemed to scream through our connection, each word strangled and alarmed. Yes. Agony and pain accompanied that one word, like they were my own feelings—perhaps they were. How? I shook my head quickly. No, please don’t tell me. I don’t think I can handle it if it’s bad. He gave a small nod. Ehno tells me I was dead for only a few hours. They feared the worse, but mostly they were worried about you. Since, you know . . . we were separated before we could. . . . I placed my finger over his lips to stop him, which was funny because he wasn’t actually speaking. The gesture was meant for his thoughts too. Is that why you have silver blood too? And wings? The questions lingered between us for a few minutes. I’m honestly not sure. I’ve never heard of anything like it before, and now you and I both have these new attributes.

Andrew’s fingers traced the outline of the wings on my back. If all it took was for you to die and come back to life, Ehno and Lucia would also be the same. But they aren’t. I shook my head, trying to align my thoughts. Zola said I was an Archangel now. A messenger. Maybe you are too? My mind wandered to her sacrifice again, and to the strange dream I had where, for a moment in time, I was her. Perhaps, he thought simply. “You’re a natural at this.” “Thanks,” I whispered, my mind still stuck in the past and what Andrew went through. It was something we could share; we were both damaged in that way. “We’ve got the mind-to-mind thing while touching down, so what now?” I asked, trying to turn the conversation onto lighter topics. “We’ll work on it while not touching another time. And you seem to be in control of your electricity for now, so let’s start with bigger obstacles.” He seized my hips and threw me onto the blanket. “Hey!” I giggled, surprised. “I thought it was all business?” Then his thoughts thundered into me. “No!” I shouted and tried to break free of his grasp. “You can’t!” “Please, Ella.” His face was so pleading, his eyes begging for understanding. “Let me do this one thing for you.” “I lost you once, Andrew. I can’t do it again!” I squirmed below him, yanking and jerking to get away. “You won’t lose me,” he promised. “Just like I haven’t lost you . . . You’ve acquired a Phantom, that’s where the evil thoughts and actions are coming from. When you opened up to me, I could see it. Let me help you. Please?” My movements ceased as I devoured what he just told me. The evil inside me wasn’t me at all. It truly was a demon, a Phantom from the Abyss. Zola had told me about them. The Devil created an army to fight the Empyrean Guard called Phantoms. And now one was inside me, had taken root in my very being. “A . . . Phantom?” My voice was choked. “Yes,” he answered seriously, apologies whispering along my skin. “I can take the burden from you by welcoming the Phantom into myself. Let me do this for you.” A shaky breath left my lungs as I stared up into the very golden eyes of the man I loved—the man who was willing to try and expel this creature from me by taking it into himself. “I won’t let you!” I whimpered, but backed my words up with a whole lot of electrical punch. Andrew’s jaw clenched above me, his body taking the current and fighting it off. I’d never tried to use it against him before and he just now understood how powerful I truly could be. “Stop,” he commanded. “I’m only trying to help.” “This isn’t the answer,” I argued. “Please.” His voice was soft. Small. Wings burst from my back as I willed them to take shape and expel Andrew from above me. For once, they worked when I wished them to. I wouldn’t let him make such a sacrifice as to take an evil Phantom into himself. No way. I broke free from him as he stumbled back from me. Though my wings had turned a midnight black weeks prior, they were a pearly white right now. I flexed them out and was able to move several feet from Andrew. He rose from the blanket and held his arms out, partially in apology and partially because he couldn’t believe I wouldn’t let him do this. “Don’t do this,” he begged. “If it’s true, that I have a Phantom inside me, then we’ll work together to kill it off.” I folded my arms, my wings also folding behind me. “It doesn’t work that way,” he said. “To remove a Phantom you have to either kill the person possessed or put the

Phantom into someone else. It must have transferred to you when you killed the Soul Stalker in an attempt to stay alive.” And that was when I fell to my knees, a sob threatening to break free. “So I killed an innocent . . .” I glanced up at Andrew, beseeching. “She wasn’t evil! She’d been taken over?” I shouted the last and raked my hands through the sand fighting internally with the Phantom within. Andrew started to run toward me as something inside of me broke. Snapped. “There was no way to tell—you were only protecting yourself.” He froze mid-stride when he glanced at my face. “Fight! Ella! Fight it off,” he shouted. “No, it’s okay, dear Andrew.” The voice wasn’t mine, but it came from my throat. My mouth. I clutched at my neck, eyes wide. He knew it had come forward. The Phantom. Its complicated thought pattern wrapped its way through my body and made me stand, expand my now black wings, and take off into the sky. Andrew tore after me in an attempt to touch any part of my skin he could. Pearly wings burst from his back as he flew into the sky to follow. Two parts of me warred as I wanted to go to him while the Phantom inside took control of my muscles and had me dive straight down toward the ocean. The wind fluttered through my wings as they spread wide, and I jerked up and coasted over the pulsating waves. The Phantom wanted to fly away. I wanted to turn and go toward Andrew. The only question left was which side would win? 4 INFINITE LOVE There was a war waging within me. My body had become a hostile territory as I battled with the Phantom within. It —she—wanted me to fly as far away from Andrew as possible because she knew that if he touched us—me—I would be strong enough to fight her off. But, at the same time, she wanted to grasp Andrew around the neck, kiss him fully on the mouth, and inhale his soul like a starving predator. It was like a drug, an addiction to the flavor of such a succulent essence of virtue. Just to turn it into nothing but a dead corpse to cycle back into the world. Oh, how she loved Earth and its many complicated beings. So many things she could consume. It was a need so strong it crushed her under its weight and made the Phantom vulnerable. It was the one thing that made her weak and made me stronger. Its hold on me was cracking every second. The sun sparkled off the water and baked my skin. My wings continued to beat in fluid movements, gliding easily over the water that smoothed the farther out I went. Below I could see my rippling reflection as my wings flickered from black to white and back, sometimes an odd mixture of the two colors as I battled the Phantom within. Behind me, Andrew tried to catch up as he flexed his wings to seize the breeze coming off the water. I realized, as I was fleeing the man I loved, that I had fought the Phantom back with just the simple thought of love. The snarling thoughts of the creature inside me came loud and clear. She’d wanted a stronger immortal to possess, but, now that she had, regret filtered in. It was a catch-22, really. I was stronger, but I was also harder to own. I pushed down the Phantom until there wasn’t even an evil thought left inside me. Now all I could think about was protecting Andrew. My wings were now pearly white in the reflection, yet I continued to flee. I wouldn’t let Andrew do the selfless thing this time. “Why do you fly away?” Andrew shouted. “I’m sorry. Stop! Please.” I lost my focus and quit beating my wings at the hurt in his voice. It only took that small distraction and then I slammed into the water full force. It knocked the air out of my lungs as I rolled over and over the surface until I stopped and sunk deeply into the water with a huge splash. I was so stunned, and in so much pain, that I’d forgotten I needed to swim. I inhaled a lung-full of salty water and saw the beauty of the ocean around me, all aquagreen, coral, and sandy gorges. The peacefulness of it all made me jealous as I submerged farther and farther into the calm depth.

There was a tornado of water swirling up as Andrew plunged into the water and dove down to where I tranquilly floated, dazed. His wings were gone and all he wore was his swimming suit. His black hair surged and whirled around his head as his gold eyes seized mine and, even under water, I could see the distress there. His arms encircled me and I didn’t fight him off—not anymore. I couldn’t be alone in this journey and I didn’t want to be away from him. As he rushed me to the surface, I felt my consciousness sliding away from me. Lack of oxygen will do that to you, apparently. <> I came to with a frantic Andrew leaning over me, calling my name over and over with silver tears littering his face. I coughed and a gallon of water, at least that was what it felt like, came spilling out of my mouth. A relieved Andrew helped me sit up slightly as I coughed more water and gasped for air. My throat burned like I’d drank acid, but I could feel my body quickly repairing itself and the ache was soon gone. Except for my wings . . . they felt broken. When I attempted to move them I cried out in horrific pain and grasped Andrew’s forearms with strength I didn’t know I possessed. “I don’t know how to fix your wings,” Andrew explained, his expression helpless. Reflexively, I peered over my shoulder at the damage. It was bad. Like . . . really, really horrific. Feathers hung at odd, unnatural angles, silver blood oozed from several crooked places, and the shape of my wings were more like a triangle than the graceful swoop of feathers they should be. My voice was strangled when I tried to speak, but no words came to me. Instead, I lay my head on his shoulder and wept. Andrew’s hand came up and held my head there. He didn’t speak for several minutes, just let me mourn the loss of my wings. When I finally calmed to some degree, he spoke softly, still holding me against him, careful to not touch my back or wings. “I once cared for a human girl, several hundred years ago.” Okay, not what I was expecting him to say, though I kept quiet. “She died a mortal death. I knew it was inevitable, but I didn’t want to believe it would happen so early in her life. She was twenty-three.” He sucked in a deep breath. “But it did. Disease was rampant and many were dying. When she passed, Ehno and Aiden came to me to try and soothe my sorrow. Of course, you would know, it’s not that simple. It never is. They tried to help me, and, instead of accepting it, I ran. Their help made me feel more hopeless and I couldn’t take it.” Andrew stroked my hair lightly. “That night, the town we swore to protect was attacked. Ehno hadn’t told me, even though he knew it would happen. He blocked his thoughts from me as the attacks continued through the night. So many humans died, though Abelie was called in to heal many of them. Back then I didn’t know she had healing powers—only Aiden and Ehno knew; she kept that part of her secret in fear that someone would use her for it. She was so selfless, and I was selfish for running from help and abandoning my Brothers when they needed me.” I pulled away from his shoulder to take in his agonized expression. “What happened?” I whispered, my eyes searching his golden depths, slightly surprised they weren’t the color of rich wine. “I returned in the morning to smoke and fire. My Brothers were hurt, but alive, though many humans were dead. Abelie was—she was lifeless on the ground. The Guardians and Halos had surrounded Aiden and Abelie as they tried to revive her. As you know, she weakened when she healed someone. She’d healed over fifty people. Fifty,” he repeated. I nodded, engrossed in the story now. He looked away, ashamed. “And I felt such guilt. If I would have been there to help less humans would have died. Abelie wouldn’t have had to heal so many—she wouldn’t have been teetering between life and death on the ground. It took her a month to recover—the longest ever.” Andrew’s head snapped up and his eyes found mine, tortured and pleading. “And you know what my Brothers did?” I shook my head. “What?” “They accepted me with open arms and welcomed me back like I had just been a lost soul and they finally found

me. They were so grateful I was alive and well that they had no room for anger or blame. Though I felt extreme guilt, it was my own emotion and not one brought down upon me. “Love is infinite, Gabriella. There is no room for guilt or accusations. We’ll both make mistakes, but we can’t let it rule our love for one another.” He placed a tender kiss on my lips. “You scared me to death when I saw you floating there in the water, not even trying to live.” “I was stunned,” I argued. Because, really, I wanted to live. For him if not for the many other reasons that came to mind. He brushed my hair from my face. “I’m not blaming you,” he said simply. “Just telling you how I felt. For a moment I thought my heart would explode, and all I could think about was how I couldn’t lose you again. I felt weak and helpless, like I wanted to give up if you were gone—most of all, though, I felt guilt for trying to force you to do something you didn’t want to which negated all the rest. I love you, and love to me means sacrificing. So I was going to sacrifice myself to the Phantom so you wouldn’t have to deal with the evil it brings with it. Of course, you, too, were sacrificing yourself to the Phantom so I wouldn’t carry that burden.” “Love is infinite,” I murmured, repeating his logic. “Yes, it is. I accept that you wish for me not to take the Phantom from you and into myself.” He smiled sadly. “But, please, do me one favor?” “Anything,” I told him honestly. “Let me help you heal your wings. Accept my strength to fix that which is damaged.” He paused. “I promise that’s all I’ll do,” he clarified. “Okay,” I whispered. We clasped hands, our fingers interlocking. Energy raced between us in a rush of power and love. I could feel his essence seep into my body, as if his soul was joining mine and fixing all that was wrong with mine, but, mostly, my damaged wings. “Close your eyes,” he commanded. I did. “Now focus on your wings. Will them to mend and retreat back into you. It’s your will that will fix them—I only offer my soul and power to you.” There was a sensation in the tips of my toes that warmed, grew, and expanded up my legs and into the rest of my body. It felt like heated honey was gliding through me, sweet and thick with unspoken, sacred promises. I gasped and gripped Andrew’s hands as his devotion of spirit filled me with what I needed. There was such a rush of power I became light headed as I willed my wings to repair and turn back into the tattoo I had learned to love. With one last surge of power, I collapsed onto the sand. Andrew toppled over with me and lay partially on top of me, a smirk playing on his lips. “That was . . .” he trailed off, breathless. “Yeah,” I breathed, power drunk. <> We decided to take it easy that evening—no more lessons. Well, except the lesson in cooking on the stove and in the oven. Andrew was fascinated with the idea of baking and cooking without starting a fire. And the microwave— yeah, I thought he was going to buy a T-shirt that said “Team Microwave” on it. Watching him learn and take in the new things in this world was . . . amazing. I had no idea how lucky I was until I saw the light in his eyes as I explained the concept of it all. “Brilliant,” he said for the millionth time that evening as I explained the washer and dryer system. Some red wine had splashed onto my skirt and that was how that whole conversation came up. “What does everyone do all day if all of these contraptions do it all for you?” he asked, absolutely serious.

“Well,” I hedged as I backed out of the kitchen, “we lie around and watch movies.” I winked at him and he raised his eyebrows in question. “We make all of these contraptions so we have more time to do other things. Most of the time it’s just so we can work harder. But not tonight. Tonight it’s so we can relax and enter into another world.” An excited gleam filled Andrew’s eyes, and they flashed with a color I had no name for. Angelic, maybe? Was that a color? It should be. “Sit,” I told him. He did as I commanded. “I’ll be right back. Don’t move.” I dashed up the stairs to my suitcase and unzipped the outside pocket. It was sent to me as a joke by Jenna, but when I saw the big screen TV and DVD player down stairs I had to take advantage of it. The whole idea was silly and I wanted to laugh at myself and roll my eyes, but I had a feeling Andrew would be interested. The irony wasn’t lost on me, though. “This,” I said as I turned on the TV and popped in the DVD downstairs, “is a movie. It’ll start will some affiliate information, then probably previews for other movies, and then we’ll start.” The DVD player sucked up the movie. With the remote in hand, I went over and took a seat next to Andrew who stared at the TV in complete awe. Though I enjoyed previews, these were older because the movie had been out for a while so I skipped ahead. At the menu I let it sit for a minute so he could read the screen. “City of Angels?” he asked as his lips twitched up comically. “It’s very romantic and . . . Shakespearian, almost.” Andrew’s eyes lit with knowledge. “Are you talking about William Shakespeare?” “The one and only. Wait!” I turned toward him. “Don’t tell me you knew him or knew someone who knew him!” He lightly laughed. “No, nothing like that. The Elders admired his work. Especially Eleanor because her life’s work is based in the art of writing. She has an almost flawless memory and is an avid reader and writer.” “Are all the Elders like her? I mean, I know they are into protecting knowledge, but is it only books and such?” I asked, curious. “Oh no. Each Elder is chosen because they have a specialty or skill. Knowledge is not just in writing, Gabriella. For example, Paolo is a skeptic, a lot like you. He doesn’t believe anything until he can prove it. His special ability is to be able to find things that are lost, answering many of his questions. He likes to have physical evidence, to be able to hold the answer in his hands. He’s led the Elders to many lost treasures. “Paolo is very anti-social, but cares deeply for the Angels and humans. Eleanor realized his potential when she became lost in the forest beside their village and he led her straight to her house without even knowing her. When they grew into adults, before the corrupt king enslaved us, Eleanor brought the idea of the ‘Elders’ to his attention. He has been with them ever since. “See, he doesn’t care much about the actual knowledge the Elders protect. He’s more into finding answers and seeking out outlaws and criminals who try to destroy or steal knowledge.” “Makes sense,” I said. “He seems so . . . stone cold.” Laughter bubbled out of me. “I call him Stone Man in my head.” Andrew’s lips thinned for a moment and then he joined in my giggling state. With no preamble, he seized me in his arms and hugged me hard. “You’re unlike anyone I’ve ever met.” “Ditto, bucko!” I placed a kiss on his cheek when he let go, and we laughed harder. “Bucko?” Andrew’s eyebrows came together in confusion again. This, for some reason, made me laugh even harder. My sides were throbbing after all our laughter while cooking dinner. Where was Joseph when I needed his Miracle Phone? I was sure it had a dictionary on it.

“It’s slang,” I told him. “Means a crazy man like you.” I poked him in the belly, and he grabbed my finger. Déjà vu hit me as I remembered our time in the library in Idaho and an awfully similar situation. It seemed like time slowed around us. The lights suddenly dimmed, and all I could see was the dark outline of Andrew’s black hair as the TV’s lights flickered with the City of Angels DVD menu. Andrew pulled me forward, his arms encircling me into his warm chest where I rested my cheek. We fell onto the couch so I was wedged between him and the back of the couch. One leg was carelessly slung over his. Just the simple embrace of this Angel had me sighing into his body. Feelings and thoughts flooded me. I’d never felt so comfortable, so loved, so . . . protected before. And all it took was his arms around me—that had to mean something, right? I was so stuck in my own head and feelings that I hadn’t been paying attention to what this would all mean for him. He was a man, after all, and, from what I’ve been told, they don’t usually share the same opinions on things like this. So I secretly listened. What I heard stung a little. Why does this woman love me? I don’t deserve her . . . or any of this. She warrants better. Someone who won’t force things upon her like I did. And, yet, she’s still here. “You know I’m reading your thoughts right now, right?” I whispered, hugging him tighter. He stiffened around me. “I—oh.” “I’ll answer your question as long as you promise to never degrade what we have with these kinds of poisonous thoughts.” He was silently waiting for me to answer. “Promise me,” I demanded. “Then I’ll tell you, which I shouldn’t have to, but I understand being self-conscious about it. I know I am with you.” “Promise.” He exhaled into my hair and placed a small kiss on my forehead. Keeping my cheek pressed against his warm and comfortable chest, our bodies intertwined on the couch, I began to explain the simplest thing on the planet—in the entire universe. “You know, when I was in high school, I wasn’t even a teenager yet, and all of my classmates were fourteen to eighteen. I was an outcast because I couldn’t relate to my peers and vice versa. It was the same in college. I’ve been alone my whole life besides my family. But even in my family I’m different—the ‘smart one.’ “When you’re smarter than people around you, they treat you differently. Sometimes they think I look down upon them because they aren’t as intelligent as me. It’s ridiculous, really. If they all knew what I really thought—how I really felt—they’d all understand that I just wanted a friend.” Andrew squeezed me closer in sympathy. “So you know what I did? I started to read books—mainly science fiction and fantasy novels. There were these worlds where people like me fit and made sense. There were heroes and heroines who were the odd-balls out, yet people looked up to them instead of afraid of their skills and intelligence. Reading brought me peace that even Jenna and Nicole, my only friends, couldn’t give me. “Anyway,” I continued, “I became obsessed with finding someone else like me, or something even stranger and weirder. Something supernatural. All I could think about was how real I wanted those fiction stories to be, and how determined I was to make them real. I needed it. “Then one day, in my quest to find the impossible, came along three Angels. You literally saved me from exploding in that airplane when it crashed to the ground. Andrew, you are my savior. Then we were on the run, just you and me, and all I could think about was you. This confused Angel who practically landed in my lap. You were different: strange, beautiful, supernatural—mine.” Andrew brushed some of my hair from my forehead and whispered, “I was yours the moment I awoke.”

I smiled. “Internally I fought with myself because I knew you were this immortal, and I was a human—I know I’m not, but then I didn’t know any better—and those stories I loved so much came back to bite me in the ass. An immortal and mortal falling in love might work in fiction, but there was no way in real life. I’d die and you’d live. “Still, every moment I was in your presence, you intrigued me and made something inside of me light up with an emotion I had never truly understood. I couldn’t even figure out the word for it until I saw you behind that glass in the underground lab. The concern for me that was etched into your face, your kind and sweet words when I wasn’t being pleasant to you, and how selfless you were when you were the one behind a glass wall was—there are no words for it. It was then I knew I loved you. That foreign emotion was love. And you gave it to me. “I really thought about it, too, Andrew. I had dated in the past, and none of them could hold a candle to how amazing you are. So what if our connection is partially supernatural? So what if this is all so fast and sudden? It feels right. Every part of my body recognizes you as mine. So why do I love you, Andrew?” He was quiet as his heart thrummed under my fingertips upon his chest. My next words were so, so quiet. A murmur in the dark. “You are my hero, my friend, my lover. You are safety and the millions of other words that I could spit out. But really? I love your heart as much as you love mine. You’re right about love, Andrew. It’s absolute. Selfless. Which is what you are: selfless and a constant rock in my life. Am I right?” I lifted my chin on his chest and gazed into his endlessly deep eyes as we both lounged there on the couch. His right hand came up to tuck my stray hairs behind my ear as he continued to stare into my eyes. It was as if his eyes swirled like flames that caught a breeze. “Yes,” he breathed. “You’re right—I’d do anything for you, Ella. Anything.” The world around us melted away, and I couldn’t hold in my power any longer. It was like my soul wanted to escape me and crawl up into Andrew and curl around his. The dark was suddenly ablaze with my electrical current as it spread from me to him. We didn’t kiss or move, only gazed into each other’s eyes as our souls connected and our thoughts mixed together until all that was left between us were our clothes. It felt as though all pretenses, doubts, and unanswered questions had dissolved and there was nothing left but pure, undiluted love flowing fluidly like warm, liquid satin from me to him and back again—a never ending cycle of passionate embraces. “Can you feel it?” I finally whispered between us. “I understand,” he said and pulled me toward his lips where he placed a heavenly kiss upon mine. It was so simple, yet held so many hidden meanings. A small smile graced my lips when we parted. “You promised me, but I need to hear it from your lips.” “Whatever you need,” he stated without hesitation. “Promise me you won’t let thoughts like I don’t deserve her creep into your mind and contaminate what we have. And—” I paused, uncertain how to say it, but decided I’d just spill my guts, “—promise me you won’t try to convince yourself you’re bad for me or something silly like that.” His chest shook with light chuckles. “I promise, I promise, I promise,” he chanted. “If anything, you’re the one that’s bad for me,” he teased. “Watch it, bucko,” I said with a smile spread across my face. “Now, how about we watch how the movies see angels?” “This should be interesting,” he said. We cuddled together on the couch as we watched City of Angels, life seemingly perfect. Even if, underneath it all, it was going to hell. We’d get through it together. 5 IMPENDING WAR

Cinnamon pyramids towered over us in the disappearing sunlight. The red sun caught the scene aflame as a sea of heat waves danced their molten amber over the blazing desert. We’d been in Egypt for six days and the feverish temperature sent a bead of sweat trickling down my spine. All the Elders were here for the first dig into the Niuserre Isi pyramid. Leonardo was practically doing back flips through the sand at the artifacts within. “Wow!” Leo crowed, his eyes shining amethysts. “Do you see the fine detail of the pharaoh’s clothing, Abelie?” I shook my head, exhausted. Leo turned to Carmela in excitement as they began a lengthy discussion about the burial chambers they were dying to find. This wasn’t my specialty. I fixed people, worked strictly in the art of healing, or stayed in the Divine Library as the curator so the others could travel. This was definitely all Leo’s thing. But we worked as a group, each with our own specialty. I walked away so I’d be out of their way, past Aiden and the other Halo Brothers—who were goofing off —who decided to join us and make a vacation of it, before I found Lucia. She was perched on a large sandstone, her white dress, thin and small, surged against her tanned skin in the breeze. Sand streamed between her fingers, plummeted down and vanished before it hit the ground. It looked like a mirage—prisms of sunlight angling every direction in the disturbance of her tiny portal. “You’re scary-good at that, you know?” I noted. She glanced up at me, her crystal blue eyes accented by the sun’s scarlet light glowing around her slick burgundy hair, and smiled. “I was just adding it to my collection.” I sat beside her. “Your collection?” She blushed, making her skin glow radiantly. “It’s silly, really. I have hundreds of tiny bottles full of dirt or sand from all the places I’ve been.” “Really?” I was surprised because I’d never seen such a collection, yet I’d been to many of her houses through the years. Like she was reading my mind she said, “I don’t show them because I haven’t really had time to think of an artistic way to display them in our home. It’s dirt, right?” She laughed lightly, the sound like wind chimes. “I’ve enlisted Leo to help me but he’s been traveling all over the place lately. On this Egyptian kick.” “I know,” I grumbled. “I’ve been along for many of those trips. Carmela enjoys it because where Leo’s art and artifacts lead him, there’s usually a historical document or two for her to get her fingers on. But me? I’m bored out of my mind.” “I guess I can’t complain, really. I’ve been on Guardian duty for the past fifty years.” She waved her hand over the quivering disturbance her portal made until it closed. “Guardian duty?” The way she said it threw me off. Women were rarely enlisted for such a duty unless it was a special circumstance. “Not like that.” Lucia shook her head, her auburn hair shining in the last sliver of sunlight. “I’m protecting the Guardians, thanks to the Ladies of Light.” She rolled her eyes. “There hasn’t been any action against the Guardians in hundreds of years. Zola says that since the Covetous War it’s been practically silent.” “Oh?” I raised my eyebrows at that. Zola rarely spoke about our ancestors and the wars so long ago. “Yeah. Your anima gemella said my service was unnecessary, but the Ladies refused. The Halos asked me to work with Zola and to make portals for easier transport. Not everyone is as lucky as Andrew and his flying abilities. But following my anima gemella is definitely an upside,” she added happily. “I bet. I wish Aiden had more free time to accompany me on these trips. He’s been so busy with the Halo of the

Sun lately.” I sighed. “There’s always someone who needs saving.” We sat in silence for a while as we watched our boys and their antics. Ehno was shouting something about the wild ways of the Fifth Dynasty as he jumped on Andrew’s back like Andrew was a horse in training. Andrew laughed and ran toward Aiden with a flailing Ehno on his back. They were all guffawing as they collided in a big heap and began to wrestle like five year old boys. “They may live forever,” I started. “But they’ll always be the same,” Lucia finished, and we both chuckled. “Does Zola talk about the past a lot?” I hedged, seeking knowledge. “Mostly the future. We’ve all heard the stories of Lucifer—the Devil. Whatever you want to call him.” She wiggled her fingers as if doing a magic trick. “She doesn’t talk much beyond those stories. But now she’s been coming to me about portals. She has questions about them. A great deal of questions, actually.” “That’s strange.” I leaned over so my elbows rested on my knees. “Why’d she want to know?” “She brought up the Darkness Illuminator again,” she whispered, like it was some deep-dark secret and if we spoke too loudly we’d be struck by lightning. “She said that the Illuminator will come to me one day and I needed to be prepared.” I gaped at her and sat up straight. “The Illuminator is going to come to you?” My voice sounded just as awed as I felt. “That’s what I said! She didn’t go into details because she didn’t want to ‘change the future’ by giving me too much information.” Lucia gave a short-unhumored laugh. Her voice suddenly lowered to a small whisper. “She said a war is coming and the Abyss will be opened once again.” “But—” I gasped. “But the Fallen . . . and the Phantoms.” “I know,” Lucia said even lower. I had to lean in to hear her. “She said it’s the only way to win the war, and that redemption will come to our ancestors.” “That doesn’t make any sense whatsoever!” I couldn’t believe this. There was no time frame for when this Darkness Illuminator would come, just that she would extinguish the curse and defeat our enemies. Much of the prophecy was confusing. The mention of “Shadows” was clear, though they were just a myth. I hoped. “What’s even weirder is she said, ‘She is born from darkness and light, her power divine is a blue current inside.’ I mean, that’s very odd. She speaks like this Illuminator is one of us, an Angel, but she said she’s born from darkness and light.” Lucia’s eyebrows came together. “It must be one of us, then,” I said suddenly, “because we can’t have children. She must be speaking metaphorically.” We both looked up reflexively at the Angels surrounding us; the guys were still howling loudly over something while the Elders seemed to be in a deep discussion about the artifacts. It could easily be one of them—someone I’ve known my whole immortal life could be my savior. Then, as if on cue, Lucia and I glanced at each other. Or, I added mentally, it could be me. I shook my head, refusing to think that way. It wasn’t me—if anyone, it’d be Lucia. She was so powerful I could literally feel it trekking across my skin. But Zola said the Illuminator would come to Lucia—which means Lucia isn’t the Illuminator. “The Timeless Oblivion is still closed off from Earth, though,” Lucia expressed, clearly concerned. “And Zola never said anything about that.” “What about the Archangels?” I asked. “If one of the Messengers comes to us then the Timeless Oblivion will be open again and the Empyrean Guard can come and protect us.”

“I haven’t heard anything about the Archangels, Abelie.” Lucia shivered and I knew it wasn’t because of the ridiculous heat. “I’m sure Zola is sharing this information with the Ladies of Light and the Halo of the Sun—I’m sure they’re training and preparing for war.” “Are you sure?” I challenged. “Aiden hasn’t said anything about it to me, nor have I heard it in his thoughts.” Lucia’s rich, blue eyes seized mine. “I haven’t heard anything like that from Ehno either.” Terror had crept into her voice. The sun was gone and stars twinkled above us like tiny, mocking gods. “If the Devil finds a way to free himself from the Perpetual Inferno, he’ll destroy Earth. Surely the Gods won’t let that happen!” I protested. “I wish I could reassure you, Abelie. But I can’t, and Zola won’t tell me anything. I gave up a long time ago with coaxing information from her. I trust her, though. She’ll do what’s right. And if what’s right is not telling us the outcome, then we’ll have to live with that.” “You’re right, Lucia,” I agreed, and decided to take the conversation in a different direction. “So, do you want to make bets on who’ll end up being the Darkness Illuminator?” The horror in Lucia’s eyes melted away as a smirk appeared on her face. “Oh, you’re on!” 6 SWEET AGONY Darkness pressed in and enveloped me like an obsidian cloud of night. My obscured surroundings did not accompany any ominous feelings, though. Quite the opposite, actually. I was still on the couch, squeezed between cushions and Andrew’s body—no complaining here. By his even breaths I could tell he was still asleep. One arm was under my head while the other wrapped around my waist. My nose was nestled in the crook between his ear and collar. His skin smelt like the woods and honeysuckle combined—a heady scent. Gently, I pressed my lips to his neck, and he sighed in contentment. Secretly I smiled. My fingers on my left hand ached like they had been put in a vice grip and I realized I had seized Andrew’s shirt and twisted it in my palms, obviously drawing him closer in sleep. I let go and pulled my arm into his protective grasp. He was still sound asleep, and I was enjoying his peaceful state, even though I couldn’t see him in the dark house. In the background the woosh of waves outside saturated the air and surrounded us. Everything felt peaceful, calm, even better than the depths of the ocean. Andrew inhaled deeply, like he was sniffing my hair, and tightened his arms around me while his leg pushed between mine. I straddled his thigh and shivered and warmed at the same time. This man did amazing things to me with just the tiniest of touches or movements. How had I lived my whole life without having him here with me? It just seemed wrong and—unethical. “Bad dream?” he asked huskily, pulling me from my thoughts. My face heated several degrees at my unethical thoughts. “No. It was Abelie again.” “Important?” he breathed, pulling me even closer and yawning, his hair in complete disarray. “It can wait,” I replied and tenderly kissed his neck again. “I’d say let’s go upstairs, but I’m pretty comfy.” His thigh moved higher between my legs, and I almost squeaked like a mouse. I was a trembling puddle of Gabriella goo at this new sensation. “Are you?” he asked serenely. Just his accent was causing me to quiver. It was low, rough, and husky. “Um? Yeah.” My voice was breathy, uneven. “I’m good.” He didn’t respond with words, only hummed in contentment. Then he began to move his leg between mine and I moaned—then gasped, covering my mouth in surprise. My eyes flew open in astonishment as I shot up, my legs

tangled with his. He rose too, his eyes glowing darkly in the night. “What’s wrong?” I quickly turned to him and encased my arms around his neck in apology, laughing like an insane person. That’s embarrassing. “Ella?” Andrew’s voice was alert and tentative now. So, he wasn’t reading my thoughts? A little less embarrassing except now I had to explain my actions. He moved away from me and held the tops of my arms so I’d have to look at him. I still couldn’t see anything except the electrical blue where his fingers encircled my arms. “New lesson,” he said mildly. “Seeing in the dark is quite simple once you learn to adjust your eyes. This is the easiest ability to use if you just think about it.” Everything was suddenly in a tinted blue, but visible to my eyes. That was simple. When I looked into Andrew’s face he had a cocky grin splayed there. “Now, tell me, did I do something wrong?” His grin faded. “On the contrary,” I stated quickly and blushed again. I’m just embarrassed by my reaction, I added mentally. He smirked. I thought it was the perfect reaction. This time I returned the smile. “Really?” He nodded. “I’m not used to—” I waved my hand around as if that explained it all. What were the norms? It wasn’t like I could trust TV or the movies. “How about you just be you,”—he placed his palm over my heart—“and I’ll just be me,”—I put my hand over his heart in return—“and when we’re connected”—electricity sparked between us in a mesmerizing tunnel of light —“we’ll be us. There are no wrong reactions when I hold you in my arms. I want to know how you feel, what you think, what you want. Not what you think I want to hear.” “Wow.” I started to laugh so hard I was about to snort. “How long have you been practicing that?” I teased. He cocked an eyebrow before joining in with my laughter. “I just have a way with words when it comes to you.” “Oh really?” “Of course. I was murdered, yet here I am with you. That’s a miracle and it’s because of you. Makes me very poetic.” His tone was awed, and I blushed furiously. Again. “Will you tell me what you know about this Phantom? Or any Phantoms? And the Abyss?” I was about to ask about the Perpetual Inferno—where the Devil himself lived—when Andrew placed a finger to my lips. “I’ll tell you what I know—one thing at a time.” He smiled and nodded once to himself. “What do you already know?” My mind tried to focus on what Zola told me in the Divine Library before she . . . died. “Zola explained the history to me briefly about the Celestial Gods and the worlds they created.” “I don’t really know much more than the basic history myself.” For the first time he looked tired. “Phantoms aren’t like the Empyrean Guard because they don’t have a physical form. They’re truly spirits. It was really an ingenious way to build an army. The Phantom would take over its victim and have it fight. If there was any contact during the loss of their vessel it could enter into the killer and have the new vessel turn and fight against their comrades. It was a very effective battle tactic because no one wants to kill the face of someone they love, even if the person on the surface is wielding a sword and slashing at your throat. The one good thing we have on our side is that Phantoms can’t live in this world without a host, so it isn’t like they’re floating around looking for victims.”

“Oh.” Fear ravaged my stomach. “I just wanted to know because, in my dream, Abelie was talking to Lucia about things Zola had told her.” “What’d she say?” I recapped my dream to him, even the parts about him goofing off. Andrew’s lips twitched up when I told him about Ehno’s little piggy-back ride, but soon he frowned when I relayed the part about the Abyss opening back up— basically being a free-for-all if any human were to stumble upon it. My mind pictured a possessed human gathering their friends so they could get a Phantom of their own, and I shuddered. “You don’t think it’s already happened and that’s why I have this Phantom inside me, do you?” I asked, being completely serious. The thought frightened me. Sometimes the Angelic world seemed so untouchable because I was still so new to it. But now it was finally becoming real—I’d lost and gained, and was in the middle of it all. He shook his head. “No, but I curse the Phantom for choosing you,” he practically growled in Italian. The words spilled off his tongue in the most beautiful of liquid languages. Surprisingly, I understood every word he muttered. “Eva was her name,” he said softly. “The Angel possessed with the Phantom—we all thought she was just an Angel gone rogue. I guess we were all wrong. This must also be the reason she survived when we all thought her to be dead.” He closed his eyes briefly like he was trying to swallow a ghastly image. “Who knows how long that Phantom has been on Earth gathering information.” In a tangle of limbs, with the soft light of the morning sun beginning to rise in an indigo mist, a ripple of distress spread through Andrew and into me. It was extreme and his eyes flashed blue under his long lashes. His large palms secured my cheeks so I had to look at him—not that I wanted to stare anywhere else. “You are stronger. You will defeat this.” It was like he was trying to convince himself more than me, and I knew he doubted—not me, but himself. “You will,” he repeated firmly in Italian. I took his hands into mine and gazed right into his eyes that were back to gold. “We will,” I corrected. Wrinkles gathered on his forehead like waves hitting the shore. “We will get through this together, Andrew. I’ve thought about what you said—about coming back to life for me. Ehno came back because he’s intuitive, and I bet the universe knew Zola would sacrifice herself. Ehno can also communicate with the other Guardians once I Illuminate them. Ehno’s necessary to my journey. Lucia’s back because I need her to open a portal to the Abyss.” Andrew opened his mouth to argue, but I cut him off by placing my hand over his lips. “But you . . . I couldn’t figure out why you would have been brought back. You fly. But so can I now that I’ve got wings. You can do your mind-to-mind with the Guardians, but so can Ehno. So the only thing I could think of is that you were brought back because I would need you, my kindred soul, to survive this. So yes. We will get through this together. Your place is at my side.” He removed my hand from his mouth. “You are not going into the Abyss!” he commanded sternly. “How else am I going to get rid of this Phantom?” I countered and swore I could feel her little spirit-like fingers stretching inside me. “I— I don’t know.” His mouth formed a straight line of indignation. “Exorcism? Is that how? Or should we get some human to take the burden and then kill them? Or maybe you’d like to be the one to end my life?” I raised my eyebrows in challenge. He gaped at me, his mouth opened and shut several times before his jaw locked tight. “That’s what I thought. If this thing can’t live on Earth without me then we take it to a place it can. I’ve got to convince the Phantom to leave me.” I caressed his tight jaw, and he visibly relaxed under my fingers. “Lucia can open portals—when she finds out about me she’ll be more than willing to help.” “I’ve already told Ehno—and Patrick and Aiden,” he said simply.

“Oh, right. The mind-to-mind thing.” I pointed at my forehead. “I keep forgetting that Aiden’s now able to communicate that way.” “I don’t like this idea,” he said, staying serious and firm. “If you come up with a better plan I’d like to hear it.” I sat very still, waiting defiantly. “Fine,” he griped. “But this doesn’t mean I have to like it.” The light outside was turning into a burnt orange, and I didn’t have to use my special Angelic vision to see Andrew anymore. His thick black hair was in a jumble and his white T-shirt was wrinkled—especially where I had gripped it —and his black, sporty shorts had shifted so you could see more of his muscled thigh. Our legs were still interlaced as we sat awkwardly on the couch. I traced a finger around one of his kneecaps and watched the spark that formed between us. It was always easier to hear his thoughts when I used my power. Andrew was seething. Not at me. Not at himself. Just at the situation in general. He hated feeling helpless and useless. We aren’t helpless, I thought seriously. And you aren’t useless. His eyes shot to mine and that deep red flashed in his eyes, his thoughts just as clear. Yup, the rich wine color was exactly what I expected it to mean. He gathered me in his arms and held me so forcefully and gingerly at the same time I was left breathless. Want to make you mine. Trying so hard to respect your boundaries , he thought, though I didn’t think he meant for me to hear. My heart was slamming against my chest, a knot forming in my throat, and butterflies stormed my stomach with purpose. He had no idea what he did to my body—how easily I came unglued in his arms. Words wanted to form and tumble from my lips, but some things were inexpressible in the simple form of speech. “Okay,” I murmured against his chest, the only word that seemed to make any sort of logical sense. He became a statue around me, and I held my breath. “Okay?” I was already breathing heavily and all we were doing was hugging. I broke free of his arms and untangled my legs with his. Andrew looked torn on what to do, and I was torn on the inside on what I was supposed to do. The logistics of it I knew, obviously. But to actually do the act itself was—damn, there were so many adjectives I wanted to use but none seemed right. Scary? Exciting? Nerve-inducing? My heart had yet to stop drumming wildly behind my ribs. Reflexively, my eyes zoned in on Andrew’s vein in his neck as it thumped under his smooth skin. Deep breath. I pushed Andrew against the couch so he was sitting back, his legs hanging off the side. He stared at me, a mix between startled and eager. Another deep breath. Heart still exploding in my chest. Surprisingly, my feet held me steady when I stood. With trembling fingers, I hooked my thumbs in my pajama shorts and let them drop to the ground. Andrew’s eyes grew wide and changed to a startling deep red, almost black. I was silently sending prayers to Lucia for packing me decent underwear. Nothing racy, but no granny-panties either. My nerves grabbed a hold of the sane, logical Gabriella and made her keep her shirt on. There was a tumultuous rush of electricity frantically trying to jump from me to Andrew, as if it had a mind of its own. It felt like we were connected so deeply a rope was holding us together and all he had to do was tug. I was sure of Andrew so this shouldn’t be so hard. This should be as easy as loving him, right? The engrained part of me that wanted to hold everything with a grain of salt was urging me to be the skeptic I was in the lab. But I wasn’t in the lab, I was standing before the one—and only—man I had ever loved. Andrew, the gentleman that he was, kept his eyes firmly on mine, tempting me with his cut jaw and soft, pink lips. He didn’t speak or move toward me, silently telling me the ball was in my court. Another deep breath, and I rushed the couch and tackled him. Don’t ask me why I did it—it seemed like a good idea at the time. I straddled his waist with no shame and let my fingers get lost in his messy hair. His hands held my waist and I felt so small compared to this man. A gasp rushed out of me as our bodies touched in ways I’d never imagined—nor did I imagine how wonderful it would feel to be consumed by him.

His heated gaze held mine as our foreheads touched. Our lips barely made contact, and I shuddered, my breathing uneven. Each time our mouths met it was gentle, soft, unhurried, but for some reason this was more intense. Everything about it was just—more. Power seemed to circle around us, freezing out everything else. He was being careful with me and, though he was sure in his movements, he was unsure within. “I want you,” I softly said between kisses. It was all the confirmation he needed. His hands roamed up the back of my shirt, goose bumps trailing in their wake. I wasn’t wearing a bra and the thought almost panicked me, but I totally forgot about it when he held me around my ribs. Our kisses became more frantic. More needy. He sucked my bottom lip into his mouth and then I nipped him back. It was like lightning crashing through a tempest of passion. His thoughts, his feelings, rushed me like a whole football team of Andrews had tackled me. Every second was like reading into a complicated twist of words and pictures. But it was all clear for me—it made sense. There wasn’t a single part of his mind that did not contain me—it was absolute. Unchanging. His soft lips left trails of sweet agony in their wake, every inch of my skin begging to be touched in some way. It was never enough. Andrew’s thumbs lightly grazed the sides of my breasts, and I gasped a breathy moan into his ear as he kissed and nibbled my neck with reckless abandon. The touch, so simple, so small, was so profound, new and different my body didn’t know how to react except to plead for him to do it again so it could assess how wonderful it truly was. Andrew heard the thoughts as they echoed all around us; his desire, my want and need, and his constraint as he contemplated what was too much, or if he even wanted to listen to reason anymore. As if choreographed, we both pulled away at the same time, our eyes locked, and time froze around us in a heated, magic storm. He watched my reaction as he carefully, tenderly, cupped one of my breasts under my shirt. My lips parted as a low, breathy gasp escaped me, and I involuntarily arched into his touch. His eyes flickered down to my lips and hungry thoughts crowded behind his eyes. I bit my bottom lip, just to tease him, and pulled his shirt up and over his head. My fingers trailed along his chest and followed the veins in his biceps. We were learning each other as we both explored. When our eyes locked again something gave way in Andrew, and he leaned forward, slowly, as if it was our first kiss, and let his lips just barely brush across mine, our breath heavy between us. His strong hands grabbed my hips and threw me down on the couch. I looked up at him in surprise, but barely had time to think about it before he was on me, his body lying between my bare legs. It was the most amazing, mind-blowing, intense pleasure I had ever felt. I wasn’t sure what to do in this situation so I just let my hands find every curve of his skin—every heated cell beneath my touch reacted to the electricity that had consumed us in our tempest. “If we don’t stop now”—kiss—“I won’t be able to stop,” Andrew said breathlessly against my lips. “Then don’t,” I replied roughly. “I want to do this right.” “It feels right to me,” I said unabashedly between hot kisses. “You’re killing me,” he groaned and pushed himself against me again. I inhaled sharply. “Your heart’s beating just fine, if you ask me,” I croaked. My fingers tickled his skin with my current right above his heart. He groaned again and moved off my body, though he lay beside me and continued to kiss down my neck as his hands played along my stomach. I wondered if he could feel the butterflies fluttering? I reached for his face and brought his lips to mine and heard the war waging in his thoughts. What’s too much? When’s it too far? Will she regret this later? The questions were frantic and unanswered as they continued to assault him. But I felt resolved and made sure it resonated through our touch louder than his doubts. He heard, piercing his hesitation, before he also became resolved. His fingers hooked into my underwear and a mixture of panic and

excitement rushed through my veins. My heart was pounding, banging, about to explode with the pressure of it all. “I can stop,” he murmured. I didn’t say yes; I didn’t say no. I let him hold my fate in his hands to show my trust. I was a twenty-four year old woman who had never gone this far with any man. This was a step I wanted to take—had dreamed of taking with him. Andrew hesitated with his movements and his face pulled back to gauge my reaction. I don’t know what he saw there, but the next thing I knew I was arching off the couch. There was only blinding pleasure as his hand reached deeper into my panties. It was the most exquisite, most real, most . . . inconceivable feeling in the entire universe. Hell, the entire galaxy. I tried to think of a word to describe it, but I came up blank. But I did know one thing: I finally understood what all the fuss was about. In the next moment, with need coursing through me, another emotion filtered in. One I had tried to hide and push away so I could be with my kindred soul without reservations. Fear. It was there, prominent, and begging to show its ugly head. Andrew could feel the change and seized my eyes with his. I sat up and backed away from his glorious touch before it could distract me even more. He looked torn and raised his hand to touch my face, but I shied away, afraid that even that touch would send me into the throws of passion again. And I couldn’t have that because I would let him take me in all the ways that mattered and it would make Andrew vulnerable to the Empyrean Guard. He was hurt, but I did it for his own good—and secretly because I was selfish and didn’t want to lose him again. “Did I do something wrong?” he asked hoarsely, the pain obvious in his voice. “No—not at all. I just—” I pointed toward the french doors that led to the beach. “I need to think.” Anguish crossed his face, but he nodded and moved so I could get past him. He was careful not to touch me and a small part of my heart broke. Stupid fear. 7 PARALYZED The sun was at a low angle and painted the world in pastels. The air was warm and salty. Waves crashed over the beach as I sat in the sand, my chin rested on my drawn-up knees. I didn’t even bother to put my shorts back on. I felt like a schmuck, telling him it was what I wanted, reassuring him, and then taking it away. What kind of person —Angel—was I? Not a very kind one, obviously. I should go back, I thought, and apologize. The problem was, I still hadn’t decided what I really wanted to do with us. What if I made the wrong decision and got him killed? My over-active imagination pictured this with such vivid detail I felt sick and nauseated, unable to digest the horrible thoughts. It was as if an invisible hand tightened on my heart. An hour passed as my thoughts tangled in a complicated, angry weave. Andrew never showed, though I could feel his presence all around me, his thoughts just beyond reach as if he was protecting himself by not letting me hear. That cut me the deepest—a knife twisting in my gut. My behavior had been erratic, but for some reason I thought he’d come out here to check on me by now. Sure, it was foolish—I wasn’t completely irrational—but it still hurt. And I knew I deserved it. A figure appeared before me from thin air as I squinted toward the sun. I started, not even this seeming to pull me too far from my unwieldy thoughts. It was Lucia, her dark, red hair glinting in the sun. Her sapphire eyes sparkled with unspoken knowledge and her mouth curved down in a confused and worried frown. She wore a pair of blue

jeans and a white, fluffy jacket with a yellow scarf knotted around her neck. I’d almost forgotten that it was winter in the northern hemisphere. In her hands she had shorts and held them out to me silently. “Thanks,” I said gratefully and slipped them on, only to take up my original position of holding myself together. Lucia joined me, took her shoes, socks, and jacket off, and shoved her feet in the sand. Underneath her jacket she wore a very thin, grey silk blouse that undulated in the wind. She stayed silent, remaining a soothing presence at my side. Maybe this was Andrew’s way of comforting me without breaking the “boundaries.” Ones I wished he would. A few minutes passed before Lucia dared to speak. “What happened?” Her voice was patient. “I’m a jerk. That’s what happened,” I answered bitterly as I ground sand between my fingers. We both stared at the ocean as the waves surged forward and back with their soft woosh. “Andrew contacted Ehno, frantic,” Lucia informed. “He didn’t tell him what happened, but asked me to come out here to speak with you.” She hesitated for a second. “If you don’t want to talk about it with me I understand.” Silence followed her words, and I failed at finding a way to explain—and a way to hide how distraught I felt about what I did. Girl talk was something I did with Jenna—not Lucia. She was a new friend and we hadn’t figured out the limitations yet. Tension grew so thick in the air I was tempted to swat at it. “Gabby,”—the nickname surprised me, and I turned to her with wide eyes—“Andrew is my family. He’s like a brother to me and Ehno. And right now he’s upset, and I don’t know why.” She took in a deep breath, clearly trying to stay calm. So was I. “You might not want to talk with me about it, but you need to talk with him.” Her tone turned irritated. “He’s never been like this over a girl before, which means that you hold the power to hurt him more than anyone else. For me, and our family’s sake, fix it.” She went to get up, but I placed my hand on her forearm. Lucia froze and pivoted to see my expression, which I hoped conveyed apology. I let out a shaky breath. “We haven’t . . . bonded.” I didn’t know if that was the right word, but understanding colored her face with a light blush as she claimed her spot next to me again. “Why?” she asked, stunned, her eyebrows coming together in perplexity. “I’m a virgin, Lucia,” I muttered, like that alone would give me a pass for being a complete and utter dunce. Virgin: my get out of sex for free card. My statement shocked her into silence, as it would anyone that lived in the twentieth century. I sighed, aggravated at myself. “And I’m afraid of what it will do to his standing with the Empyrean Guard. They’ll protect him now—after he’ll be on their to-kill list.” I imagined the Empyrean Guard sitting around a big, round table with their list of Angels they planned to kill, marking them off one-by-one, and shuddered. “Andrew would be careful with you,” she replied softly. “He loves you and would never in a million years take advantage of you.” “He is careful with me. That’s not the problem.” My face heated at the image of exactly how tender he could be when he touched all the right places. “What are you so worried about with the Empyrean Guard? Not joining souls with Andrew could have unwanted, long-lasting effects. This isn’t wise.” She was honestly concerned. So was I at the phrase “long-lasting effects.” That was something Andrew never brought up—probably because he didn’t want to be forceful with me. “The Empyrean Guard need me, and until I join with Andrew, he’s safe from them because I need him for the full extent of my powers to work,” I explained. I didn’t know why I tried to justify what I’d done to Andrew—I couldn’t. “That’s ridiculous. You’re putting both of yourselves in danger.” She cut herself off and the silence became scarycalm. Lucia’s eyes clouded over darkly as she grew irate and rose to her feet, sand flying into the air at her quick speed.

“No matter what I do, there’s a possible, unfavorable outcome,” I argued, staring up at her indignant blue eyes as they darkened. “As with all decisions in life!” she snapped. The way the sun hit her hair you’d think she was on fire, her eyes crystallizing into a fierce black. For the first time I feared her, but I would not back down, not when Andrew’s safety was at stake. I also rose to my feet. “But this one is mine—not yours!” The Phantom stirred and her ghostly fingers trailed under my skin, begging to be free. It fed off my emotions. “But your decisions affect us all,” she shouted sharply. My breath came in a charge of electricity and outrage. The Phantom itched to get out and my own body couldn’t take the pressure she placed on me. It felt like I was ripped from my body as the dark creature possessed me. Wings expanded from my back in a flood of black feathers. “Mind your own business,” the Phantom spoke through me. “You don’t control this body; I do.” Lucia pulled a dagger from her back, just like the one Patrick gave me. The confusion was splayed across her face. “Gabriella?” I was screaming at the top of my lungs, yet my mouth stayed disobediently shut, refusing to let a single cry escape. It was like being inside yourself and having no control—like being paralyzed. My mind begged the Phantom to back off, but she only fed off my terror. It was a stimulant to her—a tonic. “She’s not here right now. Try again later,” my voice said coolly. I felt helpless as the creature took over my body, feeding on all my doubts, fears, and anger. She got a strange high from controlling me, and leaving me unable to rein her in or fight her off. Lucia’s faltering almost got her killed as my body shot into the air and plummeted down to land on top of her. I straddled her stomach. She was quick, though, and had the dagger at my throat in seconds. “Who are you?” Lucia asked thickly as my weight held her body against the sand. “Oh, hmm,” I said—the Phantom said—in contemplation. “I’m pretty sure that the Angels named me the Soul Stalker.” Panic coated Lucia’s face as a horrified gasp flew from her lips. “Yeah, that was it. The Soul Stalker. You know, it has a nice ring to it.” The Phantom clearly enjoyed every second of this. Lucia’s blade bit into my neck and silver blood run down it and drip onto her neck. “I’ll do it!” Lucia said seriously. “And kill your precious Illuminator?” My hands roamed over my body as a smirk graced my lips. Inside, I screamed louder and louder. We needed help—we needed Andrew. “She died and came back before. Who’s to say she can’t do it again?” The dagger dug in even deeper and a painful gasp escaped me. Except, it wasn’t me who did it. I could feel every sharp inch of that blade and I couldn’t make a single sound. It was the most terrifying thing that had ever happened to me. I had no control. “Ah, but you don’t know if that’s true.” My hand grasped Lucia’s wrist and pulled it away from my neck with surprising strength. She struggled under my weight; her teeth gritted, body rigid, and hair littered with sand. My other hand went to her throat and began to choke her. Inside, I was crying and shaking. I wanted to close my eyes and not see what was happening, but I had no control, and the Phantom was enjoying the sensation. Lucia’s hand slammed into the sand as I held her against the ground. The dagger knocked loose and I could finally see Lucia’s true power pooling in her eyes. In that moment, I truly feared for my life from this person who swore to protect me. The air picked up in a wild wind, the sand swirled around us like a forming tornado, and the world began to shimmer like an iridescent opal. She’d opened a portal and, as soon as I thought it, the Phantom realized what

was happening. But it was too late and we were both suddenly thrust into another dimension. We were on our feet, though the Phantom was confused by the change. The world was like a dry wasteland of black and gold rocks, and two suns burned viciously against my skin. Lucia had placed a protective bubble over herself to shield from the heat, but the Phantom was too late and my skin was turning red and blistered. Andrew was another dimension away and my powers were useless. Inside I writhed and shrieked in increasing desperation, and so did the Phantom. Lucia opened up another portal and shoved us both through. I rolled across the sand and splashed into the ocean while more screams erupted from my throat at the agony of the salt. Luckily, the Phantom had made my wings recede before they were burned in the other dimension. Lucia crashed into the water and pulled me up, surprisingly gentle. “Bring Gabby back or I will torture this body over and over.” “No!” we both shouted, though I was pleading for her not to torture me and the Phantom was refusing to concede. My breath was rough and ragged with pain. “You’re right—I won’t kill the Illuminator, but I have no qualms of doing everything in my power to make sure I’m talking to her and not you,” Lucia ground out in a vehement exclamation. She slammed her fist in my face, and I flopped back into the water, breathing it in. The Phantom had apparently endured enough torture—so had I—and wanted to give up on consuming Lucia’s soul. Her only thoughts were of fleeing as she embraced the water and swam out into the ocean. Lucia’s shouts were gargled due to the water in my ears. When I finally came to the surface, Andrew stood in the water with Lucia in his grasp. His face was set in harsh lines as he watched me bob in the water. With his closeness, the blisters on my body began to fade and heal. The Phantom used his closeness to access my powers and try to send a current toward them. It was the one thing I was able to hold on to, the last bit of me left, and I concentrated every last cell in my body to keep that control. My electricity would not be controlled by such a vicious, soulless creature. “You stupid bitch!” growled the Phantom in frustration. Lucia struggled and shouted in Andrew’s iron grip. Ehno popped into existence behind them and grabbed for Lucia too. Andrew’s hair whipped around in the wind, his chest bare, and his eyes a startling black. He was full of cold fury and ready for a fight, but, even from my distance out in the ocean, I could clearly see him warring with himself on how to handle this situation. Their hesitation pleased the Phantom as she swam farther out to sea, escaping with my body. My wings expanded under the water by my own volition to hide the Phantom’s pleasure from my two rescuers on the beach. All I needed to do was get to Andrew—to have him touch me and this would all be over with. My body wouldn’t listen to my heart. Suddenly, I was rocketing through the sky and flying away from everyone I loved. A stream of water followed in my wake and caused a rainbow to appear. When I looked down I saw Andrew running across the beach after me, his wings growing out and taking flight while he yelled wildly. The Phantom had too much of a lead this time. Each second I felt more and more oddly detached from my body. A smirk quivered on my lips—she had a destination: the first human that we could find. She was hungry for a soul. 8 ELOQUENT LYRICS Humans lay helplessly across the beach; their skin bare, eyes closed, not a care in the world. They were the perfect prey. Each second the Phantom’s thoughts became clearer and, sometimes, even indiscernible from my own. I was gradually losing my grip on who I was, what I wanted . . . what I believed in. And that scared me the most. Why did I ever flee Andrew’s arms? The whole situation made me feel so stupid, and I hated myself for it. A disgusting beach-side public bathroom was only yards away and I—no, the Phantom—strode over to it like I —she—was a stripper about to grab a pole and dance. Honestly, I didn’t know my hips had the potential to

swagger with such eloquence. As soon as we entered the bathroom, everything came in flashes, as if I truly was losing all that was left of me. It was a strobe of wild images and emotions. A bathroom stall door slammed shut. A woman yelled. Glass from the mirror cracked and tinkling shards scattered across the ground. More shouting. A woman, her dark hair soaked with blood, lay like a lifeless doll on the ground. My hands were covered in glittering, scarlet blood. Vicious satisfaction curled around my body like a caress, and I was powerless to do anything about it. I was trapped. The sun blinded me. Sand burned my feet. Water crawled up my skin like a living thing, devouring me in its thirst. A yellow surfer’s board. A kiss exchanged—a soul almost devoured. Men yelling to “get away.” Rivulets of water ran down my skin. The sand burned my feet again. The Phantom was angry at the lack of pure souls. Her fury grew and rose up like a tidal wave of molten, scalding lava, seeking a town to demolish. A blue and white beach towel. Blonde hair tied into a messy bun. Skin slick with oil and sweat. Frightened blue eyes pleading with mine. A hand clamped roughly on my shoulder. The air rushed around me in a confusion of colors and sounds. Gravity was null. An indescribable pain exploded behind my eyes. Nothing but blackness. And then came the dreams. <> The room was surrounded in mirrors that reflected back infinitely. I studied the tattoos on Liz’s back. Each cycle of Ladies always came with a sort of road map on their skin. The symbols were never easy to read, but every century I tried to help each of them. This time I only did it to ward off suspicion. The future was bleak, and the woman before me would be the one to cause this grief. But she hadn’t yet, nor did she know, so I didn’t hold it against her. Okay, maybe I did a little. But the future could always change. Probably not, though, seeing as how I had lost hope after all these years with no changes in my visions. “This one, Dear,” I said as I traced the circle with a bowing of lines to form an intricate star in the middle, “means you will bring forth good fortune to those who need a light when they are in a dark place.” It also meant the night it happens will be clear, and stars will shine like spotlights on the consequences of their greed. I suppressed a shudder. “What does that mean?” Liz asked as she pivoted to face me. Her long, white hair flowed down her shoulders, and brought out the rich amber in her eyes that I knew would soon turn a malevolent white. “I cannot tell you. In time you’ll understand.” This happened every time too—they worried they wouldn’t be enough, do enough, or change enough to be remembered through the ages. That wouldn’t be a problem—what these Ladies of Light will accomplish will be legendary. In time I hoped the Illuminator would come and destroy everything they created and bring light to us again. Even in that second I could feel the onyx cloud of death rearing its ugly head, grinning maliciously. “How did I know that’s what you’d say?” She smirked at me, her smile slightly crooked with amusement. I plastered a fake smile on my face in return. “The same way I knew you’d come here and want to know about these symbols.” I pointed at my temple. “Intuition.” Typically, I’d take people with this special sensitivity under my wing and help them use their gift to the best of their ability. But not Liz—helping her would only cause more devastation. I traced another symbol on her arm. It curled around an eye. “You will have to trust your mind, Liz. You’ve been given the gift to see when danger is near.” “That’s the best news you’ve told me yet.” She clutched her clothes to her chest with hesitation to show me what else her symbols might show me. She didn’t know it yet, but that was her intuition telling her I was the dangerous one. “There’s something you’re hiding.” It was a statement, not a question. Oh, but that was saying it nicely. What was it in her mind that she was hiding from me? She nodded. “It’s the symbol that scares me the most.”

“Show me.” It was a demand—maybe this was the symbol I had been seeking from the beginning. She hesitated, biting her perfectly plump lip. I waited patiently, refusing to back down. Finally, she dropped her clothes, and I saw what she was so worried about. A serpent curled around her left breast and had a raised head, ready to strike, above her right. Intertwined were symbols full of war and hatred. This was it—what I’d been searching for. Never before had I seen so many symbols of darkness etched into the skin of a Lady of Light. “That bad?” Liz squeaked. Never had I thought the all-powerful Liz would let her shields down to show me weakness. “Ah.” I looked into her face to see the fear there. “This one I cannot tell you about.” Mainly because she’d soon find out that this serpent accompanied death, war, plagues of diseased minds and bodies, and, worst of all, an Angel apocalypse. It took everything in me to hide my shaking fingers and horrified expression. “Why not?” she gasped out, more afraid than ever. “Because it is not my place.” I made sure to keep my face passive so she wouldn’t see how hollow I felt on the inside. “Zola! You can’t not tell me what it means!” Her face flushed with embarrassment when I rose to my feet, my fear liquefying into fury. “You may be a Lady of Light, but I will be treated with respect!” My voice was firm. “Leave me.” Before I show you what true power is, I added mentally. Liz stood, her face stricken, and left with apologies spilling from her tongue. Power grew inside me like a whitehot ball of destruction. As soon as the door clicked shut I let it out, and the glass exploded out in a shower of trilling reflections. <> A wet cloth swiped across my face gently and my eyes fluttered open. The Phantom inside me was no longer in control, and I immediately knew why. Andrew was next to me in the bed, his face set in grim lines as he gingerly set the cool, wet cloth against my forehead. Above me was a ceiling fan over the canopy of a bed. Sunlight streamed in from a window to my left, bathing the room’s sand-colored walls in a pleasant, heavenly glow. “Andrew?” My voice was raspy. “Ella? Is it truly you?” He looked hopeful, yet unconvinced. “Yes. Where am I?” I felt confused and the world spun a little. Andrew paused, his face unsure. “We’re at the beach house.” He touched my face and closed his golden eyes. He was silent then, not moving a muscle. Feeling mildly sick, I still was able to take in the angular curve of his jaw, the shape of his sweet lips, and the long lashes that almost brushed his cheeks. How had we ended up here? How— Memories charged in, refusing to hide, and I gasped. Did I—the Phantom—hurt someone? How did Andrew find me? Had I hurt Lucia? And Andrew . . . my sweet Andrew! I had walked away from him and put us both in greater danger. There was no way I’d ever do such a foolish, selfish, idiotic thing again! His eyes opened and he kissed my lips softly. “It’s really you,” he stated. “I’m sorry. So, so sorry. I should have—” He stopped my soon to be Epic Gabriella Babble with his warm finger to my lips. “No. It’s I who should be sorry. I went too far. I let my emotions and the passion of the moment take over. I was careless—” “Shut up!” I commanded roughly.

Andrew looked taken aback. “I don’t regret a single thing we did,” I rushed on quickly. “It was beautiful, and I wanted it too. I just freaked over your safety—which is stupid because you’re vulnerable now, too. So I’m the one who should be sorry.” He took a deep breath, as if he’d been holding the last for too long. “What happened?” I asked, remembering only the violent flashes of a beach crowded with people. And . . . “Blood. There was blood! Oh shit.” I flew up, frantic, and the washcloth fell onto my lap. “I killed someone, didn’t I?” Terror and horror snaked their way around my chest and tightened like steel bands of distress. Andrew’s arm hooked my waist and pulled me back down next to him. “No, you didn’t do anything—that Phantom inside you did.” He brushed my hair off my forehead. “No one died. I promise. A few injuries, but nothing a hospital can’t heal.” My breath left me in a flood of relief. “Oh, thank you!” I rejoiced and wrapped my body around Andrew, not ever wanting to part from him again. The consequences were too dire. Words tried to form but nothing came out. What could I say to fix what I did? Was there anything I could do? Probably not. Andrew held me tightly in his arms and a soft hum came from his throat. It surprised me, and I only held him tighter. The hum became more substantial until he was weaving a melody of such complicated notes that I was stunned into awed silence. And then he sang in an unearthly voice. There’s only one way to tell you You’re the only one for me Speaking in absolution Stay with me His lips brushed my ear as he continued. And while your wings are spread to heaven You will soar away with me Find the virtue of my heart And love me He placed my palm over his heart. For in our moment of greatest weakness We will connect to become free There’s only one answer Stay with me He placed a gentle kiss under my ear and I melted into his touch and softly sung words. Stay with me, my sweet Ella You will only find peace in here Listen to what your heart says

And stay with me. This time he pressed his palm against my heart. There’s a war upon us And one day we’ll resolve it Until that day’s upon us Stay with me He propped up on one elbow, and his intense eyes seized mine. One day we’ll be together With only peace surrounding us And in that moment you’ll realize You’ll want to stay with me Hope resonated in his eyes. Cause if you leave this warm protection His arms tightened like a warm blanket of love. You will surely see Darkness will consume us He paused, his eyes deep pools of love and trust . . . and questions. So stay with me He placed a gentle kiss on my lips and pulled away to take in my reaction. He was obviously searching for my answer to the question he had formed in eloquent lyrics. My mouth was ajar in awe of this man before words tumbled out of me in response. “I’d never leave. Ever.” Truth rang in my voice. “I didn’t know you could sing?” A huge grin spread across his face. He sat up in the bed and pulled me up with his arm around me. “Oh, I have many talents you have yet to know.” His face grew serious. “We need to talk about what happened out there. And with us.” I frowned, not really in the sharing mood. “I didn’t want you to stop—you know, earlier on the couch.” My face heated. “But I keep having these horrible, vivid images of you . . . dying if I give myself to you fully. It scared me so I fled. Really, I just needed to be away from you because you distract me with your fingers.” If I wasn’t blushing before, I was sure my face was true scarlet now. Andrew looked away. “I should have stopped.” I pursed my lips and grabbed his chin so he’d have to look at me. “No, you shouldn’t have.” He didn’t look convinced, but continued on anyway. “And with Lucia?” His eyes flashed murderous for a second. “She loves you very much, Andrew. She was just being protective of you and I don’t hold it against her,” I stated emphatically.

“I sent her out there to make sure you were all right, not to lecture you,” he growled. “Yeah, well, we both got a little heated over everything. She was right, of course, but I couldn’t see that because with you I’m blind. There’s a war going on inside of me, and I can’t seem to pick a side. On top of that, there’s an evil being inside me who wants to take control. I’m a wreck,” I admitted wearily. “There’s nothing I can do,” he grumbled. “That’s not true—you can help me figure things out.” “First, help me find out what happened to you out there. Please?” “When you say it all sweet like that . . .” I took in a deep breath. “The Phantom feeds off my emotions—namely anger, hate, and self-doubt. I felt all of those outside with Lucia and you weren’t there to ease the fire that had built in my chest,” I explained grimly. “I’m sorry. I shouldn’t have hid behind Lucia.” Andrew looked as exhausted as I felt. “The Phantom took over. I don’t remember much after that. Flashes and images. It was horrible.” My voice was small. “Then I was dreaming . . . and you’ll never believe this.” Andrew raised his eyebrows in question. My voice was a whisper, like I was spilling the world’s greatest secret. “Zola gave me The Sight before she died.” His eyes grew wide with shock. “She knows the future,” he said, his words fumbling over each other weakly. “Yeah,” I said softly. “There’s one key piece of information I picked up from this dream I had. Liz has the power of intuition, too. Though in the dream she didn’t know how to control it. Liz may be powerful, but from what I could tell she doesn’t know how to use all of her powers. At least she didn’t when she first became a Lady of Light.” Andrew still looked shell-shocked. There was a light tapping on the door. “Come in,” I called. The door opened to reveal Ehno with his white hair and red eyes. If I didn’t know he was on our side I’d automatically think he was one of the bad guys. “Good to see you’re well, Illuminator,” Ehno said politely, walking on eggshells. “We were all worried for a while. You had a high fever and the Phantom was still trying to fight us, though when Andrew touched you, you calmed immediately.” My hand found Andrew’s and I squeezed. There was a lengthy silence as Andrew and Ehno had a silent conversation. Invading their privacy, I peeked into Andrew’s mind. I don’t think now is a good time, Ehno, Andrew argued. Gabriella’s going to find out sooner or later, Brother. She might be our only chance at helping Gabriella, Ehno countered. Ella’s been through enough today! Do you truly think the Darkness Illuminator can’t handle this? Andrew, things are getting bad back in Italy and we have to do something. You can’t just keep her here forever. Ehno folded his arms and leaned against the door frame, oblivious to my intense stare at them both. I’m trying to protect her, Andrew thought impatiently.

We all are—but she’s supposed to be the one who protects us, not the other way around, Ehno thought. I’m just saying this can’t last forever, he added hastily. I know that, Andrew thought heatedly. I’m giving her the time and space she needs. When she’s ready to join souls we’ll return. She’s too vulnerable right now. Ehno let out a cry of anger and my eyes snapped to his. He weighed my expression for a few minutes before he continued speaking mind-to-mind with Andrew. Can she read your thoughts? Ehno asked nonchalantly. Realization dawned on Andrew as he glanced down to our clasped hands. I smiled at him widely. Sometimes, Andrew thought warily. They stared at each other before their eyes swiveled in my direction. “What?” I asked, acting oblivious. “Do I have something on my face?” “No sweetheart,” Andrew said, and glanced toward Ehno again. That was close. Listen, Brother. All I’m saying is that Angels are disappearing left and right —I felt a chill in my stomach—and Shadows have begun to camp outside Aiden’s. The Shadow that let Gabriella free spread the word of the Illuminator fighting for the Shadows—not against. We should be grateful for his actions, but it’s starting to get tense. I can imagine, Andrew thought anxiously. They don’t want to believe what Aiden is telling them. Ehno looked upset. Patrick has become almost a permanent guard outside his door, and we had to send Joseph back to Washington. At Joseph’s name I couldn’t take it anymore and jumped in. “What does the government think of all of this?” I asked brusquely. Andrew closed his golden eyes, shook his head, and smiled in amusement. “I should have known. How long have you been listening in?” “Since the beginning,” I said heartily. Ehno shot me a disapproving, yet knowing look. He knew all along—he wanted me to hear their conversation. I frowned. “Listen. Am I going to have to start asking questions or will you two just tell me what the hell’s going on? Who’s here? What’s going on in Italy? What does the government have to say about all of this? And why, for heaven’s sake, hasn’t anyone told me about the Shadows gathering at Aiden’s? I could be there now, Illuminating them,” I said with a bite of impatience in my voice. I shot them each a furtive glance as I waited for answers. They were stunned into silence. It became so thick in the air I was about to slice it up and feed it to them. “I’m not a child, so quit treating me like one!” I snapped sternly. They both recoiled at my tone. Andrew let out a long breath. “Ehno? Could you please excuse us?” he asked with a certain reluctance in his tone. Ehno’s fingers clutched onto the door frame for a second as he gave Andrew that same knowing look he gave me. He turned rather grudgingly and swept out of the room, shutting the door quietly behind him. I let go of Andrew’s hand and scooted away from him so I could see him more clearly. “Explain.” There was a note of derision in my voice. He surveyed my face for a moment. “Ehno has been seeing more and more glimpses of the future, and we all thought it would be best if you left Italy for a while. With your strange behavior and the Empyrean Guard on the loose, we all thought you could use a vacation,” he explained sheepishly. Served him right, he should feel guilty.

“I’m only going to say this once,” I said with a finger pointed at him. “So don’t make me repeat it. I’ve sacrificed everything for you and the Angels. I deserve some respect around here. From now on what’s best for me will be discussed with me. Actually, any affairs with the Angels will now be discussed with me. You make sure you mindto-mind that with Ehno, Aiden, and Patrick. And then tell Patrick to phone Joseph and tell him too, while you’re at it!” My voice had risen, so I took in a breath to calm myself. “Of course,” Andrew mumbled. He looked like a child who was getting a scolding. This didn’t make me sympathize. “I asked Aiden’s permission to bond with you,” he whispered and glanced down. “He agreed that I was worthy and gave his blessing if that was what you wished.” “It is,” I said fervently and Andrew looked up, slightly startled. “I was supposed to bond with you here and help you learn to control your powers and possibly see if you have more hidden beneath the surface,” Andrew continued bracingly. “More powers?” I asked with a raised eyebrow. “Yes, we think that you healed Joseph in the hospital. The doctors told me Joseph wasn’t going to make it through the night when I left the room.” Andrew’s tortured face made my heart break a little. “When I returned you were asleep and you held Joseph’s hand. Even in sleep I could see how much you cared for him.” I hastily wiped a tear away. “Yeah,” I admitted with a sniff. “It tore me up inside, Ella. I knew you’d need me there that night so I watched over you and prayed to the Gods that you’d survive this.” Andrew’s expression was heartbreaking. “What’d you dream that night?” My eyes grew wide with understanding. “Abelie healed a deer.” I gasped and covered my mouth. “Do you think that I inadvertently healed Joseph?” I said through my fingers in stunned disbelief. Andrew nodded earnestly and a fleeting expression of satisfaction and pride rippled across his face. “That’s exactly what I think. I could feel how weak you were after the dream, and it nearly killed you Illuminating Aiden. We were all worried. I think if we joined you’ll be stronger and it won’t be so hard next time. You could use my strength.” “And the Angels disappearing?” I asked weakly. “We have no proof it’s the Empyrean Guard doing this, but after what you overheard it was the only thing we can think of, besides the Ladies of Light—and we don’t think they would do this. There’s no pattern. Angels are disappearing. Whole families are gone and no one knows how or why.” Andrew reached for my hand and held it as if it were a precious artifact. “I’m sorry I ever doubted you. Ehno has kept this from me during our stay here until today. The Empyrean Guard are living up to their threat.” I gave a horrified gasp and several more tears escaped my eyes. Dread flooded me as if something sour was being poured into my veins. Andrew wiped them away with a sad expression coating his features. “And the government? What’s their role?” I asked impatiently, worried about Joseph. “They’re keeping quiet about their plans, though Joseph has been able to get messages to us. They’re gathering troops in case of war. Patrick will be joining them as soon as we go back to Italy,” Andrew explained gravely, seeming to choose his words carefully. “Let’s just hope it never comes to war . . . but I’m afraid that’s what it’s looking like according to Ehno.” “This is awful,” I stated numbly. “I know,” he agreed. “What about the Shadows? Are they a danger to Aiden right now?” “No. They’re behaving. Aiden being an Angel now has added considerably to their interest.”

“That’s good. So, who’s downstairs?” I asked and took in a deep breath. Andrew visibly gulped. “Eva.” 9 BURNING My eyes grew wide at the thought that the very person who killed my kindred soul was down stairs. In our beach house. On our vacation! I scrambled off the bed. As soon as I stood straight my head swam and I lost my balance. Andrew was as fast as a lightning bolt. I didn’t even see him. One minute the floor was about to greet my face and the next I was in Andrew’s arms. “Whoa,” I said dazedly. My body felt like Jell-O (and moved like it too). “Hey, are you all right?” Andrew asked cautiously as he brushed hair out of my face and helped me back onto the bed. Warmth spread through me in a heated flash and I felt suddenly faint. “I feel—” I gripped Andrew’s arms weakly as another wave of dizziness hit me. Everything felt insubstantial and unreal. What was going on? “You’re burning up,” he stated in concern. Ehno, come upstairs now! Something’s wrong with Gabriella. Leave Lucia to watch Eva. Before I could say that wasn’t necessary, the door flew open and Ehno swept over the threshold, his face a concerned mask. His bright red eyes darted from me to Andrew. “Her fever’s back and it’s worse,” Andrew said anxiously, still bent down in front of me. A growing heat, like a million blazing suns all focused on me, lit my insides. It felt like I was being cooked in the Gabriella Roast Cooker, me spinning around-and-around to heat my flesh evenly. For some reason I was having trouble comprehending the sudden change in my revolving world as I swelled with a horrible, billowing fire. “She needs to lie down, Andrew.” Ehno pulled the covers down as Andrew helped me onto the bed. “What’s wrong?” I asked faintly as they moved me into a lying position. They didn’t dare pull the covers over me again. “I don’t know sweetheart,” Andrew said softly. “This is very unnatural for an Angel.” Ehno and Andrew exchanged a look of unease. “I’ll get some ice water and have Lucia come up here,” Ehno told him as he rushed from the room. “I’m so hot,” I barely whispered. It felt like an invisible hot iron was branding my insides slowly, meticulously. It was getting worse and I was sure any second my skin would start to blister and melt like it did in the other dimension Lucia sent me—the Phantom—to earlier. “I’m so sorry,” Andrew said sincerely. Lucia was suddenly in the door frame, her blue eyes wide with worry, her hair sweeping sideways as she came to an abrupt halt next to the bed. “Lucia, start a cold bath. If we can’t get her fever down this could damage her.” It sounded like something had lodged itself in Andrew’s throat. I reached for him in comfort. “It’ll be okay,” I tried to reassure, though I was sure things were not okay. “I’m just feeling exhausted. I think the Phantom took a lot out of me.” All I wanted to do was crawl into a little ball and weep, but I didn’t want them to see me like that. Especially Andrew.

Neither of them paid me any attention as I heard water splash into the bathtub. “We’ll cool you off, Gabriella. We need to find out what’s wrong.” It was Andrew’s voice, distant and faint, as if he were far away. And then I felt it, the Phantom’s vicious thoughts seeping into my pores like a disease. My body grew hotter, my blood turning into lava—I wondered if this was how Shadows felt. I began to writhe and shriek on the bed as Andrew tried to hold me still. “What’s wrong?” he yelled over my shouting. “Ehno!” he cried. The pain was so real that I thought at any second I would catch fire. I screamed until my throat was hoarse and all I had left were whimpers. “What’s wrong with her?” I heard Andrew cry to Ehno again. “I don’t know!” “Get her into the tub,” Lucia commanded. The water was still running and I wasn’t sure if I was imaging it. The whole idea that there was something as cool and pleasant as water seemed ridiculous and impossible. Sweat poured from me in waves and my skin was slick with it. “Oh Gods,” Andrew croaked. “She’s on fire.” When the agony became too much—something indescribable and unbelievable—I went slack in Andrew’s arms as he picked me up and placed me in the ice-cold water. I whimpered as the heat and the ice mixed in a stinging force. “The ice is melting!” Lucia said in a cross whisper. I looked up blankly as more water ran over me in torrents, not quite able to soothe the burn. The Phantom inside was bargaining with me. If I let her have reign over my body, she’d make the burn go away. There was no way I’d give in. This was my body, not hers. I didn’t think I had anything left in me until I denied the Phantom what she wanted. It started in my stomach, as if I had swallowed burning coals, and spread out until it literally felt like every part of me was melting away and would go down the drain with the water. I screamed in such utter agony that I heard a frustrated cry escape Andrew. “Fix it!” he shouted to someone. More ice was dumped over me, stinging my skin like thousands of tiny needles. “Make it stop,” I mumbled through my whimpers. It was the only thing I could say, other words just wouldn’t form under such stress. “The water’s boiling!” Lucia cursed. Ehno popped in and out of existence over and over, each time returning with bags of ice. “What are you doing here?” I heard Andrew snap and tried to see who he was talking to, but Lucia had blocked my view as she wiped ice cubes around my face. “It’s the Phantom,” the woman said breathlessly. It must have been Eva. The Phantom inside me purred as it recognized the voice. The heat abated for a second until Eva shoved her way to the tub and leaned over me. “Get away from me!” I screamed as flashes of her torture hit me. “Gabriella, you have to fight her! If you back down she’ll consume your entire mind and body—fight the Phantom!” she demanded of me as waves of calm rushed over my skin in torrents. It wasn’t enough to ease the pain. I saw Andrew at the end of the tub dip his hands in and rub around my ankles, trying to reassure me he was here and that no more harm would come to me. “How?” I squeezed out.

“Use your power, Gabriella. You can defeat this.” She was so sincere I took her at her word. Still, I didn’t know how. “Everyone,” Eva said while looking around, “touch her. Lend her our strength.” “It’s not that easy,” Lucia barked at her. “We aren’t bonded with her!” “Aren’t you?” Eva replied back, just as sharply. “She’s your Illuminator. You’ve been bound to her since you came back from the dead. Now touch her!” Hands grabbed a hold of different body parts as Andrew moved toward my face and held my cheeks between his palms. “We’ll get through this,” he breathed. “You’re strong enough to do this—fight.” The heat increased and my body began to jerk. Water splashed all over the place, but no one let go. But then something miraculous happened. There was a soothing sensation coming from each hand, a cooling balm. Each of their powers was a different taste of goodness. My body slowly calmed as it spread out. It was just what I needed to focus on the power within me. The electricity started at Andrew’s palms and spread down my skin, hitting the water and lighting it with a healing blue. The Phantom inside me screamed and yelled in fury. Internally, I let the current become a ball of fury as I flung it at the Phantom, screaming at it. She didn’t want to let go, but she knew this battle couldn’t be won. The heat began to recede from me, though there was a promise on this concession—this wasn’t over. No, it wasn’t. Soon there was no heat at all and I was shaking and quivering in the icy water. “Her lips are turning blue,” Andrew said, horrified. Everyone let go of me at once and then I was in Andrew’s arms as he whispered bracing words of comfort. “I’m so cold,” I chattered, shocked at the change. “I know, sweetheart. I’ll make sure we get you warm.” There was a pause and then Andrew asked Lucia to find warm clothes. “Everyone else—out!” “Cold,” I reminded him. “I have to take these wet clothes off you. I’m sorry,” he apologized in a strained voice. “It’s okay,” I managed to say. All I could think about was his warm body against mine. And sleep. I wanted to sleep for a year or seven. Lucia came in with clothes and offered her help, but Andrew’s face must have spoken for him because she turned and left with a soft click of the door. With great care, Andrew began to strip off my clothes, holding me up the whole time. I wasn’t wearing much and soon I was exposed in his arms. “This wasn’t what I expected when you first saw me naked,” I attempted to joke, limp and exhausted. He smiled at me. “Joking. That’s a good sign.” He pulled a thick shirt over my head. “This wasn’t what I expected either.” After I was clothed and beginning to warm up after the whiplash of sensations, Andrew helped me to the bed. I curled into a ball under the covers and watched as he peeled his clothes off until he was only wearing boxer-briefs. He crawled under the covers with me and wrapped himself around me like a blanket. He was so warm and I turned into him, pressing my hands against his chest. He jerked. “You’re so cold. How is that? You were on fire and now you’re like ice?” he breathed into my hair as his hands rubbed up and down my back in a warming gesture.

“The Phantom tried to burn me until I gave in,” I said into his chest, teeth chattering. “I wouldn’t let it so she turned the heat up. When I fought her back she took all the heat with her.” I shivered again under the covers and Andrew pulled me closer, though I was sure that was an impossibility. “Maybe we should talk with Lucia about the Abyss,” he admitted reluctantly. “Maybe,” I said and closed my eyes. We fell into a comfortable silence and I slowly relaxed into his arms until I was fast asleep. <> I was so grateful the next morning that I didn’t have any dreams. There are some things you need a true recovery from without your mind being kept busy all night. Almost burning alive from the inside and then feeling like you were about to freeze to death topped that list. Surprisingly, I felt back to normal. The house was quiet, though birds chirped merrily outside. The sun was just rising. The events of the night before haunted my mind. The Phantom had to go, and Andrew and I needed to bond so I could return to Italy in full strength—with my kindred soul at my side. There could be no more delays. Andrew had kept the Phantom at bay with his gentle touch, but if she’d learned to fight back a different way—by having me concede under the stress of excruciating pain—then we were in trouble. How many more attacks like that could I take before I folded under the pain? What if there was no one around to throw me into a tub full of ice? No, there was definitely no time for any more delays. Andrew was still asleep with my arms and legs tangled with his. My eyes carefully combed over his appearance. He looked exhausted with dark circles rimming his eyes and two-day old stubble coating his jaw. I gently pulled myself free and dashed toward the bathroom to brush my teeth before he woke up. Some people might not care about bad breath, but I did! The bathroom was a disaster. There was water still in the tub, towels haphazardly covered the tiled floor, and the beach pictures on the wall were at odd angles. There were even some burn marks here and there. That shocked me the most. I’d have to clean it up later—first thing was to brush my teeth and hair and sneak back into bed before Andrew awoke. With my teeth clean and hair brushed, I rushed across the room and practically dove under the covers to wrap myself around Andrew again. He smiled with his eyes still closed and placed a kiss on my forehead. “I still beat you.” He opened one eye and blew softly into my face. “Nice, fresh breath.” “Cheater,” I said wryly. “How do you feel this morning?” he asked anxiously and opened his other eye to take in my expression. Before I could answer he said, “Never mind. You’re practically glowing—you have no idea how wonderful it is to see you looking so relaxed after last night.” He closed his eyes again and hummed contentedly. His tired look practically dissolved from his face. “Yeah, I feel pretty damn superb,” I whispered conspiratorially. “So superb, in fact . . .” My hands roamed down his warm chest with purpose and came across the top of his boxer-briefs as I placed delicate kisses on his upper chest. Love, desire, and an overwhelming determination swelled in me and I wasn’t going to back down this time. Andrew’s suddenly maroon eyes flew open. “What are you doing?” he asked suspiciously. Before he could stop me my hand slipped inside his boxers. “I’m fixing the most easily fixable problem,” I said breathlessly as I felt him for the first time. My heart thundered loudly at this new and magnificent part of him that would connect us forever. Andrew groaned, his mind battling with what to do. “But after last night—” I cut him off. “First, I’m fine. Second, let’s look toward the future.”

“Are you sure this is what you want?” he asked with a hand on my arm to stop my movements. He searched my face for the answer, though he should have been able to read it clearly in my thoughts. “We can’t take this back. I need to hear you say it—to know that you want this.” “No freaking out this time,” I promised. He let go of my arm and I continued to learn his every curve. “I’m yours; let me prove it to you.” He groaned again, his jaw slack with pleasure. “Gods, Ella. Please don’t ask me to stop this time.” His hand went up my shirt as his lips descended onto mine. I could feel my heart in my throat as our bodies heated under the covers. His hands were everywhere. “Don’t stop,” I said feverishly against his mouth. My legs wrapped around his waist like silk bindings as we twisted until I was on top of him. While staring into his deep, maroon eyes, I pulled my shirt over my head, removing just one more barrier between us. “This is you and me—us. There’s no one else.” “Just us,” he agreed roughly right before he captured my face and brought it down to his again. Our bare skin touched and the sensation was glorious. His lips were so tender and soft against mine, his tongue a gentle caress of the softest moonlight. I pressed myself into him and we both moaned into each other’s mouths. There was no going back—and I didn’t want to. “I don’t know what I’m doing,” I said gruffly when we broke apart. My face heated but Andrew’s tender thoughts helped to calm my nerves and rapidly pounding heart. He rolled us over until he was leaning over me, electricity licking and arching its way up and down between our bodies. “We both must burn this midnight oil together. You’re just as new to me as I am you.” His eyes held mine as his fingers traced down my stomach like heated honey. My body burned for his caresses as if pure desire spilled from his fingertips. When he went for my panties I nearly exploded with the electrical current. He lovingly slipped my underwear off and my body began to tremble with a mixture of longing and nerves. The irrational part of me beat down those nerves with a proverbial giant-sized mallet. “Everything okay?” he breathed across my skin as he kissed my collar bone. The honey and earthy fragrances in his hair were intoxicating. My hands couldn’t help but get tangled in it. “Perfect.” And it was. “Yes, you are,” he stated. “And beautiful.” He gazed fervently down at me as if I was a goddess and he planned to worship every inch of my body. Everything around us froze as our passion made a translucent veil of lightning tendrils that surrounded us, reminding me of the dream-Andrew with the storm raging around us. We were the eye of this electrically charged, exquisite tempest. The passion inside was wild and powerful. This was a moment to be written in all of history, to be engraved into our every living cell to remember for the rest of our immortal lives. He reached between my legs, eliciting a moan from me. I bowed off the bed and into his magnificent touch. Truly, it was beyond heaven, etched into the night sky, all the stars in the galaxy burning brightly with our exalted bliss. My lungs heaved with the sensation and I could already feel the pressure building up inside me like a caged beast. The drumming of my heart played out a loving melody of our feverish ecstasy. My hands went for his boxers, ready to tear them away and pull him free so we could be one. There was no going back—it was time for us to join our souls, bond for eternity, forever sharing a part of each other. Andrew stiffened for a brief second but let me remove one more barrier. “Andrew, I want this. With you,” I breathed in complete delirium and pulled him closer. He took several deep breaths, his arms shaking as he held himself up over me. “I want this too, Ella.” He bent down to kiss me and I could feel him trembling, but so was I. He began his trek across my body with his delicate open-mouthed kisses while my fingers fisted in his lustrous midnight hair. By the time he reached my thigh I had officially named his tongue’s waltz the Languid Dance of Oh. My. Gods. I nearly levitated off the bed at the outrageously delicious sensation, though I had no idea what he was doing. I didn’t even care. The waves of pressure were crashing maddeningly against the coast of the unknown, unable to reach the land beyond. It was frustratingly blissful.

Andrew began his Languid Dance of Oh. My. Gods. back up to my neck as I squirmed beneath him. “Absolutely stunning,” he said into my ear, sending shivers down my spine and causing those waves to lap at the shore once more. His deep, hypnotic eyes seized mine as he easily read into my soul. My heart was still at a quick pace, a constant thump, thump, thump in my chest as we stole a moment to just absorb the new sensation. Everything was said in that silent minute. We were about to travel to that land beyond and heat rose up in me like a flood, ravaging every inch of my body. “Andrew . . .” His name fluttered past my lips unconsciously. Our breath was one as the seconds ticked by, the tempest holding us in our own little world. “Ella . . .” The word was accompanied by a shudder as I arched into his body, unable to deny my body’s purest desire to be with this man. Words weren’t necessary as I coaxed him toward me, ready to remove the final barrier. Andrew came forward slowly, cautiously. He barely touched me and I nearly came off the bed as my body quaked. He kept his eyes on mine, his gaze intense and real. He entered me and I thought my body floated away from the world and was taken to the Ethereal Eternity. Any second trumpets would play an exaltation of absolute pleasure as electricity surged between us. Light exploded out from us in a blinding ripple of love. A ragged gasp escaped me, along with a moan that was mixed with Andrew’s cry. And then there were no more barriers. Andrew was slow, gentle, and tender as he explored a part of me no one ever had. Our bodies mingled as he rested his forehead against mine. We were both slick with sweat as we moved together, our love pouring out in the most amazing and extraordinary ways. The tempest surged around us violently, my thoughts, power, and electricity seeking the boundaries, mixing together with flashes of lightning and rumbles of thunder before extending to Andrew as we became one. The tempest enveloped us, consumed us, made a beautiful web of light around us. Every sensation was doubled as I heard Andrew’s thoughts, sensed his emotions—his flawlessly divine devotion to me. He held me with a sublime fervor, one arm around my lower back, lifting me from the bed, his other holding himself over my quivering lips. The growing wave of pleasure was beginning to gather strength and speed with surprising force. It felt as if my soul was leaving my body to find his. I felt everything about the man holding me. Our breath was heavy between us, our bodies moving as one. It was an exotic dance in the purest form. I could feel the moment coming upon us and so could he. My arms encircled his neck as I brought his mouth to mine fiercely. He moaned into my mouth and I felt that wave draw up into a full-blown tsunami. “Ella,” he breathed raggedly against my lips. I was sure Zola herself had prophesized this very moment, that Angels wrote poems about it and recited them in the most beautiful Latin, and sung about it in the heavens with reverence. The tsunami crashed over us in a wave of power, love, and devotion. Stronger and more potent than anything I had ever felt as it raced into the land of the unknown, flooding and filling every inch of me in unbelievable, unimaginable rapture. Warmth gathered between us as our bodies defied gravity, leaving the bed empty below us. For a single instant in time my soul left my body, split in two, and merged with half of Andrew’s. The storm around us erupted in a burst of electricity and an overwhelmingly white radiance. The exquisite sensation had me crying out with infinite joy as Andrew held me tightly, our bodies becoming one, our souls no longer our own, but joined—bonded forever. We didn’t part, only held on without abandon as we slowly collapsed upon the bed. We kissed and hugged as our breaths grew deeper, never wanting to part. The thought of him leaving me felt like someone tearing me apart. “I love you,” I told him seriously. No words were ever truer. No moment ever purer than this one. “I love you too,” he said and brushed his lips against my forehead. He finally pulled away from me as he collapsed

against the pillows. I thought I’d feel empty without him. But I didn’t. I felt connected, able to feel his body even when he wasn’t holding me. We both stared at each other in wonder, not fully understanding this new connection. Our bond. Our joined souls. We were one. It was so strange and glorious. It just made sense. Laughter erupted from me, unable to hide all my euphoric glee. Andrew joined me, understanding wholly because we were one now. Unexpectedly, he gasped and I followed his intense gaze to my skin. An intricate design of floral and symbols blossomed there, running from my right shoulder and twisting under my arm, covering my ribs, and ending at my naval. My fingers gingerly traced it with wonder. 10 RAINBOWS There was an image in my mind—an expectation of what it would be like when I finally gave myself fully to a man. It wasn’t like this. It was always night time with candles flickering lazily, music filling the air with a sexy melody, and maybe a bubble bath. But no. It was infinitely better and there was no froo froo, stereotypical scene that played out. It was incredible. Brilliant. Amazing. Indescribable, really. Like all the planets in the galaxy aligned for a perfect moment in time. As if this was the beginning of time. From now until the rest of eternity everything finally had meaning. More than that, though—there was a link between Andrew and me that was so strong I was sure even death couldn’t cut through its power. Was this how the other Angels who were bonded felt? I wondered if they had support groups for this. “Yes! You can do it in seven days or less: learn to leave the bed of your kindred soul to feed yourself.” Or “A ten-step program on living your life after you’ve bonded.” Problem was—how would you convince them to show up in the first place? Andrew scooted even closer to me under the covers, his warm flesh meeting mine, and I was already forgetting about the unimaginable ten-step program. What world? There was only us in this bed. He put his lips to my ear and whispered, “We have more guests and breakfast is cooking.” The bubble burst—this must be why someone invented honeymoons: to get away from family and friends. Life must go on outside our electrical storm. “I know,” I replied reluctantly. Ehno had contacted Andrew through their mind-link and Andrew was wide open to me now. Maybe that was why Ehno and Lucia were so quiet around each other—they didn’t need to talk aloud. “I’ll go take a shower.” Meet me downstairs? Andrew was already on his feet collecting clothing off the ground. Be down soon, I said in my head. It was already as easy as breathing to communicate this way. I didn’t even have to use electricity or touch him—though I wished I was. Andrew hopped around on one foot as he yanked some clothes on while I enjoyed the view. We parted with a soft kiss, and loving caresses of unsaid thoughts flowed between us. After my decadent shower, I dressed in a sleeveless, white lacey top that showed part of my new tattoo. Andrew explained that they were symbols a Lady of Light would possess once she was awakened as a leader. That was all he would say on the subject though I was burning with questions. Perhaps he wanted to speak with Lucia about it, or there was something about the symbols he wasn’t ready to explain just yet. Or maybe he knew as much as me: nothing. I pulled on a comfortable pair of jeans and flip-flops, curious about the tattoos but not worried. My wing tattoo symbolized my new wings. Maybe I’ve gained powers that are associated with the new ink. Before I went down to the chaos of guests I thought I’d take in the breathtaking view from our balcony. The sun was

lazily climbing in the sky while the teal water played and sparkled beneath it. “Andrew said you’d be up here,” a deep voice announced brightly behind me. I spun around, recognizing it. “Joseph!” I exclaimed (almost shouted) and ran toward him to fling my arms around him. We hugged for a few seconds before we parted. He felt the same, looked the same. It was as if no time had passed since the last time I saw him when he left the hospital to get on a plane to the U.S. “This is a surprise!” When Andrew said “guests,” I wasn’t expecting Joseph. “What are you doing here? Not that I’m not happy to see you.” “Official business—kind of,” he answered evasively. “Okay?” I waited for him to explain but he didn’t. “Ehno told me what happened yesterday.” Joseph spoke softly as we both leaned against the balcony’s railing, taking in the view. “With how wonderful you look I wouldn’t have believed him. Is it true there’s something inside you?” “Yes.” My voice was quiet. “What are you going to do about it?” he wondered just as inaudibly. “I have an idea, but I need to talk with Lucia about it first.” I turned to him. “By the way, you look great considering how bad your injuries were just three weeks ago. How are you feeling?” “Honestly?” he asked placidly, his dark brown eyes focused on the hypnotic water. “You’re scaring me, Joseph. Is something wrong?” “I wasn’t sure what to make of this at first, but now that I’m not incoherent on narcotics, I’m pretty sure I know what happened in the hospital on the day I woke up.” Joseph’s hand raked through his perfectly combed hair which bounced back into place as he faced me. “I think you gained your mother’s power of healing.” We were both silent for a whole minute. I thought I could hear the seconds ticking down on his watch. This was what Andrew eluded to earlier. His hand swept through his hair again. “The doctors in the hospital never said anything because they already knew you were an Angel and were helping with the healing process. When I got back to the states, the FBI required I see one of their physicians and, after seeing me and reading my medical chart, were astounded I was even alive.” His voice lowered to a whisper and he reached for my hand and held it gently. “They said I should have died that night. Before I woke up I had a dream about your mother healing a deer.” I gasped, astounded. “I had that same dream!” I exclaimed. “You really think I healed you?” Maybe Andrew was right. “That’s exactly what I’m saying. And thank you for saving my life.” His sincerity poured from his eyes as he squeezed my hand before dropping it to hug me. “If you hadn’t, I wouldn’t be here today to give you some good news.” “What’s that?” was what I said aloud, though what I was really thinking was Thank the Gods he didn’t come here to deliver bad news. “Well,” he began with a huge smile, straightening his very-FBI suit jacket. “First, the FBI was granted a large amount of money to assist you with the Angels. Patrick and I told them everything that happened in Italy. There are even CIA agents outside Aiden’s house as we speak. Of course, this is strictly ‘off the books.’ ” He laughed casually, like spending loads of government money off the books was typical and should be a joke that there was even a “book” to begin with. “That’s excellent news! Now all I have to do is find a way to rid myself of this Phantom without dying in the process,” I grumbled. “You said ‘first,’ so what’s the second part of the good news?”

He bit his lip and I wanted to make fun of his obvious attempt at keeping a straight face. I knew Joseph had a hell of an FBI face, but for some reason he decided to be himself around me and show his expressions. Or maybe keeping a poker face was tiring. But before I could question him there was a rap on the open sliding glass doors to the balcony. Over my shoulder I saw the last person I imagined to be there and felt a wave of joy from Andrew over my internal shock. He knew this would make me happy. Ecstatic would have been a better word. The beautiful green eyes, surrounded by layers of curly brown hair, of my sister were bright with an emotion I hadn’t seen in a long time. “Jenna!” I ran toward her just as I did with Joseph, except Jenna did too and we both squealed and danced around for a minute. “It’s so good to see you. Why are you here? And how?” I shot Joseph a questioning glance. “Was this the other good news?” He shook his head, his smile so radiant I thought a rainbow would sprout out of his head and fill the sky. “Nope. Jenna wanted to tell you the second part of the good news.” I turned back to Jenna, trying to decipher the new emotion in her eyes. “You aren’t pregnant, are you?” Jenna chuckled. “Oh no . . .” Her sentence sounded incomplete and I filled it in with “not yet.” I looked between them, waiting very impatiently for one of them to spill. “Oh come on . . . is Jules here or something?” A frown spread across my face because as much as I wanted to see that darling little girl it was best if she still thought of me as her angel than still alive. Imagine Jenna having to explain that to people. “No, she’s with Mom and Dad,” Jenna said elusively. That surprised me considering they lived in South Carolina, literally across the country from her. “Okay?” I felt like scratching my head, trying to figure out what was going on. “What was your excuse for going to Hawaii without your daughter?” “Oh, well . . . you know . . . searching for places to get married,” Jenna explained nervously. “Wait . . .” My eyes darted between the two. Joseph gathered Jenna in his arms and planted a sweet kiss on her forehead. “Holy—” My head spun right before I started to squeal again. “You two are getting married?!” I exclaimed (this time shouting) while Jenna reached for me and we began a silly little happy dance. “Yes!” Jenna said over our joy-dance. “Let me see the ring,” I demanded and seized her left hand. There it was, shiny and platinum with a single princess-cut diamond the size of a small country. “How big is that thing? It’s huge!” Joseph gave a small cough. “He won’t tell me,” Jenna lamented. “I try not to complain how hard it is to hold up my hand with the weight of it.” “I’d guesstimate if I knew anything about diamonds,” I said as I raised my eyebrows at Joseph. “You have nothing to be ashamed about, Joseph. This is a stunning ring and that rock is going to make Jenna’s muscles uneven it’s so large.” Joseph shrugged, reminding me of Patrick and his amazing power of not answering questions. “The size isn’t important.” There were a few seconds of silence as Joseph and I beamed at each other, remembering the argument Patrick and Joseph had over the size of their guns when we had gone to rescue Zola. “Do girls always tell you that?” I quoted him mockingly and we both burst into laughter. Jenna looked between us, confused. “So, when did this happen?” I asked once our laughter died out.

“When he got back from Italy I met him at the airport,” Jenna explained. “I brought Jules with me and she approved of him—more like she adores him—so I knew I wanted Joseph in my life. And I told him that. He’s been the first man to make me feel this way since—you know.” Joseph wrapped an arm around her shoulders again soothingly. “A near death experience will change your priorities,” he continued for Jenna. “Or losing someone you love,” Jenna added. “She and Jules spent a week with me,” Joseph went on, “and I knew she was going to leave to go back to Oregon, and that was the last thing I wanted. So I proposed the day before she was supposed to leave and asked her to move in with me.” “And of course I said yes,” Jenna added with a joyful smile. “You know me and my appreciation for the tall, dark, and handsome. He’s a catch I’m not throwing back!” “Wow! I’m so happy for you two.” And I was, but then I frowned. “I can’t go to the wedding.” My stomach dropped and Andrew’s comforting thoughts whispered in my mind. It was strange, I had already grown accustom to him being there in my head. It didn’t even bother me that he was listening into our conversation. “That’s the thing,” Jenna said while she looked up toward Joseph. “We talked about it and decided there won’t be a wedding unless you can attend.” “And stay visible,” Joseph added like they had rehearsed this conversation. “That’s right. I want you to be my maid of honor, of course. You’ll look perfect in the dress I’ve already picked out,” Jenna gushed. “I talked with Tom—Director Morris—about it. There’s no reason for you to be feigning your death anymore with the Angels considering the Soul Stalker’s dead now,”—I failed to explain I’d picked up Eva’s nasty inhabitant, not just any ol’ Phantom, and wondered briefly if he’d seen her yet—“and rumors are abound with the Ladies of Light according to Patrick. They know you’re alive.” “Oh.” I hadn’t even considered telling people I was alive. I always thought I’d be dead in the eyes of everyone I knew for the rest of my life. “Tom’s come up with a story to tell the public if you want to come out of hiding,” he went on cautiously. “He’s ready to meet with you about it whenever you are.” “Of course I’ll meet with him soon,” I said breathlessly. There was a chance I could go back to my old life—even if it would never be the same. My heart danced with relief. “Wow. There’s so much to take in!” “We know it’s a lot,” Joseph said sympathetically, already using the word “we” like they’d been together for years. “We’re going to go downstairs to give you some time. I made my special breakfast, so whenever you’re ready to come down I’ll heat it up for you.” “I left coffee in the bedroom, made just the way you like it,” Jenna added. “Thanks.” I hugged them both. “Congratulations,” I said as they exited through the balcony doors. Jenna smiled over her shoulder before they disappeared in the hallway. I took a deep breath to consider everything I’d been told while finding my coffee and sipping. The FBI and CIA were working together to help me . . . and Joseph and Jenna were engaged. Wow. That was the only word I could think of to sum up my feelings for it all. When I pivoted back to the view there was something contaminating it. There were several somethings, actually— tiny blobs of people. It was the one thing that could possibly distract me completely. Shadows were spread over the sandy beach, like sentinels awaiting a battle. Shadow of the Sun. Anger flared in me at the sight of the V brothers. There was also a feeling of disappointment from the Phantom who attempted to latch onto my anger and

break free to no avail. “I guess my bond with Andrew has locked you out,” I said insolently under my breath at the dirty Phantom polluting my body. She snarled back, harmless. With an ease I wasn’t used to, my wings spread wide from my back, magically going through my clothes without a single tear—another incredible thing about them. They were a pearly white, glowing and shimmering in the sun, and the feathers were softer than any fur against my skin. They flapped with amazing force as I rocketed off the balcony and flew toward the dark shapes below. My feet hit the sand without a sound behind the V brothers, the other Shadows watching with awe. The brothers were arguing. “I can’t believe she made us come here,” Jeff Vittorio was grumbling to his brothers. “Gabriella—high and mighty Illuminator—isn’t going to help us. Not that I want her help.” My eyebrows rose at his words. They came here with Eva—Karen or Soul Stalker or whatever her name was now. Jeez, someone give that woman a nametag already! “Eva says that’s what she’s supposed to do,” Vito argued. “You don’t really think she’d deny us?” “But after what we did to her—to the other Angels,” Vasco argued, clearly on Vittorio’s side. “We practically killed Andrew, her kindred soul! We know how the Angels are about them.” “He survived, though,” Vito said shamefully. It surprised me he felt shame at all. They held not an ounce of guilt or held back from their behavior just weeks before. “I don’t trust the Illuminator,” Vittorio said firmly. “And neither should you two.” “Oh, I don’t know about that,” a voice said behind me. A Shadow I remembered from my imprisoned time in Italy gracefully glided around my wings, his fingers trailing softly down my feathers, an awed expression on his face. His blazing eyes met mine as he used his magic to mask many of his Shadow-like features. It was the Shadow who released me from my restraints in Italy. “I trust her,” he said with a smile. The V brother’s gaped at me and my wings. “Why are you here?” I asked them firmly. “I can take you all down with a single bolt of electricity, so spit it out!” And for some reason I knew that was true, the power that came and went depending on Andrew’s proximity was no longer an issue. It was stronger than ever, a powerful force begging to break free—so I let it. I held my palms out like I was feeling for rain falling from the sky, and lightning from a few clouds gathered there. It crashed down and met my hands. A rumble spread out from us, shaking the ground like an earthquake, causing waves to crash violently against the shore, only reinforcing my power. The V brothers stumbled back from me, though the other Shadow stayed firmly at my side. He reached out and grasped my hand where the lightning had struck. He held no fear in his face, only awe and hope. “Please,” he pleaded softly. “I heard what you did to Aiden—he’s an Angel now, no longer destined to shadows.” I held his hand with both of mine, ignoring the spluttering of the V brothers. “What’s your name?” “Sebastian.” “Why did you save me in Italy?” “When we attacked you outside the Divine Library I realized you weren’t who everyone said you were,” Sebastian explained. “How?” I asked softly, keeping his hand in my grip.

“You were so powerful you knocked thirty Shadows out with a single burst of energy.” I opened my mouth to question but he continued quickly. “With power that strong, and with the rumors you were the one who would destroy us all, you should have killed us.” “You’re unkillable,” I said simply. “You’re not making sense.” “Yes I am,” he said with patience. “We were told the Illuminator would be the one to finally end us. But you didn’t— even when we were at your mercy! I knew then that everything we were told about you was wrong. If that was the case, and considering the things Eva had told us about how horrible the Ladies of Light were—and how they wanted you dead—I knew you were good. Not evil. The enemy of my enemy is my friend. Plus, I’ve always had my suspicions, just as other Shadows have. You give me hope of a new life without all the lies and confusion.” The V brothers stayed quietly still, absorbing our conversation like unwanted guests at a party. I closed my eyes so Sebastian would know I was thinking, when in reality I was calling for Andrew mentally. He was there in a few seconds, knowing what I planned to do. I let go of Sebastian’s hand. “Are you sure you’re ready for this again?” Andrew asked warily. “Joseph said something interesting to me upstairs,” I told him. His eyebrows came together in confusion, his golden eyes searching my face. It surprised me he hadn’t been listening in to our whole conversation or plucking the thoughts straight out of me—but maybe he was just like me when it came to that. He offered privacy when he didn’t have to. “He thinks I helped heal him, too,” I went on. “And I think he’s right.” “Really?” His eyes darted to the Shadow only feet away and back to me. Careful what you say in front of others about the ability to heal. I shook my head. “I’m not going to hide like my mother did—always afraid to tell others about her incredible gift. Plus, no one’s going to use me.” “No,” Andrew stated firmly, “I won’t let them.” “Neither will I,” agreed Sebastian. “You can count on me to protect you from others who’ll want to harm you.” His words surprised me and made me feel warm inside. And scared. So many expected so much from me and I hoped I could live up to it. “I want to do this,” I stated, unperturbed. “But I want you here for support.” “Always,” he said sincerely. I folded my wings as they dissolved back into my skin. “Let’s sit.” Andrew lowered himself to the sand and held a hand out for me, inviting me to sit between his legs. I did and folded my legs while pointing for Sebastian to sit before me. He mimicked my position and I reached out for his face, just like I did with Aiden. It was so incredibly easy to find the inner part of him that held all his light, hidden deeply in the depths of his Shadow exterior. There was no searching, or energy being sucked away. His light was glowing brightly, expectantly deep within. When I plucked the proverbial ball of light from its resting place, a memory of the man before me rushed into my mind. It was only a few seconds but I saw his darkest, saddest moment pass before me. It was confusing and dark. There was a multitude of screaming. He was being attacked, the place obviously not Earth. Perhaps he had been cast out and lived in another dimension before he found a way back. Maybe the side effect of finding a Shadow’s light was to relive their darkness. Aiden’s was deciding to give me up. Sebastian’s was so dark I couldn’t even make it out. It was just a few seconds before I blinked the terror and sadness away.

This Illumination was so effortless I wasn’t expecting the sudden burst of glorious light that exploded out of Sebastian in blinding waves. Even the real sun couldn’t compete with that light inside him. It was like I had yanked several suns free from their prison. Now the man before me had hazel brown eyes and short waves of brown hair above his ears. His skin was a glowing tan and his smile was radiant with utter delight. The glowing eyes and lava cracked skin were gone. I let go of his cheeks as he quickly inventoried every inch of himself that he could see. He rose so quickly sand flew around his ankles, and then he spun around in a circle. “Amazing.” He stopped and looked at the silent V brothers that had observed the miracle before them. Sebastian turned back to me. “Thank you so much. I’ll forever be your faithful servant.” He turned and ran toward the beach house calling out to Eva. It was the second time today I was surprised there wasn’t a rainbow sprouting from the pure glee I saw. Andrew snaked an arm around my stomach and pulled me toward him. “He’s right, you know. You are amazing.” I chuckled. “It was so easy!” “We’re bonded,” he whispered in my ear. “We’re stronger because of it.” I pivoted in his arms. “Now I understand your concerns about it.” I placed a tentative palm on his cheek. “Who would have thought something so breathtakingly wonderful would have such a luminous result.” He chuckled at my pun. “If it has anything to do with you it’ll be luminous.” Our lips were about to touch when one of the V brothers made a disgusted noise in the back of his throat. Andrew and I paused and looked toward them. “What about us?” Vito asked warily. Vittorio slapped the back of his head. “She’s not going to help us,” he snapped angrily. I noticed that Andrew was concealing his thoughts from me and I turned to him. “What?” Vasco understood immediately what was going on. “We let Eva—” “It wasn’t Eva then,” Vito cut in. “There was something inside her.” “Whatever,” Vasco bit back. “We let her kill him. We have no right to ask you to Illuminate us—” Again Vito was cut off, but this time by me. I felt sorry for the three. They’d been whipped around all their lives. Enslaved before they were turned immortal, lost their sister to a Phantom even though they didn’t realize it, convinced to act like fools and create the image of the angels you read in stories, and then they were torn from their world to be turned into Shadows and have their past erased. They’d been fed nothing but lies for thousands of years—from one thing to another. I didn’t even think about it or try. I Illuminated the three of them while Vasco was mid-sentence—not even touching them. And like Sebastian, their darkest moments passed before me. It was the worst of all because each one resulted in a death. My stomach heaved and the Phantom in me rejoiced, remembering each one as if they were presents for her to unwrap later. I pushed the images away as quickly as I could. Hopefully they would clean up their acts now. Everyone deserved forgiveness, didn’t they? It was as if the more I Illuminated, the easier it became. Contact wasn’t even necessary. A part of me sought the light in all the people I knew, but with the Shadows it was like bringing them back from a subterfuge comma. Literally tearing the veil of blackness down and showing them the luminescence of light. As their bodies transformed, their eyes filled with such indescribable sadness and knowledge, a part of my heart ached over it. Sometimes the truth hurt worse than lies—though I was sure they appreciated it in the first place. All three of the brothers were eerily silent as they ambled away in disbelief. They all seemed slightly dazed. “I may not be as forgiving as you,” Andrew said, “but you did the right thing.”

“I hope so,” I said distractedly, realizing this was only the beginning of my journey, but at least it was finally starting. “I guess our vacation is over.” Andrew let out a breath, reading my thoughts. “Why do you always insist on being brave and putting yourself in danger?” I laid against his chest and felt his steady heartbeat against my back and his comforting arms around my waist. “I may have this Phantom under control now, but it’s only a matter of time before it finds a weakness in me and breaks through again. We can’t let that happen.” “So you still want to go to the Abyss?” he asked hopelessly. “Yes, but first I need to convince the Phantom to leave me. Her eyes are wide with the potential power she could have within me, therefore blinded by the possibility of how many souls she can consume.” “And if she doesn’t want to or refuses to listen?” “I’ll figure it out. I have a feeling there’s something in the Timeless book that will be helpful to me. Also, this new tattoo. I had a dream with Zola in it and she considered the tattoos on the Ladies of Light a sort of road map. Maybe it’s the same for me?” I guessed. “Lucia might know,” offered Andrew. “Guess I need to apologize to her and thank her or she might never help me,” I grumbled, mainly upset with myself. “You don’t know Lucia like I do,” Andrew said. “She’s already forgiven you and knows it wasn’t you in the first place.” “Not about that,” I said evasively, remembering our argument before the Phantom took over. He chuckled. “Oh, that.” I sat up and turned in his arms. “You know?” “Yes. She was just trying to protect me—and you. She’s been my family since before we became immortal,” he explained. “I’ll always be the outsider,” I lamented. “Not true. From rumors the Elders have kept silent about running into you at Aiden’s and are now secretly working against the Ladies of Light. It’s been hard because they know if the Ladies find out their minds will be altered again. They consider you family and more—they consider you their leader and savior.” “But not Lucia or Ehno,” I interrupted. “You don’t see it, do you?” I shook my head. “Lucia and Ehno care more about you than you could ever imagine. You are our family. That’s the kind of bond Eva meant when we helped you fight the Phantom. Also, don’t forget that Ehno and Lucia have a link like ours, and Ehno and I share many thoughts. You are on their minds most of the time.” He changed the inflection in his voice between Ehno and Lucia’s voices. “ ‘How can we help Gabriella?’ ‘I wonder what she plans to do for—fill in the blank.’ ‘Is she safe?’ ‘Are we doing enough for her?’ ‘Are we getting in her way?’ ‘How can we help her develop her powers?’ ‘I hope Andrew is enough for her .’ ” “Wait a second!” I stopped him. “Is that last thought yours or theirs?” All I could think was how dare they think such a thing. Andrew was more than enough—he was perfect for me. I hoped I was good enough for him. “They’re thoughts we all have,” he confirmed.

“Well, the last is an unnecessary worry,” I said firmly. “We can’t help it. Since we woke on the plane all we’ve thought is of keeping you safe. Even after you ‘died,’ you were in our thoughts constantly, wondering how you were coping in whatever dimension you had gone to. Lucia and Ehno even had an extensive conversation about trying to find out using Lucia’s gift. Even the last is a concern because what if being with me is all wrong for you, or stops you from making the right decisions?” He said everything so seriously, so certainly that my heart dropped into my stomach. “What if it came to you choosing between me and saving humanity?” “That’s ridiculous! There’d never be a choice like that! You’re my kindred soul—without you . . .” I trailed off, stricken, not even wanting to voice where I’d be right now without him. “You do affect my decisions, Andrew, but I think for the better. You’re part of my journey—I just know it. And I love you. There’s nothing stronger or more important in life than that.” “I feel that you’re right,” Andrew said softly. “But you must promise me this, Ella—promise me that if you ever have to choose you’ll pick humanity over me.” I sat in the warm sand, the sun peeking through the clouds in the sky, the water splashing onto the shore, and stared in shock. The whole world slipped away until it disappeared around me as my heart dropped into my stomach and decided it’d burry itself in the sand for a while. All the happiness I held at Illuminating the Shadows was leeched from me with his statement. “I— Andrew? How could I?” “If it came down to it, I know you’ll do what needs to be done. It’d kill me, break me up into a thousand pieces of shredded Andrew, but I would accept my fate for you—for humanity,” Andrew said quietly. My head shook in disbelief. “Oh no, we aren’t playing that game—” He cut me off “Just promise me, Ella. “Never!” I shouted. “I couldn’t!” He captured my face with his large palms. “You have to, because I could never leave you, even if I knew it’d be best,” he said dejectedly. “I can’t promise,” I whispered, staring deeply into his eyes. He sighed heavily. “Then let’s hope it never comes to that. My place is at your side. Not really a protector in the sense of a Guardian, but as the other half of your soul.” Andrew placed a gentle kiss on my lips. “It’s something we all worry about, but you’re right. We’re better together.” “I know we are!” “It’s just that your tattoo scared me a little. One of the symbols worried me more than the others, only making my fears flare. I was just making assumptions because of it.” Andrew traced my new tattoo above my shirt with his finger. “Why’d it scare you? Which symbol? What does it mean?” I asked frantically. “This one here.” He pointed next to my belly button over my shirt. I couldn’t remember what was there. “It means a costly forfeiture of the soul in the face of the ultimate decision. I’m half of your soul now. What if I’m the ‘costly forfeiture’?” 11 THE ABYSS Inside the beach house was complete and utter chaos. Joseph was teaching Ehno how to cook on the stove, and, for some reason, he decided to start with bacon of all things, which resulted in a grease fire. Joseph was staring, horrified, at the insatiable fire, Jenna was trying to put it out with a towel but was really just fanning the flames,

while Lucia sat at the table laughing hysterically at the whole debacle. Eva and Sebastian were missing and the V brothers had hopefully left town. “Lucia,” Andrew said, amused, “he’s going to burn the kitchen down.” She glanced in our direction, her eyes bright with wild glee. “I know! But he told me not to help him—that he wants to do it ‘the normal way’!” She turned back to the most hilarious, yet unnerving, situation unfolding around the stove. Jenna ran to the sink and filled a glass full of water. “No water!” Joseph shouted over Ehno’s edgy laughter and the running water. “But he’s going to burn the kitchen down,” she disagreed loudly. “We need baking soda or flour,” he suggested while his eyes darted between the growing flames and Jenna. “You didn’t tell me it could catch on fire!” Ehno exclaimed, still trying to turn over the burnt bacon in the pan. I shook my head as Andrew stared on in regale disbelief. In the few seconds I looked away Jenna had found a big bag of flour. She raced from the pantry and ripped the top off the bag. She flung the entire contents onto the stove and the fire went out immediately. She also coated everyone in proximity with white flour. Joseph coughed and a puff of white powder escaped his mouth in a cloud. “Too much?” Jenna asked with a raised eyebrow, her lips flat in an attempt to stop from laughing at the sight of him. It was a wasted attempt. Everyone started to laugh so hard there were tears rolling down some of our faces. And when the whole thing wasn’t that funny anymore, we were laughing at each others’ laughter. It was the biggest stress reliever of the day . . . except for other activities from this morning. Ahem. Once we quieted down everyone began to clean up the mess. I noted there were only a few blackened spots on the wall and counter from the fire. It would have gone out sooner if Ehno hadn’t insisted on still cooking the bacon as the fire roared over it. Before we were finished, Lucia reached for my arm and pulled me aside. “We need to talk.” Her blue eyes gazed at me knowingly. “Outside?” I offered. Lucia nodded once and followed me. We went out onto the massive deck and sat at one of the tables. Auburn highlights in her hair shone a bright red in the sun, and her ocean blue eyes sparkled in the light as she squinted out the sun. Her lips were set in a severe line, neither upset nor happy, her face completely unreadable. “I hear you want to go to the Abyss to try and rid yourself of the Phantom,” she said simply. Okay. Straight to the point. “Yes?” It came out as a question. “Either you do or you don’t. This isn’t something to take lightly, Gabby.” Again with the nickname. “People don’t just go to the Abyss and live to tell about it.” “Yes, I want to go.” Firm. Lucia gave a tight nod, her face still unreadable. “From my understanding, Zola explained our extensive history to you?” “Yes.” Lucia looked out toward the beach and was so quiet I wondered if I said something to upset her, but as always her face was impassive. “This is really important to me,” I finally said. “How am I supposed to continue with my journey if I’m constantly worried about this evil Phantom taking over?” I shivered at the memory of it taking off with my body to terrorize a

beach full of people. “I think it’s an excellent idea,” she reassured me to my surprise. “Oh.” “I just don’t know how to prepare you to go there. It isn’t like I’ve been or know anyone who has that’s still living. Our ancestors were Fallen Angels, condemned to the Abyss at one time. Some of them begged for forgiveness and, of course, the Celestial Gods gave them a second chance to live out a human life. They’re the last who’ve been there and come back that I know of. And of course they had help from the Gods, and they’re dead now, having lived out their human lives.” Lucia’s face didn’t change at all—she possibly did a better FBI face than Patrick. “But you have the power to create portals,” I countered. “And what if I’m knocked out? Or, regardless of my power, I’m unable to create a path home? What then?” she asked, turning back and eyeing me carefully. “We’ll find a way,” I replied brusquely. “But if you don’t want to go, you could just open the portal for me.” She snorted derisively. “Don’t be silly. Of course we’ll go with you. Imagine how insane Andrew would be if you went alone? Or worse! Without him? No way!” Lucia and I were silent for a second, as if we were both picking up Ehno’s and Andrew’s conversation at the same time. Joseph was also in the mix, along with Patrick’s and Aiden’s thoughts in Andrew’s mind. They were talking about the disappearance of more Angels. Angels were beginning to panic, more and more Shadows were showing up at Aiden’s looking for me, and there were rumors of the Empyrean Guards grouping for a massive attack. So far there had been twenty Angel deaths, which was a large amount considering their small numbers. I seized Lucia’s hand and she jumped. “The sooner the better. We need to put a stop to the Guards. It’s getting out of hand.” She nodded once, her expression grim. “Agreed.” There was a commotion inside and Lucia and I ran to the back door. Ehno was holding Joseph back from Eva while Andrew stood between the two, speaking swiftly. “She’s not the one who hurt you,” Andrew tried to explain. “To hell she’s not! That bitch put me in the hospital, and I would have died if it weren’t for Gabby! She probably would have too if Andrew didn’t show up when he did,” Joseph snarled, trying to break free from Ehno’s grasp. It was unlike Joseph to be so vulgar. “She’s not the same. It’s true,” I said with certainty as I walked into the kitchen. “She was possessed with the Phantom that’s now inside me.” Joseph stopped struggling and didn’t seem to know what to do. By the look in his eyes, you could tell he believed me, but then he was confused and didn’t know if he should be throwing his hate daggers my way or not. “It’s taken control of me a few times, but Andrew quells its abilities. And since we’re bonded now she—the Phantom—hasn’t been able to break free and take control again.” My voice had grown small at just admitting to everyone in the whole room that between yesterday and today Andrew and I had done the deed. It might as well have been the entire universe. Ehno laughed! Actually laughed! “It’s about time you two.” My face grew so hot I was sure it’d catch on fire like Ehno’s crispy bacon. Andrew tried to hide his grin but it was obviously warring with his lips. Jenna was still shocked at the whole scene before her, and after a few seconds of blank surprise she finally snapped out of it and grasped what it was we were talking about.

“Gabby? You?” Her eyebrows rose practically to her hairline. “Of course it’d take a charming, dead-sexy Angel to break you!” Joseph made a noise between a laugh and a I-can’t-believe-you-just-called-Andrew-dead-sexy snort. “Will you behave?” Ehno asked Joseph, still holding on though he wasn’t struggling. “Yeah.” Joseph’s eyes, apologetic, seized Eva’s and he began to speak, his mouth smiling then frowning, then opening and closing. Blowfish central. “It’s okay,” she said quickly. “I haven’t exactly been given the best homecoming, but considering everything my body did I don’t blame anyone. I do remember a lot of what happened and I’m so very sorry.” Joseph shrugged, his anger dissolving into his normal self-confidence. “It’s water under the bridge and I don’t plan on jumping in. Don’t take this the wrong way, but why, of all the places you’d go afterward, would you come here?” “And how’d you know I was here?” I tacked on. It was the first coherent thing I’d said to her since she arrived. “When I woke up in the forest after you’d stabbed me, healed and alive and . . . Phantomless, I knew what had happened. This couldn’t be another person’s burden, especially the one person who’s supposed to save us all. I had to find you,” she said sincerely. It was strange hearing this from the one person who’d tried to kill me only weeks before. “How’d you find out where we were?” Andrew asked this time. “Those Shadows who were loyal to me still are. They’d been interested in the Illuminator, and after the rumors of Aiden becoming an Angel again they had to see it for themselves,” she explained. “Apparently there are many humans around Aiden’s and they weren’t very discrete. But to their credit they probably didn’t realize how well the hearing is of the beings around them. I’m surprised there aren’t more Shadows hanging around.” Something crashed in the living room, tinkling glass scattering out, and we all turned toward the wide doorway. The room filled with voices, several of them frantic. “What the hell?” Joseph said, perplexed. We all began to make our way toward the noise but Andrew held me back. “Just in case,” he said smoothly. Ehno was the first through the doorway and called back immediately. “Better come in here,” he said hastily. We rushed into the living room to be greeted by the Elders, a glass frame broken at their feet. A few of them had golden-stained and ripped clothes, their hair in messes, and their eyes frantic. Lucia and Luke embraced, this being the first time they had seen each other in two hundred and fifty years. Luke, already shaky, began to cry in her arms, though Lucia stayed strong and just held him. “What’s going on?” I asked, taking in Carmela’s appearance in detail. She wore a flowing silver gown like she’d been at a fancy party, though it’d been ripped from below her breast to her hip, her elegant bun now on the side of her head where curls spilled from it. Her diamond eyes were wide with nothing short of terror. “The Ladies of Light put on an ‘Angelic Ball’ to boost everyone’s spirits over the deaths of our loved ones,” she explained. “That explains the fancy attire, but not the state of you and your clothing,” I said, panic fluttering in my stomach. I noticed that all around me the Elders were embracing Lucia, Ehno, and Andrew. There were tears and rejoicing. But the fear didn’t leave the atmosphere of the room. “The Empyrean Guards showed up at the ball,” Leo said, his violet eyes wild. His James Bond-esque suit and bronze hair were in upheaval. The hair? That was normal. But not the clothes. “Oh my! How many—” I stopped myself from asking how many were killed, not wanting to know the answer. There

was a sickness growing in my stomach. I reached for Andrew and he was there without me calling out to him in the crowd of people. His arms went around me as several tears slipped through. “Oh my Gods, Andrew. We’ve got to do something! We can’t just stay here and wonder if they’re all right.” “No!” Eleanor shouted at once. “Definitely not,” Paolo agreed, even now his voice slightly indignant. “But—” I began. “No, sweetheart.” Andrew held me tighter, his concern filtering into my veins. “We can’t go there. It could be a trap and who knows what’s happening. We might just be too late and arrive on a pile of bodies.” His last bit of words did it for me and I fled his arms and raced toward the deck outside. I threw up all over the beautiful flowers, my stomach heaving up the last of my coffee. The images in my mind were too much, even worse I felt absolutely feeble and useless. Andrew and Joseph were suddenly there, one on each side of me. They didn’t say anything and they didn’t have to. There was a voice behind me I wasn’t expecting. But today was just full of surprises, so why not add more to it? The deep voice rumbled from Patrick’s chest, his words careful. “We came as soon as we heard.” Lucia came forward, stepping between my father and Patrick to hand me a glass of water and a washcloth. I took them both gratefully and saw the audience I now had. “I’m sorry,” I choked out, not believing how wonderful this day had begun and how horribly it had turned by noon. “Gabriella,” Patrick said slowly as he came forward. His bald head caught the light, and regardless of the serious situation I wanted to rub it and make a wish. “You’re bonded, I’ve been informed. It’s good timing.” I blinked at him just casually talking about my new sex life with his genie-shiny head, and I knew at any second I would break into hysterics. “I remember you telling me the Empyrean Guards feared the Ladies of Light and admitted to one another that they could not defeat them.” He glanced down at me knowingly with his green- and gold-flecked eyes as I wiped the washcloth against my mouth and skin, and rinsed out my mouth with water. “Yes, I did—oh!” I found Carmela in the crowd, feeling a bigger connection with her and Leo for some reason. “Were the Ladies of Light at the ball when the Empyrean Guards attacked?” I asked her, setting the cup of water down. “Yes, they were,” she said, looking at Leo uncertainly. “Were they fighting?” This from Aiden. “Absolutely!” Carmela said fervently. “The question is why are the Empyrean Guards attacking the Angels? Aren’t they supposed to be on our side?” Aiden looked warily at her. “They’re the ones who’ve been killing off the Angels. It’s their solution to stopping the Ladies of Light.” Without thought, I went over and put my arms around my father and held him tight. He embraced me back, this time with his flawlessly beautiful skin, free of the charcoal black I had come accustomed to before I’d Illuminated him. His eyes were a darker green than mine; I’d inherited my mother’s eyes. Our hair was the same color, a brown with the softest of blonde highlights. He also felt thinner somehow and I worried about him. “Gabriella,” he breathed softly and embraced me back fiercely. “I’ve been worried sick, though Andrew and Ehno have kept in constant communication. I can tell you’ve been Illuminating more Shadows because new thoughts have been popping into my head.” “Just a couple today,” I said, still holding on to him for dear life.

This was my father, the person who brought me into this life and loved me from afar even though it literally killed my mother—his kindred soul. It took everything in me not to burst into tears again and I felt Andrew’s quandary on whether he should comfort me or let my father do it. But this wasn’t about just me, this was about Aiden too. He’d had a rough time since my mother’s death. I could also tell a difference after I Illuminated him and gave him back all his previous memories. Andrew had explained to me that Aiden was thankful for my gift to him, but more memories just meant more to miss and it’d take him some time to heal. Honestly, I didn’t think he ever would. In that moment I made a promise to myself, making sure Andrew heard it clearly just in case I, myself, didn’t make it through my journey. I swear on all things that have any true meaning to me that I will bring Abelie and Aiden back together one day. Andrew’s heart ached along with mine and everyone was silent around us. He spread my promise out to Ehno who shared it with Lucia. It was like a silent chain reaction as it bounced from one person to the next until I heard Andrew whisper the words to my father through their mind-link. “I hope you can,” Aiden said in hollow tones. “But you have other, more important things you must accomplish first.” I gave one more tight squeeze before I let my father go. The Elders stayed quiet, though Paolo paced angrily on the deck, stopping at each turn and shooting the ocean such heated, hate-filled looks I wondered what could be going on in that head of his. He would always be Stone Man in my mind, but there was something behind that hard exterior that had feelings like the rest of us. Paolo’s and Eleanor’s eyes met for the briefest of moments and he gave a curt, but affirmative nod. I suspected they were bonded too. Now that I understood completely what it meant, I felt like I could understand the other Angels’ relationships too. “We came to warn you,” said Eleanor, her calm voice breaking the tension-filled silence. “If it’s this easy to find you, the Empyrean Guards won’t be far. We suggest you run and hide.” “I hate to say it, but you coming here to warn us probably will lead them directly to us,” Ehno stated, his stance battle-ready. “How?” Carmela looked aghast. Ehno’s hand wiped down his face in frustration. “By your magical trace. If you use magic, they can trace it with ease.” Ehno’s red eyes found mine; he seemed to be reading me, or making calculations based on what he saw. Perhaps deciding what to bid or when to fold. “It’s one of the reasons Andrew and Gabriella flew on a plane here.” “But we didn’t,” Lucia reminded him. “And neither did the rest of them. Maybe it’s best if we all leave here without using magic.” My heart raced. Was this it then? Was the fight starting already? Andrew didn’t even get to the good stuff in our training because we were too busy making googly-eyes at one another. I felt ashamed and looked away from them, out toward the ocean. There goes our vacation, our time away from it all. But really, was this supposed to be a vacation? Or just a way for Andrew to find out what was wrong while I gave the others a break from my random mood swings? There was a figure out in the water and I squinted to try and make out who it was. Most of the Shadows had backed off, surprisingly, after the V brothers were Illuminated. I hadn’t seen them since. But this figure was larger than a normal human or Shadow and I realized the conversation had become nothing but a buzzing in my ear as I felt my eyes go wide with alarm. “It’s too late,” I whispered, stunned. Andrew’s head snapped in my direction and followed the direction of my gaze. All at once, the Angels quieted and one-by-one they turned to see what I was staring fixedly at. Then another giant man appeared at the edge of the water. There were several gasps and the Elders each popped out of existence, on the run again. I had to remind myself they weren’t fighters; they were knowledge seekers and protectors. Like my mother. Now they had no place to hide—the Divine Library had exploded and burned. Andrew pulled me from the edge of the deck and dragged

me inside and the others hurriedly followed in our wake. “It’s too late to run,” Andrew said very quietly. “If we use magic to escape it’ll only take them seconds to track us down again.” “Even a portal?” I asked, keeping my voice low too. “Yes,” Lucia answered quickly. “They’re the Empyrean Guards; they don’t need some special ability to go to different dimensions.” “We could all just go somewhere different. They couldn’t possibly catch all of our trails,” I supplied. “But what if they pick yours?” Ehno asked. “And you’ve only done it once before on accident. Who knows where you’d end up if something bad happened?” “But they don’t want to kill me. If they found me I’d be okay,” I went on. “No way.” Andrew’s voice was firm and I knew there was going to be no room for arguing. Sebastian ran up into the middle of us (scaring and surprising the hell out of me). He no longer held the appearance of a Shadow. Now he looked like a professional soldier—which I had to remind myself he was before he became a Shadow. “Halo, sir,” he snapped sharply, but respectfully, to Andrew. “The Empyrean Guards are walking up the beach now.” “We don’t have time to waist,” Eva spoke up as Sebastian ran off toward the back doors again. “What do we do?” I asked them all, not feeling very leader-like today. “We could go to the Abyss,” Lucia threw out there. No one seemed surprised at this statement. “But they can follow us there and then we’d have two different kinds of enemies after us in a place we’re unfamiliar with,” I added for common sense’s sake. “Not true,” Eva informed. “One thing I learned with that Phantom inside me was that the Empyrean Guard cannot travel to the Abyss, or any dimension ruled over by ‘the other side.’ This is our only chance without going to the Perpetual Inferno—and I don’t suspect anyone will want to go there?” She raised her eyebrows and looked around the room. No one argued and Lucia didn’t hesitate as she began to form a portal. Sebastian ran back into the middle of us, addressing Andrew again. “Halo, sir, they’re a few seconds away. We need to leave now!” “What about Joseph and Jenna?” I asked while Jenna stared in shock—a look she seemed to have a lot around the Angels. “They’re after Angels to protect the humans, right?” Joseph asked hurriedly. “Yes, but—” Joseph cut me off. “We’ve got a car here. We’ll leave and they won’t bother us. I can’t have Jenna going in there.” He pointed to the forming portal. He had a point and I agreed with him. “Go,” Ehno said suddenly, making the decision for us all. “Now, before they realize you know us.” Jenna didn’t argue. She mouthed “I love you” to me, then Joseph dragged her away. She was crying and I knew it was what was best for her and Jules. Plus, I knew Joseph would keep her safe at all costs. He loved her enough to marry her, and I knew his personality. He was a keeper. And a Keeper—they both were. The portal grew larger and wider in the living room, the big, flat screen TV rippling like it was lying in the bottom of a pool. Dust swirled around the opening and Lucia glanced over her shoulder. “It’s ready. Let’s go!”

Ehno stepped through first and Andrew seized Eva’s arm before she walked through. “Our mind-link’s lost.” Lucia must have felt the same thing because she looked like she was about to be sick. “There are no connections between Earth and the Abyss besides word of mouth. I assure you, the cut-off isn’t because he’s dead. I’ll go next to prove to you how much I believe my words.” Eva disappeared in the portal like salt dissolving into water. The door to the back deck flung across the kitchen and down the hallway where I saw it for a second in mid-flight. I heard it crash into the front door as glass exploded. Shrapnel from the wood on the front door splintered; a few tiny stakes catapulted down the hallway. Too bad we weren’t dealing with vampires—they’d be goners. “They’re here!” a Guard grunted. “Good!” There was laughter coming from another Guard. “That Lady of Light almost took out Q.” Others joined into the laughter. There was muttering, and I was sure that was from Q. “Go!” Sebastian ordered Andrew, the first sign of disobedience he’d shown toward him. Andrew didn’t take offense. Aiden and Patrick were next through the portal, then Andrew brought me up to it and handed me the dagger Patrick had given me in Italy. Andrew must have been keeping it safe. “Don’t put it away until you’re safe.” Right before we stepped into the portal, Sebastian told Lucia he’d go last. Guards pounded into the living room just as we went through the portal. It was different this time—there was no world between worlds because we weren’t going back to Earth. Nope, we were going to the Abyss—where the Phantoms lived. It didn’t feel like such a brilliant idea anymore, but there was no turning back now. We stepped into this different world, with its darkness and huge moon taking up half of the sky, and fell right into deep water. Our conversation over my costly forfeiture dangling in the middle of my mind, wondering who I would lose next. 12 TWO SIDES Underwater, bubbles erupted before my eyes as a swift hand snatched my arm and pulled me to the surface. I gasped for air, coughing and gagging at the amount of water I sucked into my lungs by pure shock. What was up with me and breathing in water? I needed to grow some gills or something. Andrew’s black hair was plastered to the side of his head, his golden eyes frantically inventorying me. The others were all swimming towards us, looks of fright and alarm clearly displayed. The water glittered under the opalescent moon like a finely woven masterpiece of stars tucked just beneath the surface. That light was enough to show us that there was nothing but water as far as the eye could see. That was when I began to panic. “This was clearly not what I was expecting,” Lucia said dryly as she swiped her hand over her face to remove the excess water. She swam closer to Ehno, obviously making sure he was all right. I kept silent, though everyone stared at me like I had a road map. Or a raft tucked in my back pocket with a compass that pointed the way to the Remove Your Phantom Here Marina. A muscle I didn’t even know existed began to loosen its twisted state until I relaxed. It was the Phantom; she’d stopped ringing my insides when she realized she was home. Maybe she was the road map to the dark Abyss. “First, let’s get out of this water,” suggested Ehno. “Agreed,” said Aiden. He nodded at Ehno and Andrew who took charge immediately. Patrick and Sebastian moved outward, becoming floating sentinels. Andrew shot from the water, his wings suddenly spreading wide

from his back in the most graceful move I’d ever seen. The white feathers shimmered and glowed like a spotlight was behind him, and I swore, right above his head, there was a celestial halo of crystalline light. He was the embodiment of an Angel. He swooped down and scouted the area around us until he finally saw land. It’s not much, Andrew offered silently to me. The situation may be less than desirable, but it’s better than being in the water. My eyes roamed over the people around me, the ones who decided to join me on this dangerous journey through the Abyss, and I sent Andrew a whispered thought. We’re going to be okay, right? Don’t doubt yourself. Always easier said than done. Sebastian whispered something to Eva and they both shot furtive glances my direction. I shook off the weird feeling I had, and we all began to swim where Andrew directed us. All I could think about was getting out of the water. My muscles already ached with the exertion from the weight of my soaked jeans. Surprisingly, I’d managed to keep both of my flip flops—thanks to them floating to the surface. It wasn’t long before we saw a disturbance in the water: a small pit of sand. Wind tore through the air and sand swirled across the ground to form artful scallops. There wasn’t any plant life and it looked just as desolate as the water. The epitome of the word “abyss.” Lucia was the first to make it on shore; her white shirt clung to her skin so I could easily see the tattoos coiling around her thin waistline. I wondered what meaning they held, or if it was all lost in 1750 when she died. Sebastian floundered out next and helped Eva just as Andrew landed with a muted thud in the sand. He held out his hand to me as my feet finally found purchase. The connection was intensified as electricity surged between us. He pulled me toward him and wrapped his wings around my body, instantly warming me. The water wasn’t chilly, but the air outside was windy and bitingly cold. Plus, I was pretty sure you could see through my white shirt. The last thing I wanted to do was move away, but I needed to make sure everyone was all right. The silence was eerie, the faces of the Angels gaunt in the pale moonlight, but alive and well. I lowered myself in the sand between Sebastian and Eva who had sat on the ground, shivering. The others formed a circle with us. Lucia took up position on the other side of Eva, her eyes sharp as beams of sapphire light. “I’m sorry we’re in this mess,” I said softly to everyone, feeling guilty. “It wasn’t my intention to come here with so many.” “Do not be ludicrous,” Patrick replied swiftly in his bass tone. It was great to hear his voice, always pronouncing every word deliberately. “We’d do anything you asked of us,” Lucia tacked on. “Indeed,” Ehno agreed. “Let’s not worry about the past, but focus on the situation at hand.” All eyes suddenly darted to me, and I glanced at Eva. “Is there anything you can tell us about the Abyss to help formulate a plan of attack?” “Why are you asking me?” Her head shot up, her features indignant. “You had the Phantom inside you for thousands of years. You know the ins and outs of its mind and thoughts far better than me. I’ve been able to keep the Phantom from taking over and polluting my mind. But you must have memories, or some sort of recollection, of the Abyss. Don’t you?” I tried to sound understanding, not accusatory. I didn’t know Eva. All I’d ever known about her was the way she looked. Her personality was always what the Soul Stalker wanted it to be. “I know more than I’d ever care to know about this place,” she admitted after a quiet minute. “The Abyss doesn’t revolve around a sun, and the moon doesn’t rotate here—it’s always the same. It’s like the pull from one planet to the next doesn’t exist. There isn’t a sun, but part of the planet is lit as if there was one. It’s better to be on this side

or else we’d need to find shelter immediately.” “Why?” Andrew prodded. “The Abyss is between Earth and the Perpetual Inferno. This side is closer to Earth. But the other side . . . it’s too close and blazes with immense heat. The gateway between the two worlds is wide open—the other side is ridiculously hot.” I brought my knees to my chest, wrapped my arms around legs, and relaxed my head there. My body shivered in the cold, though I tried to control it in my voice. I needed to be the strong one here. “Where do we find the other Phantoms? Are they in physical form here?” “It doesn’t work that way, Gabriella.” Eva grabbed a hand full of sand and let it trickle between her fingers. “Even here, this is what a Phantom would consist of.” Her other hand dipped through the falling sand. “You can see them, but they aren’t solid. They can drift away just as this sand can. They must come to you.” Her hand opened and the rest of the sand fell to the ground, then her eyes shot to mine. “All we can do is wait or else we might come across something you don’t want to.” I shook so hard it was visible to everyone around me. What can I do? Andrew thought miserably, his golden eyes watching me anxiously from the other side of Sebastian. I shook my head at him and he frowned deeply. “If waiting is what we have to do, we’ll wait.” I hugged my legs tighter to me, trying to keep in any warmth I had. “What’s that!?” I heard Lucia screech and jump to her feet. Andrew was at my side before I could even blink while Sebastian and Patrick flew to their feet and joined Lucia and Ehno at the edge of the water. Below the water were reaching hands, wide, piteous eyes, and the open mouths of ghostly spirits. They morphed as the water rippled, losing shape. We all backed away from the water’s edge in shock. “They’re lost souls,” Eva said in horror. “How awful!” I cried out, and Andrew pulled me closer to him. Through our bond, I could tell he was frightened, not knowing how to protect me. . “Stay away from them,” Eva commanded Patrick and Aiden who had moved closer to the edge. “They can possess you like a Phantom, but their sadness would burst your heart.” Patrick reached for Aiden who was reluctant to move. What are you doing, Aiden? Andrew asked him silently. What if she’s here? Aiden glanced back, misery etched into his face. Andrew’s arms loosened as I pulled free and went to my father. “She’s not here.” “How do you know?” “The Empyrean Guard said she was waiting in the Timeless Oblivion for me in case something was to happen during my journey.” I pulled him into my arms and he engulfed me with his huge frame. Patrick helped me bring him further inland. Ask Patrick if this is how he’s been since I left, I thought to Andrew, clearly unnerved by my father’s state. A minute passed. He was trying to hide it when you were home, but he’s devastated by Abelie’s death. Andrew placed a hand on Aiden’s shoulder in sympathy. It burned when I felt his understanding—he’d lost me once and he

was once the same, desolate person that Aiden was now. Aiden stared straight forward after he sat in the sand, as if he wasn’t completely there. My heart ached with the loss of Abelie, but even worse for my father and his pain. He had thousands of years of memories, and now he would never make anymore with her. The mere thought was devastating. Watch after him, Ehno, I need to speak with Gabriella. Andrew took my hand, gestured for Lucia to follow us, and began to pull me down the small beach. The tiny island was roughly three hundred feet across, so we didn’t have far to walk. The giant moon in the sky made the sand look like millions of tiny crystals winking up at us. The wind continued to scour the beach, chilling me to my bones. “What’s this about?” Lucia asked with raised eyebrows as we made our way farther from everyone. Andrew halted suddenly. “Gabriella, show her.” I almost tripped at the abrupt stop. “Show her what?” Andrew caught me around my elbow and gazed down at me with his intense golden eyes. “The tattoo.” “I’ve already seen the wings on her back, Andrew.” Lucia folded her arms. “Is this really the time?” We both ignored her. “Now?” I asked, confused. “It’s been bothering me—and I think Lucia might have some answers.” His eyes darted toward Lucia and then came back to mine expectantly. Lucia’s red, drying hair shifted over her confused features before she brushed it back. “What’s—” Making sure I faced away from everyone down the beach, I lifted my shirt awkwardly with Andrew’s help. Lucia’s blue eyes widened and then narrowed as she moved in closer. Her fingers touched the design lightly, studying the symbols. “It’s like mine,” she breathed and peeled her still-damp shirt up to show me. Our eyes met, and it was clear she was both surprised and not. She looked away first, so I stared down at her tattoos. Though I couldn’t see all of my markings without a mirror, from what I could see, they were identical to Lucia’s, even in their placement. “What does this mean?” I asked desperately. “I—” There was the sound of several thuds behind me and I dropped my shirt. Andrew’s wings expanded wide so they were between me and whoever was on the other side. Lucia whispered in Italian and a shield of protection wrapped around us, leaving Andrew just outside. In the distance I heard several angry shouts. “This is the Abyss, a territory your kind are not allowed to cross,” said a deep voice. Amused. “Unless you’re dead —which we can remedy.” “We’ve come to seek refuge, and to return a lost Phantom.” Andrew’s tone was commanding and authoritative. He rarely spoke like that in my presence, and it always startled me when I heard it. And it was sexy too. “We don’t offer sanctuary here, Halo. Leave now.” There were several more thuds behind us. I jerked around and finally saw what Andrew was trying to protect us from. There were six of them; they had human-like qualities, but their features were sharp, angled in ways that made you know immediately they weren’t human. Above their eyes, and gently sloping down their cheekbones, was a metallic-like paint, though it looked as if it was part of them. Almost like my tattoos were not truly ink, but part of me. Their hair was long and pulled back from their faces, their eyes cold pools of steely grey. They wore very little, only flexed metal straps holding white cloth to their skin. “Sir,” the one in front of me barked over my shoulder. “It’s her.”

“Impossible!” “No, sir, see for yourself. It’s her.” Andrew twisted around, his wings folding behind him as he reached for me. Lucia’s protective spell rippled but invited Andrew in. It’s the Fallen, he informed. “The Fallen?” I mouthed. Andrew nodded. A dark-haired man walked around us until he faced me. His determined eyes grew curious and disbelieving as he reached out for me. I flinched back into Andrew’s chest as he put his hands on my shoulders to soothe me. The man’s hand hit the protection spell. A small wave of blue spun out from the spot but he was able to penetrate it. Andrew relaxed behind me though I wasn’t sure why. The spell is to protect us—he isn’t going to hurt you, Andrew informed. The man cocked his head to the side when his fingers touched my cheek. I closed my eyes, shaking. His skin was cool to the touch, smooth as glass, and unearthly. He pulled away and I opened my eyes to see him back away. His eyes never left mine as he whistled loudly. Whatever was going down on the other side of the beach stopped and it grew silent. “Akhol! Firen!” he shouted, and I jumped at his rough voice. “Release her.” He gestured in my direction. I turned to see the two he’d called to fly over the sand with giant black wings flapping wildly—a male and female. They came at me like hurtling missiles. Andrew held no fear that they would be able to penetrate Lucia’s barriers. He was wrong. They crashed through and each of them seized me from beneath my arms and yanked me away before Andrew had a chance to grasp me. I screamed as they hauled me into the sky and over Andrew’s head. They dropped me onto the sand from ten feet in the air, and I landed on my feet like a super-ninja. It was kind of awesome—if it weren’t for the situation I might have done a happy-dance. Instead, shouts erupted from all around me as I backed away from the flying missiles, my heart jumping irregularly. The male slammed me into the ground, knocking the air from my lungs, and held my shoulders down. I sent electricity into him as Andrew flew across the sand and tackled him. Lucia, with a quick snap of her fingers, had a blazing light sizzling across the sand toward the female who yelped and flew into the air, her wings flapping recklessly. Electricity exploded out of me and several of them were blown over. My chest heaved as everything around me turned chaotic. “Enough!” yelled the one who touched my face. “We will not harm her. Akhol? Firen? Get to work!” I rose onto my elbows and Andrew knelt beside me, his expression grim. I had no idea what the hell was going on, but my heart beat frantically and my body shook so roughly I thought I’d dissolve into the sand. It was all emotions though—my body felt powerful. I felt strong. Akhol and Firen came forward with stern faces. “Akhol? Shoulders,” the woman, Firen, commanded. He put his hands on my shoulders and pushed me down again, though more gently this time. “Andrew?” I asked, my voice frightened. What did the Fallen want from me, and what did that one mean by “release her”? My breaths were ragged with stress as I tried to figure out what they were planning. Tears threatened to flow as I stared with horror toward Firen. Her purple (purple!) hair was pulled tightly into a high ponytail, making her cheekbones the focal point of her face. Stark and fierce. “No one will harm you, I promise,” Andrew said, though his eyes flashed to Lucia, and the uncertainty was written

across his face and in his thoughts. He gripped my hand and brought it to his lips—not kissing, just putting his lips to my knuckles in comfort. Firen floated gracefully to my side, fell to her knees, and placed her cold, smooth palm against the skin right above my shirt. Silence swept across the beach as the seconds passed. The Phantom inside knew what Firen was there to do and she began to fight viciously for control of my body. Firen was trying to extract the Phantom from me. I jerked wildly as the Phantom sent roaring heat through my body, twice as hot as the first time. I yelled out in unimaginable agony and Andrew held on tighter, sending all his strength into my body. Would I be able to endure this again? There was no ice this time. I choked on another scream as my skin grew so hot I was sure it was liquefying. From the hand Andrew held, blisters broke out across my heated skin. “Lucia! Ehno!” Andrew called out. “Gabriella needs you.” Ehno and Lucia were suddenly there, a crowd of heads over me. They also sent all of their energy into me, anything to help cool the ravenous fire. Above me, in the sky, I saw the wisps of ghostly beings flying overhead. Something told me they were Phantoms—this only made the one inside me absolute in her need to control me. The hand Andrew held literally caught fire, engulfing Andrew’s. He closed his eyes in pain, but endured with me as he continued to send everything he had into me. I screamed and screamed, my voice going hoarse. The fire didn’t relent and I had no idea how Andrew held on and kept quiet at the same time. “Fight,” I heard Eva shout from far away, just like she had last time. Akhol let go of my shoulders and backed away. Ehno moved to my head and held my shoulders down as I began to rock back and forth, my body literally burning away. The fire spread down my arm and I knew then I would die— again. My mind was an incoherent mess. Pain was all there was. Lots of pain. The word didn’t even come close to describing how horrible it was. Tears streamed down my face and evaporated before my eyes. I couldn’t fight anymore and went limp on the sand, my head lolling to the side as my body wanted to give in to shock. Eva still shouted to fight, even though her voice sounded distant and thin. Andrew never let go, even as he burned with me. Cried with me. I commended him for his love and support, but this was a battle I couldn’t win. The Phantom was going to win this and I hated that. Please, keep fighting. I’ll never let go, Andrew cried silently. The Phantoms floating in the sky lowered to the sand and surrounded all of us, making enough of a substantial haze you could see the faces within. They gathered together until they looked as solid as I did. There were hundreds of them. My vision wavered. “At last,” one of them said eagerly. I think. Firen pushed harder against my chest, the fire spreading to her too, until a guttural scream erupted from my throat, tearing and thrashing the whole way. The Phantom inside me fought against Firen’s pull with more vigor. Firen shouted every profanity known to man, and in every language ever spoken. Then, through gritted teeth, she began to chant in a language I’d never heard before. My vision continued to go in and out, stars sparking in blackness as my limp body began to fail on me. The Phantom whispered words in my mind—let her take control, she’d make the pain stop. I was about to relent. Give up. But then Firen’s chanting grew louder and the heat began to recede from her arm. Something was happening. Firen shouted one last word that echoed through the Abyss as if magnified times a million. The Phantom—Soul Stalker—was sucked out of my body in the strangest way. Firen’s hand came away from my chest slowly, taking the burn with it, and attached to her fingers was the ghostly outline of the Phantom. Firen stood, yanked the Phantom free, and threw it away from me. It twisted in the air, flew through the crowd of Phantoms that surrounded us, dissipated, and suddenly became solid in one of the Phantom’s grips. His hand wrapped around her throat and her long, blonde hair swirled in waves behind her as he shook her angrily. That was the last thing I saw before I passed out.

13 BLACK WINGS Death. It was something I, Abelie, had to think about once. Weird, right? Strange that death was ever an inevitable end. But it wasn’t anymore. Not really. I eluded it. Tricked it. It was an odd concept—the world aged, moved forward, yet I . . . didn’t. I had to think of ways to remove myself from the mundane. The Elders did great things, truly, but it was always the same: a trip here or there to pick up an artifact, or some form of written history. What was really the point, though? Hadn’t we already lived through the history? Were we really going to share our findings with the humans? Probably not. That was why I was here: boredom. “Lucia?” I called out and ran to her. She smiled brightly when she saw me. Her auburn hair was pulled back into a twisted knot and her insanely lowcut, short white dress showed off her long legs. She knew it upset the girls in town to see her wear almost nothing while they had layers upon layers of clothing on in the summer heat. “Abelie!” she greeted. “I thought you backed out on me.” “Not a chance in hell.” I snorted sarcastically. “You weren’t lying, were you?” “Oh no, what I found will blow your mind!” Lucia’s eyes lit with excitement. We’ve been friends for a long time but, like with all of my friends, we had drifted apart several times in the past. It was only recently that we had reconnected. Immortality helps in this aspect. It was hard with our two different lifestyles to be together all the time—though it helped that she could make portals for easy travel to fun destinations outside of this realm. Sometimes I even brought Aiden along, but that was rare. He was so busy, being a Halo and all. Proud and full of pride? Definitely. He earned that title though, which meant less time to do fun things like travel the universe. “I won’t believe it until you prove it.” I raised my eyebrows in challenge. “Let’s get our cross-dimensional awareness on!” She smirked and a meaningful look spread across her face. “Okay, but I warned you.” She held her palms out and a portal began to form before her, all silvery, rippling water and brightly lit prisms of metallic. “Shall I go first or do you want to?” I laughed. “I’m not falling for that again.” “All right,” she said and walked backward through the portal. What am I getting myself into? I shrugged to myself and stepped into the portal. On the other side I was blinded by the brightest light I had ever seen. I squinted immediately and held a hand up to shield myself from . . . what? “Let your eyes adjust and you’ll be able to see,” Lucia said next to me and I nearly jumped ten feet. I hadn’t seen her during my momentary blindness. When my eyes adapted to the brightness they landed on a grouping of hundreds of glowing, ethereal beings all milling around, minding their own business, I guessed. Whatever that was. “What—” “They were once Fallen Angels,” Lucia whispered excitedly, cutting me off before I could ask. “We’re in the Abyss?” I asked in horror. “They’re our ancestors, Abelie. These are the Fallen Angels that were given a second chance at life. They’re not Fallen anymore.”

“How’d you find this place?” My eyes grew wide regardless of the brightness. “It was purely by accident. Luke was with me—he’s the only other person who knows about this place.” She beamed at me widely, extremely proud of herself. “Not even Ehno?” I asked skeptically. “Well, I’m sure he knows something; he just isn’t interested in my charades.” She chuckled. It was like an Arctic whiteout. The only things visible to me were Lucia, her auburn hair and dark skin stark in this environment, and the hundreds of Angels—our ancestors. A woman, blonde hair glistening down her back, grey, wise eyes, and rippling white robes, stepped forward and placed her palms on my cheeks. Her skin was as smooth and soft as a newborn baby’s. I tumbled into a new world—the past. A memory. Huge wings span with glittering white behind an ethereal being. The face is sharp, glowing with power, and turns with a calculated grace. Her eyes are bluer than the clearest sky, her hair is shinier than the sun reflecting off water, and her body as fit and toned as an Olympic athlete. Her strength is so obvious it’s no wonder an army is silent and still before her as they await her commands. The language that spills from her tongue is not one spoken anymore. It’s understandable all the same. “So now we make our choice,” she says, her voice echoing with authority. “You’ve heard your options with the Phantoms and the Empyrean Guard. As an Umá with special abilities, my sweet Angels, I will not hold your decisions against you, for it’s not my place to judge. But be aware,” she warns, “that with death comes judgment. Choose wisely.” The woman turns away; one wing blackens like an onyx gem while the other glows white like a bright spotlight. She flies into the sky, leaving the crowd staring in astonishment. Angels begin to fly away in two directions. Half make a black storm of moving, twisting shapes. The other half forms a white-as-snow moving cloud. The ranks are divided. Abruptly I was back, staring at the woman before me. She said nothing as she backed away into the crowd of Angels. “Wait!” I rasped. “What was that?” Lucia’s eyebrows came together as she stared between us. Questioning. Cautious. “This is for your child, Abelie, daughter of Tiziano,” the woman said, her voice like a soft wind upon my skin. “You won’t remember this, but she will. One day she’ll have to decide like I did.” “What are you talking about?” I practically screamed as the woman began to fade into the flow of Angels. “It’s not about sides, Luminous One.” For some reason it felt as if she was talking to someone else while looking straight into my soul. Her mouth didn’t move, but her words filled the air. “Neither black nor white are right. Nor are they wrong. But you must decide. Choose. Most importantly: lead. Don’t fly away like I did and divide the ranks. Trust in your heart and soul. Lead, Luminous One.” The woman’s voice drifted away as she disappeared. I ran forward as Lucia stared at her, stunned. When I flung myself into the ghostly crowd of the Angels, they all wafted away like billowing smoke, wisps of their shapes floating away. “Come back!” I twirled around, hoping she’d appear again. “What did you mean? Please!” Nothing. They were all gone and I was full of questions that may never be answered. “You scared them all away.” Lucia said disappointedly as she came forward to stand next to me, eyebrows raised. “What the hell was that about, anyway?” “I— I don’t know.” I felt dazed and confused. “She said it was for my child.” Our eyes met and Lucia cocked her

head to the side. “She didn’t say anything, Abelie?” “Yes, she did!” “No, she surely didn’t. I’m definitely not deaf,” argued Lucia. My mouth dropped open. “But she did. . . .” “This was a bad idea,” said Lucia, shaking her head and staring at me like I was crazy. Maybe I was; it certainly felt that way. She began to form another portal, her attention split between that and me, as if she was waiting for me to do something strange. Like grow a third arm. At this point I wouldn’t rule anything out. “Let’s get out of here.” Lucia gestured me forward. “After you.” Normally I wouldn’t go first; Lucia can be a trickster and I’d prefer not to end up on the Planet of Cats. They made me sneeze. But my mind? Buh-bye. I took a step forward and was back in Italy. Lucia came through the portal and we both turned around and looked at it at the same time. “I don’t get it,” I said, wondering why the portal didn’t take us anywhere. That had never happened before. “Wait, is the joke on me? Did you send me to the World of Blue and now I’m covered in blue?” I made a dramatic show of checking out my skin and clothes, keeping my face serious. “Huh. That’s weird—I swear it worked yesterday.” Lucia shook her head. “And there is no ‘World of Blue.’ ” She turned in a circle, clearly just as confused as me. Then she looked at the sky and back to me. “Is it just me, or is it late afternoon?” I looked up and noticed that the sun had visibly moved across the sky. When I first stepped through the portal, it was early morning. “Okay, what’s going on?” I asked and glanced back at Lucia. “A lot of time has passed, yet we never went to the other dimension.” She shook her head again. “Maybe we did go somewhere and just don’t remember it?” she offered. There was a tingling in my head, and, for some reason, I believed her for just a second. Only for a second, though. I threw my head back and laughed. “Sure, Lucia. Whatever you say.” I shook my head at her. “What’d you think you found anyway?” Lucia rolled her eyes. “Never mind. Dinner?” <> I gasped for air. “Is she awake?” someone asked—a voice I didn’t recognize. Several voices whispered near me and a warm palm moved hair away from my face. I’d recognize his warmth from anywhere. Andrew’s thoughts were a swirling mass of concern. “Ella?” he whispered, his words just as delicate as his touch. I blinked into the darkness and saw hundreds of Phantoms surrounding me. Memories flooded back and I remembered the Phantom had been forced from my body; the fire. My heart skipped a beat as I snatched Andrew’s hand and brought it to my face, examining it. His skin was smooth and unscarred, just faintly red. I let out a shaky, yet relieved, breath. The moon was still just as unnaturally huge and bright in the sky. I lifted myself, gazing about, as grains of sand embedded into my elbows. I was wrong—there weren’t hundreds of Phantoms, there were thousands of them. Possibly more.

“She’s a tough one,” one of them said with a chuckle. A Phantom stepped forward, a ghostly white figure who flickered in and out of view as the wind blew. Like a flame from a candle. “We’re surprised to see you here, Illuminator.” His voice like the breeze brushing against my skin. “This is an unexpected, yet pleasant, change of pace. We thought you’d never come.” The Phantom drifted closer, trailing white, vaporous clouds behind him. Andrew helped me stand, and I was relieved that I felt well. New. Like a shiny, new penny. Where are the Fallen? I asked Andrew silently. They came to do what they were meant to. They said they have no business with you anymore so they left. “We’ve been waiting a long time,” said the Phantom, his spirit-like body rippling in another gust of wind—a waving flag. Nerves rushed down my body. Did we make a mistake coming here? Sure, the Phantom inside me was gone, but were we going to die here? Or be stuck forever? “You’ve been waiting . . . for me?” “Oh yes, Illuminator. The Angels follow you; you’re their leader. We ask that you—they—join our side as your ancestors once did,” the Phantom explained calmly. Excitement gleamed in his translucent eyes. There was a murmur of anticipation in the indistinct crowd. I looked to my Angels for answers. Andrew’s palm rested on my shoulder in a show of support, as did his thoughts. But no answers. The Guardians and Halos were on “radio silence,” and their expressions exuded a confidence in me that I didn’t believe. And I knew, no matter what I choose, they would follow me into the very fiery depths of the Perpetual Inferno if I asked them to. Which I wouldn’t, by the way. Eva, at Sebastian’s side, also looked to me to take the leader role. There was no one else. Even Lucia—once a powerful Lady of Light—expected me to make the decisions. Be the leader. But what were the right decisions? Even the President had advisors. Don’t I get that much? “Why should I join you?” My voice came out firm. Leader-like. “I don’t even know you.” “My apologies, Illuminator. I’m Xavier, General of the Phantoms.” He didn’t offer his hand. “Xavier, why should I join you?” My voice thankfully didn’t waver. “We’re not oblivious to what’s going on in the other dimensions, Illuminator. A war is on the cusp of tearing our worlds apart.” Xavier’s grizzly voice was stamped with warnings. “If the Angels join us in the Abyss, a war could be neutralized before it ever forms. Join usss.” The last came out as a hiss. “Do you think the Empyrean Guard will even give a second glance at the Abyss? They’re focused on us, not you. What are you afraid of, Xavier?” I asked suspiciously. Maybe the Empyrean Guard should come here and wipe out the Abyss and their Phantoms—especially if they were as soul-sucking as the Soul Stalker. “The Covetous War was never won. It’s just been an atrociously long stalemate.” Xavier sounded bored. “And you, dear Illuminator, are the piece we’ve all been waiting for. You can end this once and for all.” “Joining you is the last thing on my mind!” I shouted, remembering how the Soul Stalker almost killed Joseph, murdered Andrew, and tried to destroy my life by taking over my body. I took a solid breath and felt Andrew’s warmth at my back. I had to keep my cool; I was in their territory. They were trying to woo me, and the second they thought I was going to say no was when we were in trouble. So, I’d let them woo. The mental silence between the Halos broke and their conversation trickled to me through Andrew. They were thinking the same thing I was: we had to play their game or they’d have no need for us. This was their turf and we weren’t sure how to fight these insubstantial beings.

The Phantoms stayed silent, patiently waiting for me to calm down before Xavier spoke again. “I don’t condone what that soul-sucker did. She’s been terminated and will never cause you problems again.” He paused, his hollow eyes sizing me up. Calculating. Cold. Soulless. “The Angels joined us once before; we’re not the evil beings you think we are. We were created by a covetous God, but we, ourselves, are not like him. We want peace. The only way for that is for you to join us here in the Abyss. We welcome you to our home and hope you’ll join us.” Suddenly, thousands of Phantoms swirled around us, infecting every inch of personal space in a white tornado. “What are you doing?” I bellowed as I covered myself from the sand flying around us. “Giving your Angels a gift,” said Xavier smoothly. The air cleared with a harsh blow of the wind and all the Phantoms materialized behind Xavier again. Gasps erupted behind me and I twirled to see my Angels flexing their black wings. Black wings! My stomach lurched. Andrew was the only one of our lot that could fly without wings. And then we were both gifted with wings and silver blood after we died and came back. These new black wings could be a blessing or a curse —but the consensus was that the thought of flying was thrilling. But at what cost? “A bribe?” I whipped around and scowled at Xavier. “Certainly not, Illuminator. Please, it’s our gift to you and yours. We’ll leave you so you may converse with your Angels. We’re merely a breath away when you’re ready to accept our offer.” The Phantoms melted into the breeze, tendrils of wispy smoke trailing above the water before they disappeared. The vastness of the Abyss was eerily quiet and, strangely enough, suffocating. Claustrophobic, somehow. We stared in astonishment at the spot where the Phantoms were for several minutes. I broke the silence. “Oh my.” Voice soft, but still echoing like an unearthly song. Turning, I stared at the black wings on my Angels that once plagued me. Were they all possessed now? So not a bribe at all—it was a threat. Join them or my Angels will be possessed? Oh, hell no. This was so not good. My knees wanted to go out from under me. I’d come here to rid myself of one problem only to create a worse one. What was I going to do? There was one thing though: I had to be strong. A leader. This I will not fail at, I promised myself. First things first, though. Lucia knew something, and I was going to find out. 14 DIPLOMATIC Lucia,” I hissed. “We need to talk. Now!” Andrew gave me a knowing look. Lucia’s blue eyes shot from her black wings to my face, startled. Her eyebrows came together in confusion, but she stopped stroking her onyx feathers and stepped closer. “Illuminator?” The way she said it, all firm and serious, actually made me miss my nickname. “You’ve been starring in my dreams,” I said, lowering my voice. Lucia tried to hide a smile, her solemn demeanor gone, as if it was all a joke. “Have I?” The tone was so unlike her and my suspicions firmed up. “The Sight—not my actual dreams.” I rolled my eyes in true Gabriella fashion, feigning nonchalance. “Why didn’t you tell us you’ve met your ancestors?”

“What?” Her blue eyes grew wide in surprise. “The once Fallen Angels from the Abyss?” I went on. “I haven’t.” She snorted cynically. “I think you’re getting The Sight mixed up with your dreams, because I’ve never met my ancestors. Luke refuses to travel time.” She shrugged, brushing off my words. I folded my arms. “No, Lucia. I was Abelie in this dream, living this out.” Then her words sunk in. “Wait . . . Luke can time travel?” My eyebrows rose to hairline level and jaw hung slack. “Simply put,” she said, pushing my jaw closed with a single finger, “he can manipulate space and time, though he refuses to do it. The consequences can be quite ghastly.” She said it as if time traveling was no big deal. “Now, explain what you mean about our ancestors,” she said, bewilderment obvious in her tone. I shook my head as if clearing an Etch-A-Sketch. “You ran across them with Luke on accident while skipping dimensions,” I explained while rubbing my temple, a headache forming. “Then you brought Abelie to the same dimension, but when you two came back through the portal neither of you remembered. Regardless, I clearly heard you say that you did remember when you and Luke went.” Lucia’s eyes were wide. “What?” Everyone else stared with open mouths too, their black wings forgotten. They’d all been listening into our conversation. “Gabby, I think I would remember something like that! I mean . . . we’re talking about the Ethereal Eternity.” “It did look like heaven,” I agreed earnestly, then went on to explain my dream in vivid detail for her, hoping it would spark a memory. “I— I have no idea what you’re talking about,” protested Lucia when I was done, her facial expression suddenly unreadable. Jeez, had everyone taken FBI 101? Did I miss the memo? “None?” I probed. She shook her head firmly, clamming up. Doubt and fear crept through my body, uninvited and cold. Could I even trust anything she’d said to me? Were all my Angels possessed? Was I alone in a sea of Soul Stalkers? An invisible vice latched onto my stomach and tightened. Quickly darting my gaze across my Angels, I tried to read into their eyes, past the liquid colors of their soul to see within. It was useless. My breath hitched as they all stared at me, emotionless. “Are . . . you . . .” I gulped as my heart plummeted. “Are you possessed?” It came out as a tiny whisper, though it echoed around, magnified. “Any of you? I need to know if Xavier’s gift came with a Phantom friend.” My voice choked on the end, a sob at the edge. “Of course not,” said Lucia. The others protested adamantly, mechanically. Or was I seeing things? I reached for Andrew, the one person who held me grounded. Holding onto his forearms, I stared into his rich, golden eyes. “Your wings?” The words shook as they escaped. I had to know: were they black? He hesitated, reading my thoughts, then his wings unfurled from his back, spreading wide. He stretched them out to their full extent; they had their same beautiful, ethereal glow. Opalescent and pearly white. I breathed a sigh. “See? Not possessed. Read my mind, hear the others.” Andrew’s eyes beseeched mine; he was sincere. But the others. . . . Do you think us so weak that we couldn’t break through a Phantom’s grasp to warn you? his thoughts breathed through my mind. Then I was swept away on a wave of thoughts from the other Angels, comforting, supportive, trusting me with their lives. Eva’s was the only voice absent in my head, but no one had that kind of connection with her. I’d have to take

it on faith that she, too, was not possessed. They could have lied if they wanted to, but Andrew did make a good point. The elite Angels were with me, and there was no internal struggle that I could find from the outside in. Relief galloped in. Without warning, I hugged Andrew so fiercely he took a few steps back before he caught his balance and wrapped his arms around me. “Thank Gods.” I stepped back, took a deep breath, and held it for a few seconds longer than normal, then turned to face the Angels. “We’re being given a choice, but I don’t have the information I need to make the right decision.” I was glad to hear my voice had regained its authoritative tone, even if it was full of frustration. “I feel like I’m being thrust into a war I know nothing about. Angels picked sides in the past—but I don’t know enough about either to make the right choice.” I felt like crying, though I left that part out and kept a brave face. “I’m sorry, Gabby,” Lucia said sincerely and placed her hand on my forearm. “I truly don’t remember, or have any recollection of what you’ve told me.” She shook her head as if knocking the absent memories loose. “You know what we need to do,” said Aiden unexpectedly. His commanding tone flabbergasted me so much it took a few seconds to respond. “I do?” Aiden smiled at me and pulled something from his back. “Here.” For a second I thought it was going to be a dagger like the one I had, but it was something else entirely. “The Timeless book?” I squeaked, seeing the worn, leather-bound cover and yellowed, uneven pages. “How’d you keep it dry?” Aiden’s lips twitched up. “Just a bit of magic.” Andrew took the book from him and used his own magic to hide it, the book disappearing before my eyes. “You think the answers are in there?” I asked. “Not entirely.” Aiden’s fingers ran through his new wings absently. “The book definitely holds an importance that you must figure out. If it’s meant for you, then only you can see it. Until then, we need to seek out the Fallen. They were here for the Covetous War and might be able to answer your questions.” “He makes a good point,” Patrick agreed. “We’ll do whatever you want us to,” added Ehno earnestly. “We’re here for you no matter what.” “I just want to get out of here,” I admitted. “Lucia? Can you open up a portal back to Earth?” “You sure you want to do that?” Eva asked quickly, her face tense. “Aiden’s right about the Fallen and you know they’re here. This is your chance.” “And the Empyrean Guard could be waiting for us back on the beach—and who knows if they’ve found Aiden’s house,” added Sebastian. Suspicion raced through my bond with Andrew. They make a good point, I thought. As much as I want to get out of here, I need to put my Angels first. I’m just looking out for you. Andrew reached for my hand. Anything you want. I’m yours. “Ehno, do you see anything in the future that we should be worried about . . . like these black wings?” I asked. “The future here in the Abyss is invisible, but back on Earth I see no problems coming of the black wings,” he reassured.

“Lucia, make a portal to Washington D.C.,” I ordered, surprising everyone. She raised her eyebrows as if it was a joke. “I don’t know where that is,” she admitted ruefully. Patrick sent a mental image which Ehno passed along to Lucia. She gave a tight nod. “Okay, here’s the deal,” I said. “I want Eva, Sebastian, Patrick, and Aiden to go back to Earth—” Aiden cut me off. “I’m staying with you.” “I’d feel better if you weren’t here,” I countered. “I’d feel better knowing you’re alive and well. I’m staying.” “Please,” I begged. “Just go with them. For me?” He refused to budge on the subject, folding his arms impatiently. “Listen . . . Dad, I . . . I can’t lose you too, and I can’t promise your safety here,” I murmured low. His shoulders relaxed some, but he was still stubborn. “Earth isn’t looking any better,” he argued. “And I lost you twice. I can’t—won’t—go through that ever again.” His words cut me. “Aiden, I’ll protect her,” said Andrew, stepping toward him. “With my life.” “As will I,” added Ehno. “Me too.” Lucia. “Please,” I added. Aiden nodded reluctantly, his face desolate. I hated it, but if anything was to happen here, and he died, he’d never see Abelie again and I couldn’t live with that. I met Patrick’s green- and gold-flecked eyes. “Patrick, I need you to seek out Joseph and Jenna first thing.” He nodded. “Make sure they’re all right.” It sickened me to think they weren’t. “Scope out his place to make sure they weren’t followed”—and I hoped they hadn’t been—“just to be safe. Meet with the FBI Director, Tom Morris, and update him. I’m sure Joseph already has, but we need to work with the Director to formulate a plan. You have knowledge of the Angels that they don’t. They’re probably thinking big guns and bombs—that’s the last thing we want.” “Of course, Illuminator,” said Patrick in his deep voice. “Eva?” I pivoted to her and she nodded. “Go back to Italy and find the Shadows. Aiden, accompany her to help convince those who were against the Soul Stalker. Show them what I can do. Gather them together and find a safe place to keep them until I return. Make sure they know that as soon as I get back they’ll be Illuminated. I want to turn the Shadow of the Sun back into a myth. Got it?” “Absolutely,” said Eva. Aiden nodded solemnly. “Great! Now Sebastian.” He perked up like a kid being called first for kickball. “I need you in Italy too, but not for the same reason. We can’t use Aiden’s as headquarters for the Guardians anymore, so we need a secluded spot, unknown to anyone except the Guardians. Also, locate a place where any scared Angels can go for refuge, and use any magic necessary to protect it from the Empyrean Guard. I want them to not only feel safe, but be safe. Use no magic for traveling to either place. “The Divine Library’s destroyed, so until I return, have those I’ve Illuminated and the Shadows rebuild it the best

they can. Use magic if you have to. Only contact the Elders if you’re in a desperate situation. Right now, the Ladies of Light think they’re blind to the truth, so we need to limit our contact with them. Any questions?” All was quiet. Aiden wouldn’t make eye contact with me and it broke my heart. I’m doing this for him and Abelie, I told myself. “The rest of us will seek out the Fallen,” I said. “It’s time we get the whole story.” I took a deep breath and then exhaled slowly. “All right, Lucia. Let’s get the ball rolling.” She nodded and raised her hands, palms forward, to make her portal. Before it formed, Phantoms flooded the tiny sand island. “Do you not appreciate our gift?” Xavier asked, offended and angry. I stopped Lucia with a cautious wave of my hand. “We do, but I need time to consider your offer.” Xavier frowned; his ghostly face was clearly upset. “Unacceptable,” he growled. “You cannot leave!” “I’m not leaving,” I said quickly, taken aback. “Then why is this one making a portal for Earth? You think I don’t know what goes on in my own realm?” Xavier fumed. “Only a few are leaving. I won’t until I make my decision,” I explained calmly, hoping that he, too, would calm down. Xavier’s insubstantial eyes narrowed as he floated forward. “How do I know you won’t leave with them?” “Keep me captive until the portal is closed,” I offered. No, roared Andrew through our bond and went to move between us. Trust me, I conveyed to him and touched him softly on the arm to stop the hostile and protective movements. I do trust you. It’s him I don’t trust, he growled internally. “Impossible, my dear Illuminator,” Xavier said, oblivious to our silent conversation. “That would be blasphemous. You’re the Illuminator—a legend. You bring hope to us, even in the Abyss. None of my Phantoms would dare do such a thing, even if I ordered it.” “Then what do you suggest?” I was being diplomatic. “How about I keep him—” Xavier pointed to Aiden and Phantom’s instantly surrounded him “—captive until the portals are closed? That’ll ensure you stay, right?” I opened my mouth to speak, but Aiden spoke before I did. “Of course she’ll stay, won’t you?” My eyes narrowed. Tricky, tricky. “Yes,” I agreed. Aiden actually smiled—a genuine one. “Then I’ll let your Angels pass.” He held up a finger at Lucia, though kept his creepy eyes on me. “Just remember I don’t do this lightly, Illuminator. I’ve offered you solace and I won’t be spat on in my own realm. Not even by you.” He dropped his hand. “Of course not, Xavier. I do nothing to disrespect you, which is why I’m not taking your offer lightly,” I said smoothly. That seemed to butter him up a bit. “As you wish, form your portal.” Lucia looked at me and I nodded in approval. As she began to use her magic, my eyes went straight to Aiden, whose arms were being held by several ghostly hands. He didn’t struggle or fight against them, and his smug

expression—lips quirked up just at the edges, eyes sparkling with suppressed mirth—showed just how satisfied he was with the outcome, much to my chagrin. Then the Angels I ordered back were gone, the portal closing in a sparkle of watery light. It was time to finally hear the truth. The Phantoms dissipated onto the wind, leaving Aiden unharmed. 15 DARK EXPLORATION We were no longer water-locked. Now that Aiden, Ehno, and Lucia had wings, being trapped on the island was no longer an issue. The true question was: where would we go? Of course, my intent was to find the Fallen so I could flesh out the story and form a plan from there, but I was stuck. I knew nothing of this place and neither did my Angels. It wasn’t like there was a map on the street corner. I bet even Joseph’s Miracle Phone wouldn’t have the answers. Regardless, my Angels were waiting for me to lead, so patient and assured. Instead, I moved away from them to give myself a few minutes to think. If only they knew the internal war that waged within me. Should I go left? Perhaps right? I should have made Eva stay behind because of her knowledge. I’m so stupid, I scolded myself as I plopped onto the sand, took off my flip-flops, and dug my toes into it. “Don’t be so hard on yourself,” Andrew soothed as he came up behind me. “No one expects you to be perfect.” He chuckled softly. “And I’m sure Joseph’s phone would work—but, alas, we are without.” A bout of laughter erupted from me due to his unexpected sarcasm. Brief and heady. I looked up into his shadowed face, his golden eyes practically glowing in the dark, and wished we were back on the beach. Which was kind of ironic since where we were could technically be called a beach. Still, there were lessons to be learned, new powers to unlock. And Andrew was always so patient with me. Now everything felt rushed and the sand had settled at the bottom of the hourglass. Times up. “It’s not patience,” he said, lips quirking up as he read my mind. “It’s all in here—” he pointed in the center of his chest “—you just have to believe in yourself. You never really learned anything from me; you just mimicked what I did. Because it’s not something to be learned, it’s something you already possess.” He smiled kindly. When I let his words sink in, I realized he was right: my abilities were just dormant inside me. I just had to wake them and own it. Something inside my chest swelled. It wasn’t my electricity; it was something else all together. Warm, powerful, and . . . full of light. Like the inside of my body was a bright light bulb. I stared at Andrew intently as the sensation multiplied. “You’re right.” I stood. “It’s time I quit whining and lead.” “That’s not what I said—” I cut him off. “No, Andrew. You’re right—the power is already inside me, a part of me, I just have to access it. Open myself to it.” My breathing became ragged as the warmth rushed down my limbs. I latched onto Andrew as the pleasant sensation overwhelmed me. “Ella . . . ?” Andrew’s eyes grew incredibly large. Footsteps thudded through the sand behind me. “What’s going on?” asked Lucia, her voice panicked. Andrew glanced over my shoulder at her, then back to my face. “I— I don’t know.” “She’s . . . glowing,” Ehno said roughly. Glowing? I looked at my skin and, sure enough, it was as if a light shone from beneath my skin. It was amazing. I was powerful. Insanely strong. Full of bright light. A smile curled up my lips. I knew what this was; it was my Illuminating power. And though I’d used it before, and it was even easily accessed, for some reason I knew the true intensity of it had never been released. Until now. I greeted it like an old friend and wondered how I lived my whole life with this part of me being quiescent.

“Gabby! Gabby!” Lucia was saying, shaking me. Andrew stood a foot behind her, his eyebrows so taut that they almost touched. “Give her a minute. She’s okay.” My eyes snapped to Lucia’s and the light vanished like the flip of a switch. My smile didn’t falter. “Lucia.” I cocked my head to the side. “What the hell was that?” she snapped, distressed. “My power . . . truly awakening.” I twisted from her grasp, threw my hand out away from the Angels, and shot lightning from my finger. It slammed into the sand in a dizzying blaze of electric blue. The sand crystallized into beautiful glass. Without hesitation, my creation broke from the ground and floated toward me, the current a force around it. Now before me, I called to my power and immersed the glass in it, manipulating the matter until it cracked, crumbled, and turned back to sand. I stopped the current and the wind blew it away. “Gabby,” Lucia said in wonder. “How’d you . . . ?” I shrugged and my smile grew. “It was something Andrew said.” “Oh?” “Yes. It’s all here.” I pointed at my chest. “He’s right. As soon as he said it, I just told myself I could. Then a powerful warmth began to spread from my heart. I think it’s truly the first time I believed in my true self. I’m a leader.” I grinned at their stunned faces. “I feel great. Refreshed. Renewed somehow.” Andrew took a tentative step to me and pulled me gently from Lucia’s grasp, his eyes searching my face before a smile took him. “I knew it was inside you all along.” He tenderly held my chin in the palm of his hand and brought his lips to mine. Electricity coursed through my entire body with the one tiny, simple touch. He broke the kiss, and I jumped up to wrap my arms around his neck. He laughed, and his arms encircled me for a quick moment before I dropped back to the ground and faced my Angels. “Ready to find the Fallen?” I asked, jumping for the chance to do something productive while I felt so alive. “Absolutely,” Ehno said since Aiden and Lucia were still in a daze. My wings spread wide from my back and the wind caught them. As I moved them, the air caressed the feathers and I took flight, knowing the others would follow. I didn’t know where I was going, but a new confidence had grown in me, and I wasn’t about to let it go. Andrew quickly caught up with me as we flew through the dark Abyss, the water sparkling below us with the reflection of the moon. Flying was still so new to me, like a dream—unreal and weightless. Our wings must have held the power of a freight train to keep our un-birdlike bodies off the ground. Their magnificence kept me in a state of awe. Even though the air was crisp and bitter, it couldn’t take away from the sensations brought on by flying. Aiden, Lucia, and Ehno were enjoying themselves more than I was; this was their first time in the air and laughter constantly cut through the rush of wind. The sound was so glorious I promised myself I would do everything in my power to make sure they would laugh like that again and again. The water was an endless expanse below us; only random pits of sand rounding out of the choppy water dotted the Abyss. Ehno and Andrew were swooping up and down in a dramatic show, their wings exuding muscle and strength. Lucia giggled as Ehno tackled her in the sky and they nose-dived toward the water, Ehno pulling up only seconds before they could splash into it. She screamed the whole way down and laughed on the way back up. They were like teenagers who were falling in love for the first time, and I admired that after all these years they were still that madly in love. Most people don’t last through five years of marriage, let alone several thousand years with their kindred soul. It was beyond beautiful, and I would have envied them if it wasn’t for Andrew. I peeked over my shoulder to see an easy grin on Aiden’s face as he watched the lovebirds play in the sky. My heart ached for him, but was pleased to see his expression wasn’t forced. He truly was enjoying himself. When I

faced forward again, I flew into a thick wall of clouds and became nervous instantly. My sight was limited, though I kept a constant connection with Andrew. We all slowed to a more languid pace, afraid we might run into something since we couldn’t see more than a few feet before us. Who knew what the Abyss had in store for us? Soon the clouds thinned and we finally saw jagged land with strange turquoise plants curling through rocks and mossing over boulders. I flew straight for the top of a cliff edge that jutted out about a hundred feet over crashing waves. My bare feet hit the surface and I had to do a little run across sharp rocks to stop my momentum. The others followed behind me until we were all at the edge of the peninsula, taking in the spectacular view over the water. Behind us was a wasteland of rock, sand, and strange plant life I’d never seen before. The air was warmer here, probably due to the tiny sliver of orange light on the horizon. The Perpetual Inferno. “Let’s go,” I said and flew into the air, away from the water and deeper into the Abyss. We flew parallel to the bright orange slice on the horizon, afraid to get too close to the heat that radiated across the strange world. As time passed, we began to grow tired and our movements decreased. There was no longer a breeze to glide on like over the water, and it became increasingly hotter. The powerful boost I received earlier was helping to sustain me, while the others were gradually falling farther behind. Looking over my shoulder, they became smaller and smaller until I was about to call it quits for us to rest, no matter their encouragement to keep going. Then I smacked into something with the full force of my speed, and a current much different than electricity seized my body and caused my wings to retreat as I tumbled through the air. My whole body turned to pudding; my bones knocked loose and vision faltered as I gained momentum on my way down. My wings refused to obey and I tried my best to brace for impact. Though, really, how do you brace for impact? You’re going to hit the ground no matter what. I was still quite stunned over the invisible barrier’s sting; magic didn’t even occur to me as the ground rushed to my face. I was merely feet away when Andrew’s arms wrapped around my torso and yanked me roughly from my torpedoing path. It knocked the breath out of me, but better than the latter. He lowered us both to the ground gracefully and carefully let me go. My legs were jelly and I went down fast before Andrew caught me again and helped lower me to the ground. “What happened?” His voice was breathless and horrified. “Ow.” I groaned and held my neck where I absorbed most of the impact from . . . “I hit an invisible forcefield.” The others dropped from the sky and Aiden immediately went skidding on his knees to check me out. “Where are you hurt? Is your head okay? How many fingers am I holding up?” He held up two. “Seven,” I joked with another wince. Take my strength, offered Andrew silently as he knelt behind me and held all my weight. “I’m fine,” I lied. “Just a little dazed. Give me a minute.” I rubbed my eyes and leaned farther against Andrew who buzzed with anxiety. Take what I offer you, he begged silently. A slight nod was all it took before he was sending me the energy I needed to recover from whatever it was I ran into. “Better?” asked Aiden, his eyes darting between Andrew’s and mine. “Much,” I said as I let out a hefty breath. Aiden helped me to my feet while Andrew kept steady hands on my hips, ready to catch me. When Lucia noticed I was okay, she began to examine the barrier with probing hands. Blood-red electrical fingers crawled across empty air wherever she touched. “I’ve seen this before,” I said. “This was the same kind of barrier that kept Zola prisoner.” “How’d you get past it?” asked Ehno.

When I turned to him, it took everything in me to keep a straight face. His blonde hair was windswept in the craziest way, and there was no way I could take him seriously looking like that. At least Andrew’s, and even Aiden’s hair, looked styled. Ehno, on the other hand, just looked like he had way too much fun playing with light sockets. “What?” Ehno looked down at his clothes as if checking to make sure his zipper was zipped. He was already starting to think in modern ways. His red eyes shot up to mine questioningly with a single, raised eyebrow. “Fine.” I burst out in a half-chuckle. “It’s your hair.” His hands automatically went to his head as he felt around. “Sorry,” I said with a cough, attempting not to laugh. “It’s not really the time to joke, but you look like you’ve been playing with power lines.” Ehno cracked a smile and chuckled, which totally broke my resolve. Laughter from Andrew and Aiden followed suit. “Focus,” Lucia reminded us, her head turned away. “Focusing,” I said, knowing that if she truly looked at him she’d understand the humor. “How’d you get past it last time?” Lucia asked me, running her hands along the forcefield as the trail of electric red followed her touch like greedy vampires that just wanted one lick of blood. “I had a key and Zola showed me where to put it—and even the lock was hidden in a place I would’ve never found without her help. Sorry, but I don’t think we’re going to get through this barrier. And if it’s here it might be keeping something captive on the other side that we don’t want to come across.” For some strange reason I pictured dragons. You do have quite the imagination, Ella. I peeked over my shoulder at Andrew and stuck out my tongue; he smiled in return. “Do you think the Fallen put up the barrier, or are they just as stumped as we are?” Ehno asked as we followed behind Lucia, strolling parallel with the forcefield. “I think the real question is: why is it here in the first place?” I added. “True,” Andrew agreed as he sidled up to me. “This is Angelic magic, not something a Phantom could create. Either the Fallen are on the other side, or they’re protecting something.” “Or there are dragons!” I exclaimed with much feeling. Everyone stopped and stared at me with comical expressions. “Just wanted to interject a note of common sense.” There was some eye rolling and chuckling. In this drab place, I tried to keep the mood light and positive. We continued to walk for quite some time, Lucia’s hand trailing lightly along the forcefield. After a good ten minutes, we reached the top of a hill that gave us a spectacular view of this bizarre world. It was stunning, to say the least. The rocky, cracked earth ended at the bottom where water lazily swam downhill and into a lush forest. Except the plant-life here was different than on Earth. They weren’t green; they were rich turquoise and dark red, plastic-like. But what was even stranger was the fact I couldn’t see any bugs or animals of any kind. I’d never seen anything like it before and wished I could take things back to my lab to test and study. The lack of noise was eerie. We stood on the hill in awed silence for some time, until I broke it. “Crap.” I groaned. “What’s wrong?” asked Andrew, placing a hand at my lower back.

“This is really going to hurt,” I said with a wave of my hand toward the wild jungle. “Sweetheart, what’s the problem?” Aiden asked. Wrinkles collided on his forehead like tiny waves crashing on shore as his eyes scanned the area, looking for potential threats. Ehno ambled over to us with Lucia at his back. “Are we missing something?” Lucia asked. “Nah, it’s just I left my flip-flops on the island,” I grumbled and gestured to my bare feet. Blisters were forming on them just looking at the untamed land. “Okay, Miss Powerful. Don’t tell me you can’t fix this problem?” Lucia said with a grin and a shake of her head. “Oh, of course!” I snapped my fingers. “Why didn’t I think of that before!?” I tackled Lucia to the ground and went for her shoes. “Not funny!” she screeched as I pulled one boot free. I laughed as I stood and threw it to Andrew like he was a quarterback. He caught it and started running when Lucia got to her feet and began limping her way to him. “Give me back my shoe!” She was giggling too. It felt fantastic to let off some steam, and the dry, dark, creepy Abyss wasn’t stopping us from enjoying ourselves. Aiden shook his head with a tiny smile splayed there. Andrew shouted to Ehno, “Catch!” and tossed it over Lucia’s head just as she neared him. They threw it back and forth several times as Lucia humored them, then she expanded her slick black wings and jumped into the sky to catch her boot. The sudden show of her wings made reality slap back into place. As much as we needed the stress relief, it really wasn’t the time. Lucia dropped down and put it back on. Using my imagination, I conjured up some of my own boots. I was honestly surprised when it worked, and thanked Andrew for always infusing me with his positive energy and never giving up on me. He reached for my hand and sweetly kissed my palm. I was so totally in love with this man. Lacing my arm in his and Aiden’s, we continued our journey into the wild Abyss. 16 FLUSHED The moon had created enough of a glow to light our way here, but the depths of the wild maze of wilderness before us was too dense to let it filter through. I had a feeling our journey here was about to turn more . . . interesting. We flew over the small creek and landed on the other side. Lucia still trailed her hand lightly along the invisible barrier as we took our first steps into the red and turquoise trees. I attempted to adjust my vision so I could see through the darkness but failed. I shot Andrew a worried glance. “It’s not just you,” he reassured. “Things won’t always work the same here,” added Aiden as he provided us with light by shooting fire from his palms. I jumped back with a squeak at the sight because I wasn’t expecting it. The flames skidded across the ground without burning anything, and the flickering light turned everything into an eerie sight. There was one plant in particular: a dark, blood red color that grew low to the ground. I wanted to touch it. Curious, I reached out towards the huge leaves that looked like velvet; I had to know if they felt as soft. Andrew grabbed my hand when it was only inches from the plant and shook his head. “Let’s not be tempted to touch anything we don’t have to,” he said kindly. “Very true,” agreed Lucia. “Once I almost lost a finger to a huge flower in another dimension. It was so pretty, and I just had to touch it. Bad idea. It bit me!”

Ehno smiled widely. “It took three people to pull it off her.” “And some ground beef,” added Andrew cheerfully. “They’ll never let me live it down.” Lucia sighed dramatically as the men laughed. That was when the most random question popped from my mouth. “If you lose a limb does it . . . you know . . . grow back?” My cheeks warmed immediately, embarrassed. Aiden made a choking sound, and I whipped around as he covered his mouth. The edges of his mouth crinkled beyond his hand; he was grinning. My eyes found Andrew who had pressed his lips together to stop himself from following suit. I turned back to Ehno—he had no qualms openly laughing at me. “What?” I looked between my Angels as we continued to go deeper into the Abyss. “It’s not that outrageous of a question, really!” But even I couldn’t stop from grinning at their reactions. “Fine, chuckle it up.” “We will.” Ehno glanced at Andrew, and they burst into loud guffaws. “No, Gabby,” Lucia said, shaking her head at the men, “you won’t grow your limb back. Our bodies can repair quickly, but they can’t recreate whole body parts.” “Usually if an Angel loses a limb it’s accompanied by death.” Ehno’s words made everyone sober, smiles all gone. I wondered who they’d lost to give them all such grim expressions. “Thanks, Ehno, for that enlightening bit of information,” quipped Andrew with a shake of his head. Silence filled the air as we continued to trudge our way deeper, immersing ourselves in the unfathomable Abyss. My mind wandered, filled with images of very gruesome scenes. Possible outcomes if I didn’t find some way to help the Angels. All I could hope for was that seeking out the Fallen Angels wasn’t a waste of my time. I also hoped this invisible forcefield wasn’t keeping me from them. Our footsteps were abnormally quiet against the spongy ground. Aiden had to produce larger fires the farther we progressed. The plants grew thicker together above us and on the surface. There was no comparing this place to anywhere on Earth. Andrew’s thoughts were the only thing that truly kept me company as time passed. Everyone was concentrating on something. Lucia with her hand against the forcefield; Ehno walking a little bit ahead to scope out possible dangers and attempting to make a path; Aiden lighting our way with fire; Andrew’s thoughts completely focused on me. He saw things in me I couldn’t even begin to dream, and I hoped I could live up to the expectations. Between his imagination and glimpses of what Ehno had seen of the future, there were events in my future that scared the living bejeezus out of me. Andrew held me in a certain light, placed me on a pedestal, and, no matter the situation, he focused solely on the good deeds I’d do. What I would accomplish through the worst events imaginable. Sometimes it almost brought me to tears. Could I really be the person he perceived? Would I be able to save my Angels? A face flashed into Andrew’s mind that made me trip. It was one of the Empyrean Guards who had taken me to the Divine Library, his face vaguely familiar. Aiden’s arm shot out before I head-butted a tree, and I steadied myself. I twisted around and grabbed Andrew’s forearm. “What was that about?” “He’s one of the Empyrean Guard,” Andrew said as he took my hand in his. “I know he’s an Empyrean Guard—what about him?” My voice raised an octave in fear as I pulled us to a stop. “Ehno keeps seeing glimpses of him in the future, but isn’t quite sure what his role is yet.” There was a bit of unease in Andrew’s voice. “Ehno?” He was several paces ahead when Ehno’s back went rigid at my frightened tone. He turned, and his eyes found mine—a red glow in the dark—before he exchanged a glance with Andrew. “I don’t know how to explain it without worrying you.” Ehno looked back at me. “So I’d rather not say until I fully understand myself.”

I tried to read his expression but failed, so I turned to Andrew. He gave a tight shrug and began walking, my hand still in his. Ehno had already started to move forward again. I practically dug my heels into the ground. “Oh no! You two don’t get to keep secrets! You can’t say something like that and expect me to just bob my head in agreement!” I knew how to play the stubborn card well. Ehno turned, his mouth opening to say something before he was cut off. “She has a point.” Lucia quickly jumped to my rescue. “How do you expect Gabby to be our leader if you keep secrets from her?” She raised her eyebrows at Ehno who flushed a golden color. Do I flush silver now? Aiden stayed quiet. “You’re right,” agreed Ehno. “Sorry, I just . . . don’t understand what I’m seeing. I-I can’t believe . . . I just—” “I’m not going to think badly of you, so just tell me,” I said as calmly as I could manage. “Please. What I’m imagining is probably worse than what you’re hiding.” “I’m not worried what you’ll think about me. It’s you I’m concerned about,” replied Ehno, skirting around the subject. “Me?” My stomach felt like a rock had dropped in it. “What about this Empyrean Guard and me? Is he going to hurt me?” I paused as my blood ran cold. “Kill me?” I choked. “Or worse . . . hurt someone I love?” Andrew glared at the ground so murderously I thought the plants might wilt at his stare any second. I tried my best not to pry into his thoughts; I wanted them to tell me. I didn’t want to have to find out by being invasive. “No! No, no, no,” Ehno disagreed quickly. “Nothing like that.” I sighed in relief. “Then what?” “This particular Empyrean Guard seems to be with you a lot in the future.” Ehno was being evasive again. “Be with me? What aren’t you telling me?” My eyebrows came together in confusion. I was two seconds away from just pulling it from Andrew’s thoughts. “You two seem to be . . . friendly,” he said reluctantly. “Oh,” I breathed, relieved. “You must be seeing things wrong,” argued Andrew. “Gabriella would never fraternize with the enemy.” Andrew’s skin practically glowed with repressed rage. Ehno looked away. “Yeah, I’m sure you’re right. Of course. How absurd.” He let out a breath. “I’m sorry, of course Gabby would never . . . what was I thinking?” Andrew calmed some. “Great. Now that that’s settled, let’s keep going.” “Let’s,” I agreed. “I’m exhausted. We need to find a place to sleep for a few hours.” Though I wasn’t sure how I’d actually get any rest now that my mind was going a million miles an hour. Would I befriend an Empyrean Guard? What exactly did he mean by “friendly”? Surely he didn’t mean I would betray Andrew? Because I never would. The whole thing was absurd! There was a rustle to our left; we froze as if we’d turned to ice. No one asked the question we were all thinking: What was that? For a whole minute we stayed in our stationary positions, listening for the noise again so we could figure out what had created it. “Who’s there?” I called out in a hushed voice as Andrew pushed me behind him. A light chuckle and the snapping of foliage echoed from the darkness. Aiden sent flames in the direction the sound came from.

“Show yourself,” Ehno demanded, making me jump at his nearness. I hadn’t heard him approach. The first thing I saw was his steely grey eyes in the flickering fire, followed by the reflection of his silver cheekbones. It was Akhol, the one who helped release the Phantom from my body with Firen’s help. His eyebrows pointed sharply into a V, making him look angry even though a genuine smile began to crawl up his lips. “Relax Angels. I’m not here to harm you,” said Akhol, his voice as smooth as silk. “Then why?” I asked, trying to move around Andrew who refused to back down as my bodyguard. It was hard to feel leader-like when he acted like this. I frowned and let him know just as much through my thoughts. “Why?” Akhol walked through the fire without tensing and moved side-to-side in an attempt to see me. “Very good question, Illuminator. Perhaps I should discuss this with your Angels instead of you?” He laughed at his words. Andrew, I’ll be okay, I assured silently. Andrew moved to the side reluctantly and glared at Akhol. “What’s with the hostility?” Akhol asked cheerfully. “I’d never harm the Illuminator, or her guard.” He held out his hand to me; not to shake, but as if in offering. “I give myself to you fully, Darkness Illuminator. I’m here on my own accord, against the wishes of the others. They’re afraid of what the future holds.” Slowly, I held my hand out for him. Andrew tensed beside me. Akhol gently took my hand and brought it to his lips, bowing to me. I was speechless. Then he let go and went down on one knee. “Please accept my sword to protect you.” “I—of course, Akhol.” My words were merely a soft whisper. His grey eyes jumped up to catch mine and there were silver tears brimming in them. I inhaled sharply. Besides Andrew and me, he was the first I’d seen who had silver tears. Probably silver blood too. “Thank you.” I swallowed thickly as I tried to align my thoughts. “Akhol,” I began as I pulled his hand upward so he would stand, “why are they afraid of the future?” He towered over me as he blinked away the moisture in his eyes. “They want to believe in you, Illuminator, but they fear there is no hope. But most of all, they fear you will die.” “So what you’re trying to say,” jumped in Lucia, “is that they’re afraid the Illuminator will die so they won’t even try to help her or protect her?” Her voice climbed in anger. “That’s the most ridiculous thing I’ve ever heard!” “Lucia!” I whipped around and drug my finger across my neck to tell her to cut if off. “You misunderstand,” Akhol said quickly. “They’re afraid they will fail at keeping the Illuminator alive. It’s not that they don’t want to protect her, it’s that they worry it’ll be their fault if she dies. There have been whispers . . . ” he trailed off. “Whispers?” I prodded. Akhol’s eyes shifted as if he was suddenly uncomfortable with the topic. “This barrier has been put up to keep you from the Fallen, but I know a way to them.” “Take us!” I blurted. “Gabby, do you trust him?” Lucia. “Really, Ella. Please think this through.” Andrew. “Excuse me,” I said with a smile as I whipped around and pulled my Angels away from Akhol. “What is everyone’s problem?” I whispered.

“We don’t know this man,” said Andrew softly. “We’re just looking out for your well-being.” “I know, but Akhol helped rid me of the Phantom. If he was so against us, do you think he would’ve done that?” I looked at each of them. “He got down on his knee and pledged himself to me! What more do you want from the man?” “He’s not a man; he’s one of the Fallen,” argued Ehno. “They chose the wrong side.” Lucia nodded in agreement. “Dad?” Aiden shook his head. “I’m with Gabriella on this one. We aren’t getting anywhere by ourselves—Akhol can speed up the process.” Finally we agreed on something! “We can’t be paranoid about everyone. Let’s just see where he takes us. We’ll be okay,” I said. The others nodded. I turned around. “I apologize, Akhol. Please, take us to the Fallen. I have many questions.” “The only way past this barrier is through a cave. It’s almost a day’s journey to the other side,” Akhol explained. I internally groaned. I was exhausted. “We grow tired,” Andrew said, saving me. “We need rest soon.” Akhol glanced around nervously. “You shouldn’t stay here longer than necessary. We’ll rest in the cave.” <> I do not like caves. When I was younger and still living in Ohio, my family decided to take a fun family vacation weekend to visit a National Park close to us. They chose to go to Mammoth Cave National Park. A lot of scenic routes for hiking, several cave tours, and ticks ready to latch on, like the tiny vampires they are, for miles. After spending almost two days fighting off mosquitos, plucking ticks off me in all sorts of weird places, and trying to keep cool in the humid Kentucky heat, I was so thrilled to go inside the cave. We’d been to the largest entrance one afternoon after hiking up a hill for what felt like seven hours. Cold air blew out of the cave in the most refreshing free air conditioning ever. It crystalized my sweat in a matter of seconds. Inside the cave was where I wanted to be. There would be no heat, no sun beating down on my skin, and no more ticks or mosquitos. I was wrong. Though being inside the cave really was the complete opposite of being outside it, the grass was so not greener on the other side. Literally and figuratively. First we descended into the dark via a large flight of stairs, then a Park Ranger unlocked a huge metal door that was connected with steel bars which looked an awful lot like prison bars. So I had been just a tad nervous. No big deal. Millions of people had walked through this cave and come out alive and well. I should have figured it all out when another Park Ranger shut and locked the door to the cave behind us. Then there was nothing but darkness and murmurs of “Ouch, that’s my foot,” and “Are there bats in here?” and “I can’t see a thing.” The whole two and a half hour trip was terrifying—though you could probably blame part of it on Jenna, who found it hilarious to run ahead of the crowd, sneak off the path, and hide between and behind rocks, waiting for me to pass so she could jump out and scare me. Though Mammoth Cave was a huge cave, there were parts that were uncomfortably small. Dark, small, enclosed spaces freaked me out. They still do. I would forever be traumatized by the day I woke up in the morgue in a drawer. There was definitely a resemblance between the two. You can only imagine how the idea of sleeping in a cave made me feel. The images of my journey through Mammoth Cave played out over and over. A perfect movie for Andrew to watch and analyze so he could tease me relentlessly. I knew our situation here was important, and this whole place was dreadfully grim, so finding ways to laugh and make our journey less depressing were the only way to keep us from going insane. So I didn’t mind becoming the butt of everyone’s jokes. It was all okay, because as soon as we entered into the cave—the only spot where the barrier failed—all laughter choked off like a radio’s wires had been cut.

Apparently I had a reason to fear the cave. This was no Mammoth Cave. There was nothing mammoth about it, actually. The entrance was decent sized, but once we continued into it, and out of the jungle, the place became narrower, shorter, and louder. Water rushed through the only entrance to the rest of the cave. In my eyes, the water looked to be only a few inches deep; maybe a foot. Darkness can be deceiving, though. Akhol offered to go first— no one protested. “It’s not so funny now, huh?” I quipped. Then I actually started to laugh in a not-so-funny way. I was hysterical. Andrew wrapped an arm around me and pulled me in close. “There’s nothing to be scared of, right Akhol?” He said nothing as he stepped toward the rushing water that rolled around a big rock and was swallowed whole by impenetrable darkness. “Right?” Andrew repeated, his voice swallowed by the sound of rushing water. Akhol didn’t respond again. He tapped a foot above the water before he stepped in and disappeared beneath the surface in one fluid motion. I cried out and ran forward as Aiden threw balls of fire into the water, lighting up the depths with an orange glow, but they were quickly whisked away by the current. Andrew held me back from the water as he leaned over it, desperately searching for Akhol. Did he get washed away? Ehno pulled his shirt over his head as if he were going to dive in after him. “Are you kidding?” Lucia screeched. “What if something ate him?” Now she was just as hysterical as me. Akhol broke the surface in a splash of water. We all jumped back in surprise. Lucia even screamed. Akhol took a deep breath and swung his head back. His long hair arched through the air and splashed against the rock. He was smiling—smiling!—as he swam against the current. “Very refreshing!” he exclaimed with delight. “You scared me to death!” I shouted, shaking slightly. “My apologies, Illuminator. Now it’s your turn.” “Hell no!” The words left my mouth before I could censor them. “You’ve got to be kidding me.” The others weren’t exactly cheering over the idea either. “Afraid not,” said Akhol calmly. “This is the only way to make it to the other side of the cave. We must follow the current of water through the cave and out the other side.” “Couldn’t we conjure a boat or something?” I agreed on the cave part so we could go to the Fallen Angels. Now I was thinking we didn’t need to know about the past that badly, did we? “A boat would sink under water,” said Akhol. “But what if we—” Lucia cut herself off, her eyes wide. Akhol’s words finally settled in. “Under water?” I gulped. “Yes,” answered Akhol as he continued to swim with ease against the current. Now he was on his back like this was a relaxing vacation. “There are a few passages that are only passable under water. They aren’t long, and there are only a few places like that. Just on the other side of this first underwater passage is a place we can rest.” “No way.” I crossed my arms and felt like a baby who needed to be coddled. But really! This was so unbelievably dangerous, and of all the things to kill us—a cave? Andrew led me away from Akhol. “We can turn back if you want,” he whispered, and placed his forehead on mine. “But you and I both know the Illuminator would never back down from an opportunity to help her Angels . . . to help me.”

I placed my hand over his thumping heart. He was right; I’d die for them, so this should be easy. “Well . . . when you put it that way . . .” Andrew smiled and kissed me gently. This is no picnic for me either. I think Akhol is the only one who’ll enjoy this, I added, my nerves unwinding. I was lucky in school because no one ever gave me a swirly. And now I knew the reason why. It was as if the world knew one day I would be in this situation. The water was surprisingly warm considering caves usually hosted chilly temperatures, and just as cold water. The rushing current grabbed me like steel fists and yanked me away from Aiden and Andrew, the last two remaining. Akhol had explained that once around the rock, lie flat and take a deep breath because we would be sent through a smooth tunnel of rocks. He promised we wouldn’t run out of oxygen, and there was nothing in the tunnel that could catch onto our clothes. He also explained, mainly to me: No, nothing would bite, nibble, or eat us in or out of the water. That was how I found myself flailing in the water, rounding the giant rock, and into utter darkness. I held my nose just as I felt myself being sucked under. I twirled, spun, twisted, and went around and around in circles until I flew out and dropped a few feet in midair to smash into more water. Calmer water. I had just been flushed. Akhol began to light the cave with a bluish glow of magic, while Ehno and Lucia helped me out of the water. Aiden splashed into the water next, with Andrew quickly following. The air against my soaked skin and clothes was like frost. I began to shake uncontrollably as I sat on the flattest rock I could find. There was one area that had obviously been cleared where we could sleep. Aiden used his gift of fire to start a hot one a few feet from me. Andrew perched next to me and held me close to his body, rubbing up and down on my arm. He was just as chilled as me, shaking like a leaf. We all gathered around the fire, silently warming ourselves. The quietness was eerie, and every little sound echoed off the water. “Akhol?” My voice sounded magnified. “Yes, Illuminator.” “Will you tell us about how you ended up in the Abyss?” “Of course, Illuminator. It started with a girl. . . .” 17 DISMISSAL Akhol’s retelling of the Angels’ history was similar to Zola’s version. One of the Gods fell in love with a girl he couldn’t have and went on a rampage through time and space, leaving a trail of war and destruction in his path, along with a gigantic, gaping hole through the dimensions. It was later patched together with magic to become a doorway for easy travel for the armies on each side. Life on Earth was peaceful until that happened. Earth became a battlefield for all the unearthly. The Angels’ loyalties were split, never truly understanding either side of the war, but having this innate, and engrained, determination to protect the humans who were caught in the crossfires. I leaned against Andrew while Akhol’s soothing voice and Aiden’s toasty fire lulled me to sleep. This time when I dreamed it was my own and not Abelie’s or Zola’s memories. I stood in the wild jungle of the Abyss, darkness pressing in on me from all sides. Instead of coolness, sweat rolled down my back in a torrent, soaking my shirt. Voices whispered and echoed around me, and I twisted and turned to find the source. A finger slid across my neck and through my sweat. I jumped and jerked around, my heart slamming against my chest. No one was there. Someone giggled behind me and I turned again. Nothing. Akhol’s words whispered across my mind: “You shouldn’t stay here longer than necessary.” An arm snaked around my waist, and I jolted awake with a scream on the tip of my tongue. Andrew’s face was inches from mine, his eyes molten gold. His arm was around my waist, and the other was beneath my head as a makeshift pillow.

“What’s frightened you?” he breathed. Someone was snoring softly behind me. “It was just a nightmare, not the Sight,” I assured. His eyes studied my face for a moment before he closed them. I snuggled closer to his warmth as his arm tightened around me. “Andrew?” One eye opened. “I said ‘Andrew,’ not ‘Cyclopes,’ ” I teased. He closed the one eye and smiled. “Better?” “You tell me.” His eyes opened and he gazed into mine. “Yes, better with both eyes open.” We were silent for several seconds. “When the line between good and evil is so blurry, how do you know you’re picking the right side?” I asked. His eyebrows rose. “I mean,” I said quickly, “we’re in the Abyss, of all places. I was just going to find a way to free myself from the Phantom and go back home, but now I’m actively searching for the Fallen Angels.” “I pick your side.” It came out all matter-of-fact. “But what if I—” He placed a single finger to my lips. “You seek the truth, Ella.” His hand brushed my wavy hair away from my face. “There are rarely those who lead with truth, not only in their words, but in their heart and soul. The line is clear to me, and we’re on the right side.” I nodded, though emotions I didn’t know how to deal with or categorize jumped up to my throat and lodged there, like unshed tears. “What is it?” “More are going to die, Andrew.” My voice became choked, and a few tears leaked out. “I don’t even know how to process the thought, let alone actually placing people in danger to fight a war they’re not responsible for.” He heaved a great breath before the pad of his thumb brushed my tears away. “It’s true that more will die.” Sadness ached deep within Andrew, and I knew he’d lost a few friends while trying to protect the human race. A few I knew he felt guilty for, which made a part of me want to erase the staining memories. “But we’d follow you into battle with or without your command. Dying for you would be honorable.” I knew the plural of “we” consisted of all the Halos and Guardians. “You have too much faith in me.” “Or maybe you don’t have enough faith in yourself,” he whispered. Was he right? How was I supposed to protect and lead the Angels if I didn’t even believe in myself? Andrew lifted my chin up with a single finger and pressed his lips to mine so, so softly. Our lips parted ways, his breath filling the space between us as he whispered, “To have reservations is to show true leadership. To have certainty without question, to lead people to battle with no qualms, or to prosecute without hesitation are qualities of a tyrant.”

His words rang strong and true. This man amazed me, and I couldn’t hold back the emotions he made me feel. Our mouths met again for a brief moment before he wrapped his arms around me tightly. I rested my head under his chin and closed my eyes. “I’m so lucky to have you.” He squeezed me as his thoughts jumped between us in an arch of electricity. I’m the lucky one. <> “Akhol? What’s in the forest you’re so afraid of?” I asked as we trudged through more water in the cave. We’d been walking for hours it seemed, and my nightmare last night plagued my thoughts. “Why?” His voice was hesitant, and his shoulders stiffened. “It’s just that we didn’t see anything while out there, but you were nervous about us spending more time there.” He didn’t turn around to answer, so I couldn’t read the expressions in his face when he said, “Just because you didn’t see them, doesn’t mean they didn’t see you.” Silence. I was about to ask who he was talking about when I lost my balance, gripped a rock jutting from the wall, and cut my palm. Andrew had grabbed my waist to stop my fall, but I had already steadied myself. As I inspected my palm for damage, I saw it slowly begin to heal. I turned back to Andrew, but he was frowning at Akhol’s back. “Well that’s rather ominous,” said Lucia with a snort of amusement when no one spoke. “Are you just going to be cryptic, or are you going to tell us?” Akhol wouldn’t be able to get away with being evasive. He sighed so loudly we could hear it over the splashing of water. “Demons live in the jungle. They’re ruthless savages.” “They don’t live in the cave, do they?” A shiver darted up my spine. Akhol chuckled. “Of course not. They thrive in the light, but prefer the cover of the trees. Easier to hide and capture prey.” I looked back questioningly to Andrew and mouthed, “Light?” He grinned. Akhol hasn’t seen the sun in five thousand years. The moon is all the light they have. I was suddenly grateful for Akhol bringing us to the cave. Though I was still uncomfortable crawling, slipping on mud, and swimming through tunnels of water, it helped to have my Angels close by. Now it helped to know there were actual Demons outside the cave and we were safe inside. “What about on the other side of the cave?” I asked Akhol. “They rarely leave the shelter of the trees, and there aren’t enough trees where we reside,” he explained. Relief flooded me as we continued to splash through more water. After hours of spelunking, we finally reached a giant pool of water that glowed a greenish color. “Ah, see that glow?” Akhol said. “This is where we exit.” My sharp intake of breath made Andrew grab my hand in comfort. “Will this be like before?” I asked. “No.”

My shoulders relaxed. “Here the water is deeper and the distance much farther,” Akhol went on, and anxiety filled me once again. “I’m warning you now of its dangers. Do as I say and—” his eyes landed on me “—don’t panic and you’ll be fine.” Don’t panic? Was he joking? I studied his stark features in the small amount of light provided and knew he wasn’t. I swallowed convulsively, waiting for his instructions. He explained where we were supposed to swim and the quickest route, then dove in first. My breathing felt labored as Ehno followed behind, and all I could do was wish Joseph was here. He went to college on a swimming scholarship, so if anything were to happen, he would be the one I’d want on the sidelines to rescue me. And I wasn’t ashamed to admit that, either. Drowning was in the top five ways I hoped to never die. It wasn’t until I waded in the water that dread truly dug its claws in. My heart beat so fiercely it hurt, and my skin was clammy with sweat. The water before me rippled as Lucia disappeared beneath it. There was a continuous encouraging chant in my head. If Lucia could do it, so could I. Right? I inhaled deeply, filling my lungs to their fullest capacity, right before I dove underwater. I opened my eyes to see the broad opening that would lead me to oxygen and outside the cave. My arms made wide, fluid arcs through the water to propel me forward as quickly as possible. I reached the opening and began to push my way through it, my fingers slipping on the smooth rocks. Without warning, something slammed into my side and threw me against the rocks. All the air in my lungs bubbled out of me as I looked around in utter terror at the last of my oxygen floating away. What the hell hit me? Then I saw it—a shadow of movement flashed through the water. Ella! Andrew thought in alarm. Hurry, swim! He dove into the water behind me and shot through it like a missile seeking a submarine. Air was quickly becoming an issue as I struggled to regain my composure. All I could think about was Andrew behind me, possibly coming across whatever was in the water and being attacked. But at the same time, I’d lost my oxygen reserve when I was knocked into the rocks and getting to the surface started to become my main priority. My arms worked at a furious pace for more momentum. Then I was knocked off course again; this time my head smacked painfully against a rock. The water around me was suddenly tinted with my silver blood. I was desperate for air, but my vision started to falter and my motor skills were sluggish. Stars sparkled in my vision as I saw Andrew struggle with a strange looking creature. It was too dark to see details, but its outline looked like a fishlike human. Bubbles exploded around their underwater scuffle. I blinked slowly twice at the fight as I floated upward, stopping when I bumped the top of the underwater tunnel. My lungs ached with emptiness. Right before I lost consciousness, my lungs lost the battle and sucked in water, desperately searching for air but coming up very short. I woke up coughing water. It burned as it left my lungs and made my insides feel raw. This was becoming a bad habit, though I was grateful it wasn’t nearly as bad as salt water coming back up. Greedily, my lungs sucked in air like a Hoover vacuum on crack. Then I remembered what happened and sat up abruptly. Andrew’s thoughts reassured me he was okay right before my eyes landed on his disheveled state. His black hair was plastered to his forehead, and his lip was cut and bleeding. I reached out to touch his face with gentle fingers. He winced and caught my hand with a look of pain crinkling the skin around his eyes. “What was that?” I croaked. Akhol sidestepped into my view and towered over us. “It was a Demon.” “But you said—” “I know what I said,” Akhol cut in sharply, rubbing his eyes. “There was something wrong with it. Like the Demon had adapted to the darkness and water.” I shivered. “Did he have a ring that he called ‘my precious’?” I joked to try and lighten the mood. I didn’t get a good look at the Demon, but my mind had no problems picturing Gollum. They stared at me blankly. “Never mind. What happened to it?” My eyes jumped back to Andrew.

“I wouldn’t worry about it,” said Lucia from behind me, making me jump. “Aiden and Ehno heard Andrew’s distress call and jumped in to help. Aiden brought you to the surface and Ehno . . . Well, let’s just say the Demon’s dead.” I sighed in relief at her words and started to rise, but dizziness made me sway. Lucia caught me from behind and helped me stand. “Careful. You hit your head pretty hard. It’s not done healing.” Andrew rose and wrapped a steady arm around my waist, relieving Lucia. “Thanks,” I said, my throat still scratchy. “I wish the Fallen would just come to us for a change.” Ironically, Fallen Angels dropped from the sky and surrounded us. “I wish I had a chocolate cake!” I exclaimed, staring up. No cake appeared, though I did get a few wry glances. Andrew’s body shook with silent laughter while Lucia gave me raised eyebrows. “What? It worked for the Fallen Angels.” The Fallen Angel who’d touched my cheek earlier on the island strode forward. “I am Egnatious,” he introduced. His storm grey eyes flickered to Akhol and I saw just the slightest downward twitch of his lips. He was trying to hide his anger, though a tic in his jaw started up. “Egnatious,” I greeted and took a step forward out of Andrew’s grip. “I’m Gabriella.” He looked at me again and there was just the tiny bit of softening in his face. “I know who you are, Illuminator. I know how you passed our barriers, but I’m curious as to why you’re here.” He shot another agitated glance at Akhol. “I need to know what happened during the Covetous war. Why did the Angels divide their ranks?” To the point, I decided. We needed to get back to Earth as soon as possible. “Please, sit.” Egnatious gestured behind me, and mounds of rocklike chairs appeared around us. “We have much to discuss.” “Yes, we do.” I sat and waited. He rubbed his hairless chin, his eyes looking away in deep thought. “When the war between the dimensions was brought to us on Earth, our leader, Marcella, didn’t want to become involved. But, alas, it was inevitable. Humans were dying, and cities burned. The Gods demanded we pick a side, even though the war was not about us. We were just living on the land in the middle.” Egnatious sighed sorrowfully. “Marcella was so afraid to lead us into battle on either side of the war, and the Ladies of Light were divided. She decided to give us a choice, and with lies, false stories, and misinformation, we also became divided. It wasn’t until later we found out the real story.” His voice became quiet. “Not until we were banished to the Abyss.” “But you were given another chance to go back to Earth! Why didn’t you take it?” I asked. “Most of us did.” I waited for him to elaborate as to why they hadn’t returned too. When he didn’t, I pushed. “Egnatious, the Empyrean Guard have come back to Earth, but this time to wipe the planet clean of Angels.” He frowned, and the briefest flash of anger crossed his face. “I need to know why you didn’t return,” I declared. “We’re about to go to war with them, and I want to make the right decisions for my Angels. And for the humans.” Egnatious made a tent with his fingers and leaned forward. “The Gods like to play games. When they get bored, they find ways to entertain themselves. They never do anything out of the goodness of their hearts. The Abyss is not the ideal place to live, but we are at peace here. Even the Demons stay far away from us.” He took a deep

breath. “Dragani, or as the Gods like to call him, Devil, was one of the only Gods with actual heart. He was very passionate.” I was startled by the name Dragani, instead of Lucifer. Though at this point I really shouldn’t be surprised. “Why do you say that?” “The worlds the Gods made were always out of greed. The Ethereal Eternity was created so they could put their children, the Guardian Spirits, in a place the Gods wouldn’t have to see them. The Timeless Oblivion was made for the Angels who joined their side during the Covetous war, but really it was made as a gateway for the dead, leaving the Angels to be in charge of ensuring everyone went to the right dimension after death. The Guardian Spirits are the only good thing the Gods ever created, and even they have a mean streak to them. “Dragani, on the other hand, created the Abyss as a home for their outcast children, for his Phantom army, and for those of us who fought on his side and lost. Both sides have their flaws, Illuminator. What you need to take into consideration is what will be best for those you care for.” I glanced next to me at Andrew who stared at Egnatious with a curious gleam in his eyes, then I turned back to Egnatious. “That doesn’t explain why you stayed here.” “The Gods didn’t allow the Fallen Angels to come back to Earth because they cared; they wanted us back there to control us.” Egnatious stood suddenly, his voice full of suppressed anger. “By going back to Earth and living out a human life, they had control over our deaths—where to send us after we died. Most of the Fallen wanted the redemption, and felt the only way was to go back to Earth.” “So you stayed here,” I stated. Egnatious stepped forward. “But now they’ve lost their control on the Angels. They’ve become immortal once again and therefore regained their control of their own lives. This is why they sent their army to destroy you! The game isn’t fun anymore, and you’ve only become a nuisance. So they want to kill the Angels, send them to the Ethereal Eternity, and control them once again.” I rose, my blood boiling in anger the more he spoke. “Then help us fight them!” It was out of my mouth before I could stop it. I saw his conviction, his raw contempt over the Gods, could literally feel waves of animosity roll off him, and I latched on to it. Egnatious froze, while everyone on both sides seemed to take in a collective breath of surprise. “I won’t lie. Internal issues between the Angels have become a serious setback,” I said quickly. “Now we have the Empyrean Guard picking off my Angels one at a time. They chose to come when we were at our weakest, and I’m struggling to keep us all banded together.” Egnatious paced and rubbed his temples. I took a step forward. “This is a lot to ask, but you all would be valuable asset to our cause. You know more about the politics of this world than I do. More than the other Angels, too.” My voice had become a desperate plea all of a sudden, and my face burned. This wasn’t the plan, but who better to have on our side? “You aren’t seriously considering this, are you?” asked Firen with disgust. “Sir, we’ve kept ourselves away from Earth for this very reason! Now these Angels come here and ask favors of us and give us nothing in return. I bet they were sent by the Gods!” Egnatious’s hand flew up to cut her words off. “These aren’t just any Angels, my dear Firen. This is the Illuminator and her protectors.” “Help us.” My heartbeat quickened, hopeful. “Don’t let them win again.” Phantoms swirled around us in a great fog before solidifying. Xavier appeared next to me with a sly grin on his

insubstantial face. “The answer is no,” Xavier said firmly. I gritted my teeth. “It’s not your decision!” “Actually,” said Egnatious, “it is.” “What?” I exclaimed, upset. “No one can break us free,” he continued with a scowl. “Dragani has given the Phantoms the power here; not even the Gods are strong enough to break through Abyss’s door.” Lucia is, added Andrew mentally. “Ah, so very true,” agreed Xavier. “Though you might be able to convince me to change my mind, Illuminator.” Before I let my excitement get the best of me, I turned back to Egnatious. “Would you fight with us if you could leave?” All eyes were on him. He didn’t answer for a whole minute. And when he did, my stomach dropped. “I’m afraid not, Illuminator. This isn’t our battle.” The only thing that saved me from arguing and pleading like a pitiful puppy was how he sounded truly sorry for his response. “Coward!” Aiden yelled out. “You are so self absorbed, and cower behind the Phantoms refusal, even though we all know that Lucia has the power to open a portal to Earth!” Lucia’s eyes grew wide. “We fought once before and lost! You are asking us to give up everything,” argued Egnatious. “We’ll help,” jumped in Xavier eagerly. Egnatious froze, and so did I. Taken aback, I laughed. Xavier’s eyebrows came together and his head moved back in disbelief over my outburst. “Oh.” I surveyed my Angels’ reactions. They hid their emotions behind blank masks. I looked back at Xavier. “You’re serious?” “Yes.” He nodded sincerely. “But there’s something we need from you first.” 18 LEFT BEHIND No.” I shook my head. “No way.” My refusal truly stunned Xavier, his eyes widening before narrowing. “No?” The way he said it made me want to backtrack. He might as well have said “Pick a different answer.” I peered sideways at Andrew who was reading my thoughts and emotions. He gave a slight nod. “Xavier, I’m not sure I can trust you. You forget how one of your kind tortured and killed humans and Angels for thousands of years.” “As long as we have the link to the Abyss, we won’t have to possess anyone to fight with you.” He didn’t argue about the killing and torture.

My eyes shot to Egnatious, with Firen and Akhol flanking him, to gage their reactions to Xavier’s request. They knew the Phantoms, even fought with them. If anyone knew them, they did. Akhol’s eyebrows were drawn together, and his eyes showed how upset he was over the Fallen’s refusal to help. Firen’s arms were folded as if she were distancing herself from the negotiations, though the slight tilt of her lips let me know she was pleased. Egnatious was harder to read, though I saw the tic in his jaw was back, his glare was focused on Aiden. All of their emotions were focused on everything but the Phantoms. That might mean they didn’t distrust the Phantoms enough to care about them helping with the war. “I need time to consider your offer,” I said, focusing on Xavier again. “You’re asking me to place a lot of trust in you.” “Take all the time you need,” he replied pleasantly. “If you won’t join us here, we’ll join you on Earth. All we want is to end this war once and for all. But I must warn you that time here does not parallel Earth’s, and you won’t have long before your absence becomes a problem.” I could find no deception in his face. “Then I need to go back,” I said firmly. “When I’ve made a decision I’ll come back.” “You either stay here, or you take us with you.” “So I have no choice?” My voice shook with rage. “How about a trade?” suggested Aiden hastily. “What?” I hissed at him, my eyes conveying him to be quiet. “You can keep me, like before,” Aiden continued, ignoring me completely. “That way you know she’ll return.” “No!” I cried. “No way! No Trade!” “Hmm,” Xavier pondered. “Not good enough. One of us must go with you, too.” “Deal,” said Aiden, his shoulders visibly relaxing. “No deal!” I shouted in disbelief. I couldn’t believe that this was the direction the conversation had gone so hastily. “None of my Angels will willingly be possessed. Hell. No.” “As we discussed earlier, if you only do as I asked of you, there will be no possessing necessary. Like before.” I ignored him. “Dad—don’t do this to me. I already lost Mom.” “Then come back for me,” Aiden rationalized simply. “And if you don’t, I’ll understand.” There was something in his green eyes that reached out and gripped my heart. “I’ve made my decision,” I said through gritted teeth, turning to Xavier. “Thank you for your offer, but I don’t need you or your Phantoms to win this war.” Xavier’s eyes narrowed as he floated closer to me. “Without us you will risk losing this war. Do you want that on your conscious?” “We’ll manage.” “This was why we were made: to fight against the Empyrean Guard.” Xavier’s wavering face turned smug. “This isn’t the Covetous war,” Egnatious cut in. “Is it not?” Xavier’s figure shifted in the air as he moved closer to the Fallen. “None of this would be happening if it wasn’t for the Covetous war. These are all the results of the worlds fighting for power and domination.” His voice grew grave. “I was created to fight, as were the Empyrean Guard. What chance do the Angels have if we don’t step in and do what we were created to do? Maybe it’s time that Dragani and his army rise up again!”

Egnatious began to argue vehemently, spittle spraying the air Xavier occupied. Their voices turned to snarls and growls, though I could tell they really weren’t mad at each other, they were just upset over the situation they were both in. “Enough!” I shouted, and silence followed. I tried to calm my breathing as I thought about the Angels fighting and dying, wondering where their leaders were. “I don’t have time for this!” I pointed at Egnatious. “You want to live peacefully.” I shifted and pointed at Xavier. “And you want to finally put an end to the stalemate.” I gestured to my Angels and myself. “But we want to save lives—Angels and humans. So while you two argue about the name of the war, or who’s right or wrong, I need to return to Earth and actually fight.” Xavier’s face flickered as a gust of wind blew across the sandy Abyss, though I could clearly see his eyebrows rise in disbelief. Egnatious looked down, guilty and ashamed. “Lucia!” Our eyes met. “Make the portal.” I was tired of the politics, and refused to wait any longer. If time moved faster on Earth, who knew how much of it I’d wasted here. I was furious at myself. Chaos erupted as Phantoms swirled around us, tiny tornados preventing us from doing anything but protecting our eyes from the debris swirling in the air. When the dust settled, Lucia’s wrists were bound behind her back. Ehno raced to her and tried to tug her free. He attempted magic, brute strength, and then the dagger at his back. Nothing worked. “Her magic is shackled, just as her wrists are,” said Xavier. “Let her go free.” My voice came out as a low growl, startling everyone around me. “I can’t do that.” I took a step forward, my electricity buzzing excitedly through my body, eager for a target. “You”—I stabbed my finger in Xavier’s direction—“are going to regret this.” I took another step forward. “For a few moments you had me fooled, you know that? I was going to seriously consider your offer, but now you’ve shown me who you really are. You will allow us leave.” My voice was even, but the threat was clear as glass. Xavier’s chummy exterior melted away, and his cold and calculating stare was back. The one I saw when we first met. “Only if you take us with you. We want to fight.” “All you want is blood. You don’t care a thing about my Angels. You see me as your redemption, and I’m not.” I had moved so close to him I could see details on his face. He had bushy eyebrows, and a crooked nose. Through him I could see Egnatious’s fearful expression. “Let Lucia go. Now.” “I can’t do that.” His eyes were dead, and he showed no expression. “She’s glowing,” I heard someone whisper. “I’ll give you three seconds,” I said. “One.” “You don’t scare me.” “Two.” Electricity began to spark at my fingertips, and several of the Fallen backed away. “Three.” Xavier smiled. My breathing became erratic, power coursed through me, and I lifted my head to the moon-filled sky. Wind whipped around me as sand on the ground crawled forward and made a twister around Xavier and me. His eyes widened, finally showing fear. Memories of Lucia dying a human death rushed my mind, and an idea came to me. Lightning lanced down and struck Xavier. He screamed as the current wrapped around his body and made him almost real. Almost touchable. “Let her free,” I demanded. “Or this will get a lot worse.”

“You can’t keep this up forever!” he argued through gritted teeth. “I won’t need to.” I flung my power out around me, and the storm grew wider. Other Phantoms tried to flee but were sucked into the air. Xavier convulsed on the ground as more and more electricity attacked him. His form suddenly became physical, and my electricity dissipated. It was so simple—I just willed him to have a physical form. My power didn’t even dissipate. He jerked around as he took in his body, patting himself. “What have you done?” he shouted. “Made you real. Made you human.” “What?” His mouth dropped open, aghast. “Human?” I nodded, the storm raging around us. Aiden came forward and loomed over Xavier. He held a dagger in his hand and dropped to one knee, placing the blade at his throat. “Let Lucia go. This will be the last opportunity you have,” said Aiden, a scary calm in his voice. Xavier started to laugh. “If you kill me, who will purge the spell?” “There are fates worse than death.” Aiden removed the dagger and slammed his fist across Xavier’s face. Blood flew into the air and coated his teeth. I was so desperate to get out of the Abyss, I almost didn’t realize how appalling our situation had become until I heard my father’s words and the crack against Xavier’s cheek. “Dad, don’t.” Aiden glanced up at me, his eyes hard emeralds. They softened when he focused on me, and his grip on Xavier loosened. Xavier fell to the ground, relieved. “This is my responsibility,” I said. Both their heads jerked up to mine in surprise. I snatched the dagger from Aiden and threw it at Xavier. It embedded in his foot, nailing it to the ground. He screamed out. “Do you know what it’s like to be forced to do something against your will?” My eyebrows rose in question as I pulled the dagger free. He screamed again. Aiden stared at me in shock, but I was tired of people walking all over me. Of being the victim. Not anymore. Never, ever again would I let anyone hold me against my will. “Now that you’re human, you can feel physical pain.” I leaned down. “You see that on the horizon? The Perpetual Inferno. I’m sure you’ve heard stories of what it’s like there.” His eyes widened. I had no idea myself, but it was clear by the fear on Xavier’s face that it wasn’t pleasant. “You wouldn’t.” I gave him a wry smile. “Just like you wouldn’t prevent us from going back to Earth.” “Right!” he exclaimed, scooting away while holding his foot. “She’s free!” shouted Ehno over the wind. Lucia immediately began to form her portal as I kept the Phantoms at bay. The portal began to form, the rippling, watery-like substance the most inviting thing I’ve seen in a long time. “Firen,” Egnatious called out through the storm. She flew down from the sky gracefully, her expression utterly bored. “You rang?” “You’re going back with them—”

“Not a chance in the Perpetual Inferno!” Firen’s expression changed from disgust to horror, effectively cutting him off midsentence. Egnatious didn’t let this affect him. “You’ll go back with them and assess the situation, then you’ll return,” he commanded. Hope flared in me. Was he planning on helping us after all? “There’s only one of me!” Firen argued. “This will be your only chance to go back to Earth.” “I don’t want to go back to Earth,” she snapped back. “You think I’ve come to this decision lightly, Firen?” Egnatious’s face grew grave. “Of course not,” she snarled. “But how the hell am I supposed find a way back?” “I’m sure Lucia will send you back,” I said, although I did wonder why he wanted Firen to go instead of Akhol, who clearly wanted to fight with us. “And if she doesn’t?” Firen’s fists were clenched at her sides. Egnatious and Lucia exchanged glances, and then Lucia nodded in my direction. “We’ll make sure you’re brought back here safely,” I assured. Firen’s grey eyes narrowed, but she gave a sharp nod. Ehno was the first to go through the portal, followed by Aiden—much to my relief. Egnatious stepped toward Firen. “I expect to see you soon.” The corner of her lips lifted and she growled. Egnatious brushed it off and flew into the sky, his black wings melting into the darkness. Now that my anger was fading, my power was too. I didn’t know how much longer I could hold on to this storm. Andrew knew my energy was fading and he started to rush through the storm to get to me. My body trembled with the effort to keep it up. I saw Firen step through the portal just as I collapsed under the weight of my own power. Andrew was there before I hit the ground. He scooped me up and flew like a bullet toward the portal. Andrew dropped down next to Abraham Lincoln’s feet, keeping me in his arms. I didn’t complain; I was too exhausted to stand on my own. The sky was between night and day in Washington D.C. My breath made a cloud before my eyes, and tiny crystals of dew covered Lincoln’s monument. It was too cold to be November, our stilldamp clothes chilling us to the bone. I wondered how much time had passed while we were in the Abyss. Did I miss Thanksgiving? Christmas? Was it a new year? “Either humans have grown larger or my memory has faded,” said Firen seriously as she took in the monster that was Abraham Lincoln. All the tension broke as we laughed. 19 BRANDED SYMBOL Lo and behold, there was Joseph’s house with its plum-colored brick and dark brown shudders. A part of me almost wanted to call this my sanctuary . . . or prison, depending on how you looked at it. I remembered wandering the house for days before my trip to Italy, anxious and stressed. I remembered trying to lure the FBI agents out of their hiding places. Smiling, I wondered if there was still pizza left over from those twenty pies I bought. And I remembered running across the lawn and stealing Agent Croft’s car with Jenna in tow.

Several of Joseph’s windows glowed in the twilight. I approached the front door with my Angels behind me and knocked. There was a squeal and a shout, followed by the knob twisting. It finally creaked open. The most beautiful girl on the planet greeted us with blonde curls, big green eyes, and a huge smile. She was a little over three feet tall. “Jules,” I said softly. Her smile faded until her mouth hung open. “Auntie Gab-ella?” “It’s me.” I smiled reassuringly. “Jules, sweetie? Don’t answer the door!” Jenna shouted from the kitchen. I nodded slowly as I lowered myself to Jules’s height. “Where’s my hug?” I asked, spreading my arms wide. It only took her a few seconds before she jumped forward and wrapped her tiny arms around my neck. She planted a big, fat kiss on my cheek. She giggled as I stood with her in my arms and walked into the house. I went toward the kitchen while my Angels went the other direction. Jenna almost ran into me as she came around the corner with an apron tied around her waist and a spatula in hand. “Gabby!” Jenna looked between Jules and me with a raised brow. “Is everything all right?” she mouthed, her spatula waving between Jules and me. Well . . . I was supposed to be dead, after all. Before I could answer, Jules began talking a million miles a minute. First it was about her pony that I had to see, and then it was about some cartoon character who spoke Spanish that she loved. I sat Jules on a stool in the kitchen where she’d been coloring. Jenna and I hugged intensely, relief flooding into me. “I was so worried, but Patrick reassured me you were fine,” said Jenna, wiping tomato sauce off her cheek. “I’m just relieved you didn’t have any issues.” We hugged again, and Jenna whispered, “We’ll talk about this more later.” When she stepped back, she inclined her head toward Jules, and I nodded. Jenna turned back to the stove and continued cooking. “I’m making spaghetti tonight, sound good?” “Anything’s fine. I’m starving.” “Aunt Gabby,” Jules interrupted, startling me by using my nickname. I bet I knew who the culprit was who taught her that name. Ahem, Joseph. “Are you an Angel now?” Jenna whipped around, tomato sauce flying in an arc across the kitchen, her eyes wide. I pressed my lips together to prevent myself from laughing before I turned back to Jules. “Yes sweetie, I’m an Angel now. But I’m a special Angel that lives on Earth,” I explained. “Oh,” she said, confused. “I’m your Angel, sweetie. People can only see me if I want them to,” I kinda sorta possibly lied. “But you can see me all the time.” Her eyes got wide. “Cooool!” Joseph walked in and smiled brightly. “Gabby!” He gave me a hug. “It’s such a relief to know you’re okay.” “She’s an Angel,” replied Jules happily. “ My Angel.” Joseph stepped around me and went to Jules. “Oh really?” Jules nodded adamantly. “Uh huh. She has super powers!”

“Does she?” he asked, and peered over his shoulder at me with a grin. “But can she do this?” Joseph looked back and tickled her. She screeched and giggled uncontrollably as he picked her up and flew her around like she was an airplane. It was incredibly charming how easily Joseph interacted with Jules, and my heart expanded a little more. There was so much love in the room that it was hard to believe a war was looming over us like an ominous cloud. It felt like I was an observer in the room as my favorite people interacted. Doing normal every day things I could only wish to be able to do with Andrew one day. This is what you wanted, I reminded myself. The strange and extraordinary. Perhaps I bit off more than I could chew. <> There wasn’t enough room at the table for everyone, so I ended up sitting at the kitchen’s bar with Jenna, Lucia, Jules, and Firen. It was just us girls. Firen, with her purple hair and stark, silver cheekbones, looked out of place. Of course, this didn’t deter Jules’s fascination. Firen’s strange looks and odd demeanor only made Jules more interested in her. Jenna watched them both nervously as they interacted, but, as dinner progressed, she finally relaxed. Though Firen was feisty and easy to anger, I could literally feel good vibrations of power emanating from her. She was different, true, but something deep down told me I could trust her. Though there was definitely tension thick in the air, we didn’t talk about the Abyss or our current situation. For this one night we decided to act as if the threat of the Empyrean Guard wasn’t real—as if the circumstances were all just a bad dream that we could laugh away. Why not? Didn’t we all deserve just one night of normalness before everything hit the proverbial fan and exploded in our faces? “Why did you paint your face?” Jules asked Firen who was confused by the question. “Whatever do you mean, Child?” Firen pursed her lips, her back ramrod straight, and posture stiff. “Right here,” explained Jules by pointing to her cheekbones. “You’ve got silver paint on your face!” Firen automatically touched her face, scowling. “That’s not paint, Child. That’s just my face.” “Momma said lying is bad. Santa’s gunna put coal in your stocking,” exclaimed Jules. Firen’s eyes grew wide while the rest of us tried to hide our smirks behind napkins or utensils. “Child, I’m not lying.” She was very sincere. “Why do you keep calling me ‘child’?” Jules folded her arms, doing her best to look intimidating next to Firen. “My name is Jules.” “Well, Jules,” said Firen, uncertain how to act to the defiant Jules, “I wasn’t lying. It’s a nasty habit—though I’m not sure how getting coal from this Santa character is an unsatisfactory outcome. Coal can be wielded for many necessities.” We all stared at the two in humor, trying to stop ourselves from choking on our food, especially when Jules decided she’d get down to the bottom of the silver “paint.” Jules climbed up Firen’s lap, who had frozen like a stone statute, and began furiously wiping her face, trying to make the silver go away. Of course, it never did. Though we did miss Thanksgiving while in the Abyss, Christmas was still on the menu. But I had an odd feeling that this would be unlike any Christmas I’d ever had. After an absolutely delightful dinner, Andrew and I retreated to the room I slept in during my previous visit. Jenna and Joseph were kind enough to supply us with something to sleep in. After a much-needed shower, I crawled into the bed where Andrew lay, bare-chested with an arm behind his head, his damp hair disheveled. He was stunning —and I knew I was incredibly fortunate. There was a weight on my chest that wouldn’t go away, but as soon as Andrew enveloped me in his arms, it dissipated. I knew it was temporary, but I’d take it.

“Are you nervous about tomorrow?” I asked softly as my fingers traced his stomach under the covers. “Should I be?” His breath was hot in my hair. “As long as Director Morris stays on our side, no.” Andrew tipped my chin up so our eyes met. His were maroon, and my stomach did a little somersault at the significance. Our lips were only a few inches away. “Let’s not worry about tomorrow,” he breathed. Then he kissed me. It was gentle at first, but then we both grew more eager and passionate. This kiss was different from many we had shared—as if it would be our last. It was soft, like a warm breeze coming off the ocean. And then it was fierce, like a fire would break out over my skin and consume me. It was full of silent promises, unspoken words of devotion, and whispered covenants. Everything was contained in the simple touch of our skin, my electricity lighting up the space between us with its ethereal blue glow. We broke apart, breathless. “Gods, Ella.” He traced a finger down my jaw as his chest rose and fell, fervently inhaling oxygen. “You’re absolutely stunning.” He placed another gentle kiss on my lips. “Amazing.” Another soft touch of lips. “And so incredibly lovely.” He said the last in my ear, his breath tickling my skin. We didn’t say much after that, our bodies melding together in the electrical blue glow of my power. <> There was a knock on the door; I already knew who was there. I quickly scrambled down the hall and unlatched the door. The sun streamed in and silhouetted the figure of a beautiful woman. Her hair was a flame in the light, and her skin glowed a coppery gold. She wore dark colors, though very little of her skin was covered. It was a sneak peek for me to see her tattoos. She smiled sweetly at me, though I knew this woman was a fierce warrior. I returned her smile, a genuine one, unlike with the other two. “I know why you’re here. Come in! Come in!” I opened the door wider. “Hello Zola.” Her voice was soft and timid, unlike her. The others must have told her how cold I was to them. “I hope I haven’t come at a bad time.” “Nonsense,” I said with a wave of my hand. “I’ve been waiting for you to come for quite some time, Lucia.” I gestured for her to sit. Lucia crossed her legs, her tattoos more intricate and elaborate than I’d ever seen on any of the other Ladies. Forgetting proper etiquette, I leaned forward and barely caressed the lines of her tattoo. She shifted uncomfortably and I pulled my hand back. “Listen, Zola, I’m still getting used to my tattoos. I don’t want you to examine them like you did with the other two. I’d rather not know than go through that.” Her voice was crisp and rang with finality. “You’re different,” I said softly. “You’re not like the other two, are you?” Lucia shook her head. “Ah, I didn’t think so. See, their tattoos tell me a brutal story—one I’ve witnessed hundreds of times with my gift.” Lucia’s blue eyes were intelligent as they searched my face. My next words I spoke slowly, and watched Lucia’s reactions carefully. “But just like their tattoos, my visions come to an abrupt halt when they die.” She tried to hide her reaction, but her eyes grew wide and she gripped the edge of her seat, turning her knuckles white. “When they die?” she repeated carefully. “Indeed. Both Mimi and Liz will die.” Lucia opened her mouth to speak but I threw up a hand to stop her. “It won’t happen for quite some time, but you need to know this.” “Do they?”

“Of course not. Everything will be infinitely worse if I tell them.” Lucia snorted, not the response I would have guessed. “I can see that. Both of them can be so self-absorbed at times.” “Why don’t you sound upset?” My eyes narrowed. “After the awakening, I was shocked to find out they were the ones chosen—they were honestly the last two I’d ever want to serve with.” Lucia’s nose wrinkled in distaste. “They were chosen based on power. They’re both enormously powerful, but lack what you have.” Lucia’s eyebrows rose in question. “Love and loyalty.” Her eyes softened at my words, and I knew she was thinking of her kindred soul, Ehno. Whenever they were within a hundred miles of me, I felt their love like a tangible thing. Like I could grasp it and put it away for safekeeping. It was practically breathable when Ehno came to explore his gift more. “Which is why I see your death much earlier then theirs.” She froze, the color draining from her face. “That’s not funny.” “Indeed, it’s not,” I said. She frowned. “When?” “That’s not important.” I waved her question away, and she scowled at me. “What’s important is that you come back to life.” “Impossible! What kind of game are you playing at, old woman?” This time I scowled. “This is no game.” I stood and power radiated off me. Lucia shrunk back. “I won’t be examining your tattoos because they don’t belong to you.” I sat back down, my jaw clenched as I stared at her fiercely. Lucia, on the other hand, shot up, outraged. “I deserve these tattoos, and am proud to have them. How dare you!” She turned for the door. “Lucia! Wait!” She froze, but didn’t turn around. “I know you think I’m being rude, but that’s not the case. One day you’ll understand this whole conversation. You will see these tattoos on another person one day, and, when you do, know that you must protect her with your life.” Her shoulders stiffened, but she didn’t move away. “You’ll love her as much as Ehno one day,” I whispered. “There’s only Ehno!” “Not romantically, Lucia. You’ll see. I just need you to tell her this one thing: the answer to victory is in her tattoos.” Lucia spun around, anger etched into her face. “You mean my tattoos!?” “Yes.”

Lucia towered over me, her finger jabbing at the air as she said, “Stop being so cryptic, Zola. If what you say is true, just tell me what the answer is!” “I’ve told you all I know. I don’t know specifics, but I do know they’ll lead her to victory.” She straightened. “I should have known better than to come here after what I heard from the Ladies, but Ehno was adamant that you weren’t like that. He had such nice things to say about you!” Lucia turned on her heels and strode away. The door slammed behind her. 20 STRATEGY I wiped steam from the mirror after my shower and studied the tattoos that covered my waist. During our time in the Abyss, I had gained more without realizing it. After my dream starring Zola and Lucia, I couldn’t stop thinking about how the swirls and designs could be a road map to victory. Was the answer as simple as these markings? I pulled Jenna’s long-sleeved shirt over my head, thankful we were the same size, and brushed my long locks. After dressing and making myself as presentable as possible, I exited the bedroom and bumped into Joseph. “Are you ready for this?” he asked with a cheesy grin. “A little nervous,” I admitted. “The good news is I don’t think you’ll meet any resistance. But . . .” He swung an arm over my shoulder and walked me down the hallway. “There’s bad news?” I squeaked. “Well.” He paused, his grin melting away. “Not ‘bad news,’ per se. Maybe catastrophic might be a better word.” “What?” My voice rose in pitch. The living room was packed, and everyone’s eyes were on the TV. Jenna’s shaky hand covered her mouth, only her tear-filled green eyes showing. Patrick sat stiffly with his ever-serious expression, but even his frown had deepened. Lucia stood behind the couch with her arms folded, her posture defensive. Ehno was next to her, a gentle hand on her lower back. Firen, sitting between Jenna and Andrew, had a mixture of expressions; probably amazed by the technology and stunned by whatever it was they were watching. Andrew stood when he saw me and quickly pulled me away from the group. “Something’s happened in Italy.” Andrew’s eyes captured mine, and his thoughts tumbled through me in a rush. All his alarm, despair, and apprehension hit me so hard the breath knocked out of me. He held me by my arms, his thumbs lightly rubbing to soothe me. “The Ladies of Light have finally gone through with their plans.” I swallowed thickly as Joseph nodded solemnly. “It’s all over the news, though we received the call about it early this morning.” “Why didn’t you tell me?” I almost shouted. “You were exhausted,” said Joseph, “and Andrew thought it’d be best if you rested.” “We all did,” said Aiden, placing a gentle hand on my back. I was numb—this was happening too fast, and I knew this would only make the Empyrean Guard act with more efficiency. What were the Ladies of Light thinking? Did they not care about the Angels at all? Andrew helped me to the couch where Firen stood to let me sit. Jenna wrapped her arms around my neck, and I hugged her back. “It’s horrible out there,” she said as she backed away. She reached for the remote and turned the volume up.

“The small town of Avella, Italy has been plagued with strange lights and rioting in the streets. Phone calls from many citizens made it out during the evening, all of them distressed, talking about strange women attacking and subduing people as they passed. It’s now been two hours without contact from the inside. Law enforcement has been unable to penetrate the boarders of the small town, many of them saying they ‘bounced off’ an invisible barrier. Scientists are on the scene.” The woman announcer disappeared and another screen appeared with an older man with glasses and a black suit. On the bottom of the screen it flashed his name and occupation: Louis Bard, Physicist. “We’ve been using an electromagnetic pulse to find an opening in the barrier around Avella and have found none,” he said in a gravelly Italian accent. “My scientists are attempting to discern how exactly this barrier is working, or what it’s made of. This is something we’ve never seen before in science. This kind of technology could be used as a defensive weapon of war. If only we could find a way to penetrate the barrier, we might be able to understand how it works.” The screen switched back to the woman. “Troops from the U.S. have been deployed to Italy. Planes are grounded in Italy until this problem is resolved, and the President has raised the security level to red in the U.S.” Andrew had taken my hand as I watched in horror. Jenna muted the TV and turned to me. “Jules is in school right now; do I need to pick her up?” I stared up at Joseph who had perched on the couch’s edge next to Jenna. His shoulders were stiff with tension as he met my eyes. He gave a tiny nod. “Yes. Go pick up Jules,” I whispered. “Dad, will you go with her?” Aiden nodded and reached for his coat. Jenna stood. “Firen, come with me too?” “Are you sure?” Joseph asked, wary. “I’ll be with her,” Aiden said soothingly. “I trust her,” said Jenna suddenly. Her words rang true. Firen might be a Fallen Angel, but she fell to protect humans. She just happened to be on the other side. Jenna grabbed her coat, purse, and keys and practically yanked Firen out the door, Joseph following behind. After a minute a car started and pulled away, and Joseph came back in. “Are we still meeting with the Director?” I asked. “Yes.” He checked his watch. “We should probably leave now.” <> A black SUV—surprise, surprise—was our ride to FBI headquarters. Patrick drove with Joseph in the passenger seat. It was almost like old times. Ehno and Lucia sat in the very back with Andrew and me in the middle. There was no traffic at ten in the morning, and we had no accidents. At headquarters, a grim Emily, who looked as if she’d been up all night, greeted us. She probably had been. “Agent Carter! Agent Salantro!” she exclaimed. “Where have you two been? It’s been a nightmare around here.” A few stray hairs had sprung free of her bun. Joseph put his hands on her shoulders. “Emily, calm down. Breathe.” She nodded and blew her stray hairs out of her face. “The Director’s been waiting for you.” She sat abruptly in her chair after Joseph led her behind her desk. Phones were ringing off the hook, people ran around with folders and discs, and many of the men sweated

heavily. The Director’s door flew open and Tom Morris stepped out, his black tie loose around his neck. His shoulders lost some of their tension when he saw us. He pointed with his head down the hallway and we followed him. We entered a conference room with a long table, large swivel chairs, and a dry-erase board. The Director went to the head of the table as we all sat around—except Patrick who stood next to the door. He was wearing his holster and gun, as was Joseph. “What the hell is going on?” Director Morris asked gruffly. “This has come out of left field for us too,” said Joseph calmly. “Director—” I started. “Tom.” Oh? We were back to first names again. “Tom, if you remember our last conversation about possible enslavement by those dark Angels . . . Well, it’s happening.” His fist slammed into the table. “I believed you, dammit. But I didn’t think it would really happen. I thought we could stop it before it became anything.” He shook his head, frustrated. “The President is furious with me.” “This isn’t your fault,” argued Joseph. “With the new threat of the Empyrean Guard, we’ve had our hands full. Angels are dying, Tom. We want this over with just as much as you.” “That doesn’t mean the President won’t point his finger at me. There’s always someone to blame.” The Director let out a breath and seemed to finally take in everyone in the room. “Who’s this?” Lucia stood, her tattoos and red hair striking in the fluorescent lights. “We’re the Illuminator’s protectors. I’m Lucia.” She gestured beside her. “This is Ehno.” She pointed across the table. “And this is Andrew.” They both stood when they were introduced. “Illuminator?” He looked confused for a second before his eyes landed on me. “You mean Gabriella? Of course.” “Tom, there’s a lot we need to discuss,” I said. “Our threat has doubled, and now humans are being directly targeted. We need to act soon.” “I know, I know,” he agreed. “President Lansberry will be addressing the nation in—” He glanced at his watch. “— one hour. He expects me to have answers for him beforehand. We need a cover story.” “Time is running out, Director,” said Patrick, his deep voice resonating in the room. “We need to focus on stopping the Ladies of Light instead of making up stories.” His calm demeanor faltered. I leaned toward the Director. “Have you ever considered just telling the truth?” My eyebrows rose in challenge. “Joseph told me you were planning on helping me come forward as alive—this is the perfect opportunity.” “And cause mass chaos?” he countered. “The President will never allow it.” I sat back in the chair and glanced at Andrew. “Maybe it’s time the Angels stop hiding.” “Gabby,” said Joseph in warning. “No, Joseph.” I turned to him, my voice rising indignantly. “Angels have been secretly helping humans for thousands of years. We’re mythical beings who people believe to be God’s creation. We bring hope—perhaps showing ourselves would do the opposite. Peace instead of chaos. Hope instead of despair.” Lucia and Ehno stared at me in astonishment, even Patrick shifted uncomfortably next to the door. Andrew gently touched my knee, bringing my attention back to him. His eyes searched my face as he read my mind. “That’s your plan?” I nodded.

“This could go incredibly wrong and put you in danger.” His eyes flashed, and his protectiveness made my stomach flutter. “What are you talking about?” the Director asked. “Wait,” said Joseph, holding his hand up to stop the Director. “We’d never have to hide ourselves again. If President Lansberry wants a scapegoat, we can be that.” “This is too risky.” Lucia’s hands were fists on the table. “She’s right,” agreed Ehno. “The Empyrean Guard will find you.” I frowned at them and turned back to Andrew. “What if we fail at protecting you?” Andrew’s voice was small. “If it boils down to me,” I said seriously, “I’ll do it.” “Ella—” “No,” I stated firmly. “If the President will agree to this, I’m doing it. I know you want to protect me, but I want to protect those people in Italy who are enslaved. I want to protect my Angels, too.” “You give too much of yourself,” said Ehno sharply. “Will someone please tell me what the hell you’re talking about?” Director Morris was growing impatient, and his red face showed his outrage. “We’re going public,” I informed, then explained exactly the best way to go about revealing the Angels, including information about the situation in Italy and how it was being handled. “And if President Lansberry were wise, he’d take up our offer of introducing us on national television during his press conference,” I finished. The Director dropped into his seat, leaned forward, and placed his head in his palms. Several cusswords escaped his mouth before he rubbed his eyes and stared at me in disbelief. “And if he refuses?” I rose to my feet, my wings expanding beyond my shoulders, and jumped onto the table with a flap of my wings. “Ever seen an Angel fly?” The Director gulped and shook his head. “I’ll call the President.” Once the Director left the room, Joseph turned on me. “Are you insane? What about this is a good idea?” “What about this is a bad idea?” I countered as I folded my wings behind me and hopped down. “Everything!” he shouted, outraged. “After everything you’ve been through—and now this!” He leaned back into his chair so hard it rolled a few inches. “We’ve all lost you once, Gabby. Now you’re purposefully putting yourself in the spotlight where people will target you.” He sat up abruptly and stabbed his finger into the table as he spoke. “And that’s not even counting the fact the Empyrean Guard will know you’re in D.C.” “Wait.” I stopped him by raising my hand. “You’re making this all about me, and it isn’t! This is about those people in Italy, about my Angels around the world who are being picked off and killed. I’ve put my life on the line time and time again, and I’m sorry it causes you stress, Joseph, but I can’t pass up an opportunity to help just because I’m scared. I can’t back down because I might die. Let’s face it: this is my life now. This was what I was meant to do. Either you can support me, or I’ll find a way to help without your support!” I whirled toward the door, threw it open, and walked away, tears at the edges of my eyes. I could sense Patrick silently trailing me as I wandered aimlessly down the hallway until I found an internal patio with chairs and tables. I dropped into the first chair I came across and placed my head in my hands. The chair across from me scooted on the concrete. I peered up into Patrick’s face. “Are you going to lecture me too?”

“Quite the opposite,” he said softly. “I find your bravery gallant and bold. Your idea is wise, but the others are clouded in their judgment. Every person in that room loves you more than their own life. Including me. It makes us all a bit irrational to think of you taking such a great risk for others—and especially taking risks for us. We’re all just frightened we cannot protect you.” I sighed and rubbed my temples, feeling a headache coming on. “I feel the same about them, too. This is exactly why I have to do this! Don’t you understand we have to stick together and protect each other?” “Of course we do,” said Andrew as he opened the door to the patio. He nodded to Patrick who rose to his feet, patted my shoulder with his massive hand, and left. “Am I making the wrong decision?” I asked. Andrew pulled up a chair, sat next to me, and held my hands in his. “No, you made a difficult decision. Joseph’s just worried, just like the rest of us.” He bent closer and reached up to move hair from my face to tuck it behind my ear. “I feel like I have the most to lose if you died,” he said, his eyes searching mine. “But that’s not true. Not really. It’d be all of humanity that would lose; a massive blow to us all.” His voice grew rough, as if he were trying to choke back tears, and his eyebrows scrunched in angst. “You died in my arms. I buried your body in the ground.” “I’m alive,” I whispered. “I wasn’t even in the coffin.” His eyes bored into mine, his intense expression making me flush. “I know, but next time you might not come back.” He pressed his forehead to mine, and, through our bond, his emotions showered me in grief and joy all mingled together. “I’m not going anywhere, and I refuse to die,” I stated stubbornly. Andrew chuckled softly and pulled away. “Let’s go back before the Director pulls out all his hair.” “There you are!” the Director declared as we stood, poking his head through the door. “The President has agreed to your proposal.” 21 TRANCE My heart raced with harsh thuds, and my skin felt hot to the touch. I was frightened beyond belief at the attention I was about to receive. My social skills were nil to begin with, and now every TV in the nation would broadcast the shocking revelation: Angels are real and among us. The secret service didn’t make me feel comfortable either. Their eyes constantly scanned the room, but always landed on me for more than a brief moment. I stood next to the President, while my Angels were spread through the room, so they were less of a threat. My palms were sweating as I wrung my hands together behind my back. I tried my best to keep a passive expression on my face, but I was positive everyone around me saw right through to my very core. The crowd of reporters had taken their seats, and several people shot photos of me, probably wondering who I was. Luckily, I received a quick makeover beforehand. “Settle down. Settle down,” a man said. Voices died down. The President cleared his throat. “Good afternoon. I’ve called this press conference for several reasons. The first of which is to clear the name of a young woman who was accused of terrorist actions in September of 2010.” There were murmurs in the crowd, along with many questioning glances at me. I made eye contact with Andrew at the back of the room. This guy back here just grabbed a girl’s ass who was with another guy. His thoughts came loud and clear, and I smirked at his language. And two of the female reporters back here are arguing about whether the President is wearing boxers or briefs. I didn’t know if he was lying or not, I just knew he was keeping a running commentary of people around him for my entertainment. Well, actually, to keep me from crumbling under the spotlight. I bit my lip to prevent myself from laughing.

I vote boxer-briefs, I thought, unable to hold back a tiny smile. “Doctor Gabriella Moretti had boarded a plane with the FBI, investigating a paranormal case,” continued the President. He said the word “paranormal” timidly; he knew he was opening a can of worms. His statement had everyone’s attention, and the reporters were bizarrely silent. “During the flight, the plane crashed with only a few survivors. We received false Intel from a trusted source, and wrongly accused the survivors of being terrorists.” The President didn’t know where to put his hands as he fidgeted. “In fact, they’re the complete opposite—” He hesitated. “They’re Angels.” Pause. The room inhaled a collective breath before the reporters exploded into questioning. “Did you say Angels?” “Did this have to do with the paranormal case?” “I thought Doctor Moretti died! What’s this about?” “Quiet! Quiet!” the man from before ordered. “President Lansberry will answer your questions after the press conference. Please refrain until then.” The reporters settled some, but looked like a classroom full of kids with ADHD as they wiggled and fidgeted in their seats. A few of them wrote furiously into notebooks while others began to turn their focus to me. Great. “You did not hear me wrong. The only reason there were survivors was because of Angels who were able to rescue some of the people on board.” Whispers swept through the reporters, some of them dialing their phones to probably confirm what their stations had surely heard. “We also declared Doctor Gabriella Moretti dead after an accident in Italy a week later. What we didn’t realize was the fact she’s also an Angel.” He turned to me, and I felt the heat of the lights blaring down on me. “Doctor Moretti, I want to apologize for everything you went through in September. Had we known, we would not have accused you of that crime. I hope you understand that it never crossed our minds.” He held his hand out to me and I took it, giving him an apologetic look for my sweaty palms. He didn’t seem to notice because his were just as sweaty, and we shook firmly. Cameras whipped my direction as reporters sat on the edges of their seats. President Lansberry let go of my hand and turned back to the podium. The reporters were divided on whom to keep their attention on. I tried to make myself look as unimpressive as possible. “I’m proud to announce that the United States of America has the Angels on our side. They’ve offered to help strategize with us, and Italy, to help penetrate the supernatural barriers around Avella, and set the people there free!” There was mass confusion, yet cheers still erupted from the crowd. “I realize that all of this news is a shock, and difficult to believe, so the leader of the Angels has offered to show proof of their divine power. Doctor Gabriella Moretti is the Illuminator, as the Angels call her, and their protector. It was her decision to come out of hiding to bring hope to the people of the world.” President Lansberry gestured toward me. I stood tall and sure of myself, even though inside I was freaking out. A heart attack was on the brink of taking me down. “Show yourself.” I took a deep breath and let my wings flow from my back. They took up most of the stage, and even the President had to back away from me. My skin glowed with power as electricity came to my fingertips, twirled around my arms, and danced across the ceiling, causing the lights to flicker. Many of the Secret Service had their hands on their guns. In the back of the room, Andrew had also spread his wings wide. We had decided earlier that Lucia, Ehno, and Patrick should not show their wings because they were black. Stereotypes of white being good and black being evil would ruin our image at this stage in our outing. Gasps were followed by stunned silence. Three people passed out and had to be carted out. One of them hit their head and was bleeding.

“Help him,” someone shouted in the crowd. “Yeah,” came another voice. One doubtful voice rose above the rest. “If you’re an Angel, heal him!” I folded my wings behind me and made my way through the crowd. Some people reached out to touch me like I was Buddha, while others backed away, scared. I dropped down to my knees before the man. Patrick had penetrated the crowd and loomed over us, his stance protective. He held out his hand for me, and I knew he was offering his power to help the healing so I wouldn’t be drained. I took it gratefully and placed my other hand over the wound on the man’s head. My hand was instantly coated in blood. Without preamble, I sent my healing energy into the man. Patrick’s life force gave me a high as it filtered into my body and out into the man. The blood quit flowing and the wound sealed. He didn’t wake up, though. “Can I have that?” I asked a reporter, pointing to his half-empty water bottle. “Su-sure,” he stuttered and held out the bottle. I unscrewed the cap and poured it over the guy’s face. He spluttered and blinked up at me. He looked as if he would faint again, so I backed away to give him space. “I won’t hurt you,” I said softly. He became a fish out of water, his mouth opening and closing. I smiled at his stammering and held out a hand. He hesitated for a second before latching on. I helped him to his feet, and everyone roared with cheers. I’d forgotten about all the cameras filming us—probably live. Patrick led me back to the stage and became a bodyguard in front of me. Other people had the same reaction to Andrew, and a few of the ladies were swooning. Trust me, ladies, I know what you mean, I thought while smiling at Andrew. President Lansberry cleared his throat to gain everyone’s attention. “The situation in Italy has been played down significantly by the Italian government,” he admitted to the press. “There are a few Angels who have gone rogue. We’ve secretly been in discussions on how to stop them, and are currently working on a solution. We will put a stop to this injustice!” He threw his hand down like it was a gambit. The reporters ate up every word the President said and clapped cheerfully at his go-get’em attitude. “The President will take questions now,” said the same guy as before. He was like a referee. “This session will last for five minutes.” The reporters jumped to their feet and began to shout questions. It was total and utter chaos as they spoke over each other. A Secret Service agent brought me a wet towel to clean the blood off my hand and gestured for me to follow him as the President answered the many questions being thrown his way. <> It was Andrew’s idea for me to sit in the back of the SUV with Joseph. Patrick spoke quietly to Andrew as he drove us back to Joseph’s house. Ehno and Lucia sat in the middle. We had to sneak away from the pressroom and change vehicles twice before we arrived back at FBI headquarters. It seemed as if no one had followed us, and we didn’t use any magic to leave a trail to Joseph’s for the Empyrean Guard to follow. We were actually shocked they didn’t show up immediately, but we figured they probably weren’t watching TV during the announcement. “I’m sorry,” Joseph and I said at the same time. We chuckled. “You have nothing to be sorry about,” continued Joseph. “I overreacted about the revelation. It wasn’t really my decision anyway.” “Of course it’s partially your choice—you’re my Keeper, after all! And I’m sorry I sprung it on you with no warning,” I added. “Still friends?” “As if that was ever in question!” I scoffed. We hugged, and I kissed his cheek. “Thank you for everything.”

He grinned like an idiot. “I should be thanking you. Not only do I have a sexy wife-to-be, and an adorable five year old who likes to touch everything after she’s eaten peanut butter with her fingers, but now I know a famous person.” He elbowed me playfully. I raised my nose in the air, smug. “Yeah, you should be thanking me.” I laughed. “And about Jules—put the peanut butter on the top shelf where she can’t reach.” He frowned. “I tried that. She’s a monkey that one. I put it on a lower shelf so she wouldn’t climb up and possibly hurt herself.” His face softened when he talked about Jules. “Well look at you, Daddy,” I teased. His expression grew serious. “I want to be,” he whispered. “I just don’t know how to bring it up with Jenna.” “What are you so afraid of?” “Jules’s father meant a lot to Jenna—she loved him, and I know she always will. Don’t you think it’d offend her if I asked to adopt Jules?” It was the first time I ever saw Joseph look vulnerable. “Absolutely not. I think Jenna would be flattered and honored. And I know that Jules would love it. She adores you already.” Joseph’s grin was back. “I’ll ask her tonight!” <> Jenna sprung from the couch when we walked in the door. She rushed over to me and clung to me, teary-eyed. “Whoa! What’s wrong?” I pealed her off me and held her at arms length. She was smiling. “I saw you on TV—you were beautiful! Stunning! Amazing!” She yanked me back into a hug and cried into my shoulder while I laughed and patted her back. “So these are happy tears?” I confirmed. She nodded into my shoulder. Firen walked up to us in the foyer with Jules’s hand in hers. “Why’s Mommy crying?” Jules asked, tears pooling in her eyes. Jenna pulled away and lowered herself to Jules. “Because I’m happy, sweetie. These are happy tears.” She wiped them away. “I guess you saw everything?” I asked. Firen and Jenna nodded. “I still don’t understand the magic involved with the T.V.,” said Firen, her face as solemn as ever. We stared at Firen in amusement for a second before Jenna turned back to me. “I was stunned!” she exclaimed. “I had no idea you were going to do that. And you met the President. How was that?” “Nerve-racking,” I admitted. “Where’s my dad?” Jenna frowned. “He’s been in one of the guest bedrooms since we got back.” She lowered her voice. “I think being around Jules upsets him—because of you and your mom.” I nodded gravely, making a note to check on him if he didn’t come out soon. “Does he know about what we did?” “I tried to tell him through the door, but he didn’t respond.”

Joseph came in the door behind me with the mail in his hand. Jules squealed and ran him down like a miniature linebacker. “JOEY!” she practically screamed. Joseph lowered himself to catch her and threw her into the air, making her giggle and scream in delight. I pointed to the mail in his hand once he settled Jules in his arms. “Anything good, Joey?” I teased. His ridiculously wide smile turned into a mock frown. “Payback,” I warned. Lucia, Ehno, and Andrew had walked around to the backyard, while Patrick had to go back into work. When I opened the back door, they all glanced up at me from the table. “Don’t try to hide anything from me—it’s an uphill battle.” Ehno looked away in shame, giving them away. “Wait, you really are trying to hide stuff from me?” I scowled and started to make my way over to them. That was when my reality warped into something new. I froze for a few seconds as I took in the scenery. How the hell did I end up on the stairs of the Divine Library? “Hey! Abelie! Wait up,” shouted Lucia from behind me. I spun around, startled. “Lucia. It’s been a while.” She studied me for a few seconds. It was true: it had been a while since we’d seen each other. Our friendship had always been an on and off relationship due to our duties keeping us apart. “I’m not like them, you know?” Her expression was more intense than I had ever seen it. “I’ve never been like the other Ladies.” “I know, and you proved that today by showing up and supporting the Halos and Guardians.” I turned and continued to make my way up the stairs. I did feel slightly betrayed when I found out about the Ladies’ plot to enslave humans, and relieved when Lucia walked through the doors to the Divine Library to join our side. “You don’t sound like you believe me,” she said quietly, then her voice rose as she said, “Zola warned me fifty years ago they were different. I didn’t want to believe her, but now I have no choice.” I stopped and turned back around. “I do believe you. I’m just frustrated over everything else. How could they turn into such monsters? How could you—one of the best warriors and kindest hearts—even be in the same league as them?” Lucia shook her head. “I don’t know.” “The awakening wasn’t fixed, was it?” I whispered. “I wish it were. They earned their spots; they have unimaginable power. So much power it makes the rest of us look like we’re doing parlor tricks.” I stepped down and closer to her, reading her face. “You don’t think it’s their power, do you?” “They’re getting it from somewhere else, I just don’t know where or how to stop it if I did,” she admitted. “Your tattoos—didn’t Zola help you discern them?” Lucia scowled. “Hah. She told me they didn’t belong to me—that they were a path for someone else.” “What? That doesn’t make any sense,” I said, confused. “I know.” She gritted her teeth. “Zola and I haven’t exactly been on great terms since then.”

“You need to go back to her and find out more. Maybe she’s seen more of your future since the last time you visited.” “She’s been missing for a month,” she whispered. “What?” I gasped. “We’ve been keeping it quiet while we searched for her.” My body began to jerk back and forth roughly. Lucia didn’t seem to notice. Suddenly I was ripped away form the Divine Library. I fell forward, gasping, but arms caught me. I was in Joseph’s backyard again, myself instead of Abelie. Someone asked a question, but my brain felt like scrambled eggs. “It was the Sight,” answered Andrew. “It’s manifested while she’s awake,” added Ehno. I peered up to see Andrew nodding at Ehno. Worry creased Lucia’s eyebrows. I shook my head and regained my balance, standing on my own, though Andrew held his hands outward in case he needed to catch me again. “I’m fine,” I said. “Just a little shaken.” “Perhaps you should lie down?” Andrew offered. “Actually, I was thinking we should finally take a good look at my tattoos—and Lucia’s.” Her blue eyes stared into mine, understanding dawning. “I know what happened with Zola,” I told her. Lucia froze for a second before she replied. “She was right: these tattoos don’t belong to me.” “I disagree.” She frowned, studying my face. “You . . . disagree?” “Absolutely. These tattoos might be the same, but that’s just because our path is the same.” I smiled at her reassuringly. “Zola was wrong; these tattoos are just as much your fate as they are mine. Now that Zola is gone, we must discern them for ourselves.” Lucia grinned wider than I had ever seen—this had obviously been a weight on her shoulders for some time. “Plus, I think it’d be a good idea to have a plan sorted out before I meet with Director Morris tomorrow. Understanding these tattoos might give me the edge I need.” Lucia lifted her shirt to show a sliver of marked skin. “We’ll start here. I know this means ‘battle.’ ” “I’ll get the Timeless book,” offered Andrew and ran into the house. 22 THE TERRIBLE I stood in the guest bedroom in a pair of jeans and bra. Andrew was crouched before me with the Timeless book open in one palm while his other hand traced around my stomach. His touch made cold chills slide down my back, and also made the Timeless book read differently for him. The blank pages filled with information, mainly symbols and words I didn’t understand. Andrew, on the other hand, understood exactly what he was reading. So much so that he was unaware of how much his touch was affecting me. His golden eyes glanced up into mine and a ghost of a smile graced his lips. He’d been reading my mind. Both of our thoughts drifted back to Hawaii, and his fingers began to trace lower down my stomach.

“I never noticed this before,” Lucia said behind me, making me jump. “It’s the Definitive Sun and the Halo’s symbol intertwined.” Andrew’s eyes jerked to Lucia’s and his eyebrows rose in surprise. Without a word, he shut the Timeless book and twisted me in his sturdy hands. I faced Lucia who rose from her crouched position. “Of everything I’ve come across, that’s the only symbol I can’t seem to figure out.” She paused and her eyes narrowed in on my neck. “This is new.” Stepping forward, she gently moved my hair away from my neck and studied the tattoo there. Her hand gripped my chin and made me tilt my head sideways. I could no longer see her eyes, but I did see the muscles in her chin tighten as she gritted her teeth. “What is it?” I asked. There was a crash in the other room, and Lucia jumped back and promptly yanked her dagger from her back. I twisted around just as Andrew tossed me my shirt. I caught it and threw it over my head. Andrew flung the door open and disappeared down the hallway. I also pulled the dagger Patrick had given from my back and followed. Lucia jumped forward and threw her arm across the doorframe. I opened my mouth to protest, but she put the knife to her lips to gesture me to be quiet. “I’m not here to hurt anyone!” a man shouted. The voice was deep, like the ocean, and familiar. “Do not move,” bellowed Ehno. “I need to speak to the Illuminator. It’s imperative,” explained the man. I took another step forward. Lucia caught my eyes, and an understanding passed between us. She moved her arm to let me pass. Joseph rounded the corner and hurried down the hallway. “Jenna?” he mouthed. I shook my head and shrugged, then pointed at his bedroom door. He nodded and cracked it open. I only received a peek inside to find that Jenna had Jules in her lap, a hand clamped over her mouth. What was going on? As soon as I thought it, Andrew began to speak mind-to-mind with me. It’s an Empyrean Guard. What? I exclaimed mentally, glancing back at the door Joseph just shut, worried sick for my family. He hasn’t harmed anyone, but we’re all on the defensive. Andrew didn’t tell me not to come down the hallway, but I knew he wanted me to stay hidden. I wasn’t going to hide from this Guard, though. I already felt like I was hiding from everyone and didn’t want to do that anymore. How was I supposed to be this savior to my Angels if I hid behind them? Pushing my shoulders back, I made my way down the rest of the hallway and entered into the living room. The Empyrean Guard was pressed up in a corner with magic swirling between him and the Angels who surrounded him, making his figure ripple. He was just as big as I remembered the Guards being, and his head almost touched the ceiling. He made the rest of us look like dwarfs. As soon as he caught sight of me, he visibly relaxed. “Illuminator,” he said in relief. A hand rubbed over his brown, buzzed hair in . . . nervousness? Was he nervous? “Let me handle this,” I ordered. There were protests, but they dropped their magic shields. I whipped back around and threw out my own magic, my hands flying his direction. It slammed into the Guard, and he crashed into the wall, his head whipping backward. “If you ever harm any of my Angels, I will personally hunt you down and kill you.” My voice was low and full of threat. I was not joking. “I won’t,” he promised, staring at the ceiling as I put my dagger to his throat. “That’s why I’m here.”

Surprised, I backed away, and he peeled himself from the wall. There was a slight indentation of his body; Joseph was going to kill me. “Where are the others?” I questioned as I weaved between Andrew and Ehno. “Not here,” the Guard said quickly. Firen stepped forward; her stance and coiled muscles screamed warrior. “She asked you a question. You better answer: ‘Where are the others?’ ” she growled. No, really. She seriously growled. “I don’t know.” My eyes shot to his face; his jaw tightened and a muscle beneath his right eye began to tick. “It’s not important.” He looked familiar, but before I got a good look, Firen’s black wings burst from her back and she rushed forward. Angels are stronger than normal humans, but mostly we have quicker reflexes and magic to back up any punch. Firen, however, was unearthly in her brute strength. Scary even. Her wings were so huge they couldn’t even extend all the way. The table beside the front door crashed to the ground as keys and cell phones slid across the floor. Ehno jumped back as her right wing flexed out. Firen struck the Guard squarely in the chest with one hand. She made what I did earlier look like elementary school bullying. He didn’t make a dent—he went straight through the wall and sprawled on the rubble in the kitchen. My lips clamped together as I tried to hold in a ridiculously timed laugh. At least Joseph won’t be upset over the dent I made earlier, I thought merrily. Just then, Joseph rushed into the living room. “What the hell happened?” His eyes were wide as he took in the scene. There was a massive hole in his wall, rubble spread across the kitchen, and cloud of dust rising into the air. Firen, seemingly innocent now that her wings were gone, stood at the foot of the rubble. Her back was ramrod straight, her leather and metallic clothing fitting her personality perfectly. Ignoring Joseph, she stepped over the plaster and debris and placed her foot on the Guard’s massive chest. He didn’t seem fazed. “I won’t ask again,” she snarled. I waved my hand in front of my face to deflect the puff of dust from entering my eyes and lungs. “They’re in Italy,” he choked and rubbed his neck. “No need to push me through a wall.” “That’s enough, Firen.” I touched her shoulder. She tensed for a second, but backed away. “What’s your name?” I asked, coughing. He shifted in the rubble of the wall, his entire body covered in plaster dust. “My name’s Chris,” he said. “And what are you doing here Chris?” “Looking for you,” he said softly in his abysmal voice. “Wall plaque stating the obvious,” I said tartly. He began to rise from the rubble. Firen did not like this, so she walked forward and pressed her foot into his chest again. “You’ll get up when the Illuminator says you can get up,” she barked. I genuinely liked Firen; she was beginning to score high brownie points with Jenna and Jules, and now this. I took a few steps towards Chris and knelt beside him. The Guards wanted me, that was no secret, but it was because I was the Illuminator. I didn’t know why I’d decided to give him a chance, but the Empyrean Guard helped me once upon a time. I had also given the Fallen Angels a chance when I was in Abyss. Shouldn’t I do the same for him? Firen, on the other hand, didn’t want to trust the Empyrean Guard. But there was a small part of me that was curious as to why he was here.

“Here’s the deal Chris,” I said with authority, “you have exactly sixty seconds to tell me why you’re here. And if you don’t give me a good enough explanation, I’ll kill you.” Chris nodded his head as he sat up on his elbows. “I’ve gone rogue.” All was silent. It was so quiet, in fact, we could hear the clock on the wall ticking. For some reason, I expected a much longer explanation. “You can do that?” I asked. “Well, I’m pretty sure they don’t like any of us going rogue,” he said derisively. Ignoring his sarcastic remark, I stared down at him in disbelief. Chris, an Empyrean Guard, had gone rogue. I certainly wasn’t expecting that of all things. The clock continued to tick. “You still have thirty seconds,” I reminded him. Words spilled out of his mouth, tumbling out like a Scrabble board gone sick. “I disagree with what they’re doing,” he said quickly. “I see the pain, and I’m not that person. I’ll never be that person.” His words rang true. “We’re harming more than helping!” “So why come to me?” “Who else am I supposed to go to?” He rose to a sitting position. “I admit, at first I thought their plan to eliminate the Angels on Earth was a stellar idea, but after witnessing some of the brutal slayings the Guards participated in . . . I didn’t want to be that kind of being.” He closed his eyes, and remorse was clearly etched into his face; his lips arched into a frown. “For some strange reason I believe you,” I acknowledged. “You do?” His voice held disbelief. I rose to my feet and glanced at the giant man sitting in the rubble. The Angels around me were silently communicating, then Ehno thought something that had me whirling around faster than a tornado. “What?!” I shouted. “This is who you saw?” Then recognition dawned on me. Everyone froze, and I realized my mistake. I spoke aloud instead of mind-to-mind with Andrew. “Illuminator, I deplore you to hear me out,” said the Guard. “I swear to not harm any of your Angels.” I nodded and refused to turn around, knowing that the face of the Empyrean Guard was the one Ehno had seen in his vision. “You can stand—we won’t harm you,” I said tiredly. Before anyone could protest, the front door burst open. It had grown dark outside, and the street lamp’s light filtered into the house, causing Patrick’s shadow to stretch across the ground. He looked badass. Since he had just come back from work, he was wearing his black suit. There was just something about an FBI black suit that said: “I can kick your butt, and I have a badge to prove it.” He held a hefty black gun in his hand. I didn’t know anything about guns, so I had no idea what kind it was, but I had a feeling it would kill as well as any other gun its size. He moved so fast he became a black blur as he raced into the house. His gun flew up in front of his face and pointed at Chris. I threw my hand out and pushed Patrick’s arm down before he could shoot Chris. Patrick’s eyes were wide in alarm, and Chris’s eyebrows knitted together in confusion. “It’s okay, Patrick,” I reassured. “And I’m pretty sure your gun won’t hurt him.” Patrick’s green and gold-flecked eyes met mine, and I could literally see the questions scrolling across them. “But he’s an Empyrean Guard!” He was outraged, and rightly so. “You’re very perceptive,” joked Ehno. “He is, in fact, an Empyrean Guard.” He cracked a smile. “What’s he doing here? And why isn’t he dead?” asked Patrick.

“Because he’s gone rooogue,” I said with a slight chuckle. I wasn’t sure if it was the normal giggles, or if it was my hysterical laugh. Chris rose cautiously to his feet, his massive frame practically taking up the whole kitchen, his head only inches from touching the ceiling. If I didn’t know better, I’d think he was an Olympian god. His body structure and clothing was virtually a duplicate of what I witnessed in movies. Not that the movies always got it right. Chris towered over Firen (all of us, really), but she didn’t back down or hesitate. Her head angled back as she glared up at him, her purple ponytail extending down her back with the movement. I wasn’t quite sure what her powers entailed, but I bet whatever they were, they carried a powerful punch. Chris ignored the glowering Fallen Angel before him and dusted himself off. “Something tragic happened,” said Chris. “I’ve gone against my leader’s orders; he told us we must continue to fight. I’m not the only one who feels this way about what we’re doing.” “Then why are you the only one here?” I wondered. “Because it’s not only my leader’s orders, they’re the God’s orders.” His eyes were an unnatural blue, almost like the color steel. And in those eyes, I saw a flicker of terror. “It’s only a matter of time before they find and kill me.” We were all silent again. What could this possibly mean? This only muddied the waters more; it was the one thing about this world I was still trying to understand. Light doesn’t always equal goodness, just as dark doesn’t always mean evil. And no one was ever truly virtuous or wicked. It made it unbelievably tough to pick a side, though, at this point, the only side I could trust was my own. My Angels followed me, so it was up to me to decipher what was moral and what was wicked. “You said something tragic happened,” I said. “What happened?” He finally looked hesitant. “We broke through the barrier.” I wasn’t sure I wanted to know what had happened. Was there a massacre? Were all the humans dead? Or were they all slaves? “And?” I pushed. “At first they didn’t know we had penetrated their barriers. The Angels weren’t hiding from us, thinking they were safe behind their wall of magic. They should’ve known better. We are the Empyrean Guard, after all, and our powers are great.” His voice was full of pride—he must not have made his decision to go rogue lightly. My mind was like a landmine: each thought and emotion had the potential to explode on me if I stepped on the subject just right. My throat tightened. “Tell me more,” I commanded. The massive giant in Joseph’s kitchen actually turned away in shame. “We sent several Angels to the Ethereal Eternity.” “That’s just a nice way of saying you murdered them,” I choked out. Chris suddenly didn’t look so huge to me anymore, and his downcast face didn’t help him much either. “I know,” he said in a strangled voice, adding to his overall look. “You’re completely right; we were wrong. But that’s not going to stop the others from continuing their . . .” He hesitated. “Murdering ways.” Conviction radiated out of his voice finally. “The only obstacle preventing them from reaching the other Angels right now are the humans. They’re surrounding the Ladies of Light and the Angels within. We won’t harm humans,” he stated firmly. “But some of them are considering the subject.” My stomach heaved. “So you know a way in?” I asked impatiently, completely forgetting the fact that this giant was an Empyrean Guard. His steely eyes met mine, and I saw an emotion I could not comprehend flash across his eyes. “I do know a way in,” he affirmed. <>

With everything that had happened, I had already forgotten I was now a celebrity. Even worse, it had slipped my mind to call my adoptive parents. How had that little bit of common sense slipped my mind? I had no idea. Luckily, Jenna fielded the phone call I finally remembered to make. My adoptive mother hadn’t said a coherent word the whole conversation. She cried. A lot. My adoptive father, on the other hand, was prepared for my inevitable phone call, and had made a list of questions he wanted to ask me. I felt like I was a competitor on a game show, and my adoptive father was the host. But even that conversation wasn’t the weirdest part of my evening. It was Chris, the Empyrean Guard. “So what you’re saying is . . . you punch it?” My fingers tapped on the table as my mind whirled with what he just told me. “Yes,” he stated in his booming voice. “Just like this?” I made a punching movement in mid air. Laughter followed. “Is there any other way to punch?” Chris asked dryly, not quite sure how to take my sense of humor. “I’m just . . . I can’t seem . . . you just punch it,” I said, a little dumbfounded. I almost made the punching motion again, but caught myself before I went through with it. Ehno, Lucia, and Andrew sat at the table with me. Patrick, Firen, and Joseph had gone to Lowe’s to pick up supplies to fix the wall that Firen had pushed Chris through. Aiden had holed up in one of the guest bedrooms he shared with Patrick, while Jenna and Jules napped. Chris was too large to sit at the table, so he sat on the ground outside. It was absolutely freezing out there, but we didn’t want to wake Jules. Luckily, Joseph had a wooden fence that surrounded his backyard, keeping his nosey neighbor out. “Do you want to know the dynamics of how I punch?” asked Chris mockingly. I almost said yes, just to see how he would explain his punch, but I refrained. “I don’t want to know the dynamics of your punch,” I said petulantly. “I do, however, want to know how punching the barrier makes a hole.” My eyebrows rose in challenge. Chris rubbed his eyes in frustration. “You’re making this more complicated than it is. We’re super strong, so punching a hole in their stupid magical barrier is no big deal.” My mouth dropped open. “No big deal?” I was still uncertain of the Empyrean Guard’s strength. “Do you mind if I test your strength with our magic?” I asked seriously, ready to get down to the bottom of this once and for all. He shook his head, his lips twitching as if I were entertaining. “Andrew, place a protective spell around me,” I said. By his expression, I could tell he was likewise vastly entertained by my questioning of Chris. Andrew’s protective spell immediately surrounded me, like I was in a big soap bubble. “Now try to punch me,” I ordered Chris. He chuckled. “I’m not really trying to hurt you, Illuminator, so I won’t be breaking through the barrier because there wouldn’t be any resistance for me.” “Well . . . couldn’t you like . . . want to hurt me for five seconds?” I asked jokingly with a nonchalant shrug. I knew I was being ludicrous, but I just couldn’t help myself. He thought I was serious for a second, but then he saw the smile edging my lips and knew better than to bite. Apparently, the Empyrean Guard were so strong they could just punch a hole right through the Ladies of Lights’ barrier. For the rest of the night, we tested Chris’s strength against our magic. Eventually Patrick and Firen joined us. Firen was overall the strongest, which only upset me more that the Fallen were still in the Abyss. Now that Firen was on Earth, she seemed to be really enjoying herself. Also, she had become quite fond of Jules in a short amount of time, and Jenna trusted her. And so did I, if I was being honest.

By midnight, we were all exhausted and went our separate ways for bed. Honestly? All I could think about was why the Empyrean Guard were unable to defeat the Ladies of Light, and why they wanted me to do it for them. That was one subject I wanted to broach when Chris and I were alone—just in case it was something so foreboding my Angels would lose confidence in themselves. But even worse, after seeing Chris’s strength, I had no idea how I was going to stop the Empyrean Guard from killing more Angels. Soon, I’d learn exactly how strong the Empyrean Guard were. I’d also learn a little more about myself, too. Oh, the joys of being the Illuminator. 23 TRAITOR It was the soundest sleep I’d had in a long time. I was wrapped up in Andrew’s arms, my face against his warm chest, and my legs snugly intertwined with his. So, of course, I should have expected something to go wrong. There was a loud crash in the living room; it sounded like the front window had exploded. The tinkling of glass echoed off Joseph’s floors and filtered down the hallway into our room. That moment reminded me of our first night together in the hotel. Andrew became a weight on top of me, his hand over my mouth, and his lips against my ear. “Be very quiet,” he whispered, his breath ruffling my hair. I nodded, and he removed his hand. Feet pounded against the floor outside our room, which made us jolt to our feet. There was another clatter, and Jules’s cries startled me. A gun went off, Jenna screamed, and Joseph shouted at someone. I didn’t even hesitate as I ran to the door and flung it open. Andrew didn’t try to stop me; I was a woman on a mission. My family was in trouble, and all I could think about was their safety. Jules’s cries became heart-wrenching screams—the terror pure. I couldn’t hear Jenna anymore, and my heart thudded so sadistically against my chest I was frightened it would rupture. Was Jenna okay . . . was Jules? Two more gunshots. I didn’t even duck; I raced down the hallway without a second thought. It was pitch-black in the house, so I instinctively forced my eyes to focus through the darkness so I could have a visual on what was transpiring. A gigantic man filled the hallway before me. “Get back Illuminator,” ordered Chris. His voice turned into a menacing snarl. “We have company.” Andrew trailed directly behind me, followed by Aiden and Patrick. They all started to address Chris, demanding to know what was going on. Chris, on the other hand, was too busy aggressively shoving us back from the evident peril in the living room. Suddenly, an unnatural growling noise emitted from the living room. Joseph’s TV slammed against the wall in front of Chris, burst open, and detonated out like a bomb. Glass shattered and flew in every conceivable direction, wire sprung free, and the frame of the old TV snapped into several pieces. Jules’s screams intensified with her alarm. Chris blocked Joseph’s door, in which Joseph banged against with abandon. I strained to shove Chris away from it, but, for all the good I did, I might as well have tried to raise the Titanic from the ocean. “Jules!” I shouted. “Joseph, is she okay?” The thuds against the door silenced. “Everyone’s fine!” he yelled in frustration. “Firen’s in here.” “Then what’s with the shooting?” “You’re a traitor,” boomed a voice from the living room. Joseph didn’t answer my question—his concentration must have turned to the commotion outside. “The only traitor I see,” growled Chris, “is you, Q.” Three lengthy, hushed, intense seconds lamented. And then the intruder, Q, and Chris collided, triggering the

whole house to rumble. The two Empyrean Guards fought with such tremendous force I wondered if the two would vaporize. Joseph’s once tidy living room turned into a disaster zone as the backlash of their collision made ripples of air fly out in all directions and hurl everything backwards. I stood in the archway of the hall in complete and absolute astonishment as I observed them wrestle. Their muscles were huge and glistened with sweat as they pummeled each other. They both spoke in a language I had never heard, but by their snarling tones, I didn’t want to know what they were saying. Ehno and Lucia gawked at the battle from the kitchen. Their room was on the other side of the house. Joseph was finally able to open his door, which had three bullet holes in the door handle that hung by a thread. I struggled to shake myself from sleep, as was everyone else it seemed, because we were all shell-shocked by the scene before us, completely motionless. Finally, Ehno and Lucia snapped out of the trance and tried to interfere with the fight, but it was as if the Guards had created a barrier around themselves, preventing us from helping. Every attempt had us soaring backwards with a sharp zap of magic. All we could do was stare on as spectators. It was unreal as I watched the events develop before my eyes. Joseph’s bedroom door slammed behind me, and I jumped. Shrieks vented from underneath, and I twisted around. “Jenna?” I screeched. “Jenna!” I flung myself against the door and tried to open it. It cracked a bit as I leaned into it, but I was pushed back with such an intense force of magic, Andrew and Joseph had to catch me as I flew backward to prevent me from falling between the two Guards as they tore through each other. Andrew, Patrick, and Joseph tried to open the door as the sound of glass shattering ricocheted off the wooden floors. There was a thud right at my feet, and I flinched. Ehno had been thrown from the fight behind me. He rose with fluid enmity vibrating off him in waves. The room was lit with magic as it swirled around us. Without thinking, my own aggression and fear sprung free from my confused state as electricity erupted from me. First I hurled it at the door, then out to the two Guards fighting. My body shook as wave after wave of electricity undulated around me. I couldn’t tell who was winning or losing in the Guards’ fight until Q rose above Chris, puffing his chest out victoriously. Chris rolled over and moaned on the floor, clutching his side with faltering breaths. I was powerless to help. My electricity infected every direction of the invisible obstacle between us, only to be volleyed back at me ten-fold. Q began to kick Chris over and over and over again, laughing hysterically. The Guard was clearly bonkers. Blood began to trickle from Chris’s mouth, and dripped sickeningly onto the wooden floor. Q picked up his foot and smashed it down right above Chris’s hips, triggering a chilling cracking noise. The only bone under Q’s foot was Chris’s spine. I was going to be sick. So much brutality—hate. The horrific sound of my mother’s neck cracking rang through my mind in a chorus of continuing echoes. All went silent for a few seconds as the door to Joseph’s room creaked open. No one stirred as we digested what just happened. Q spit on Chris, who didn’t move—not his chest or a jumping jugular. Nothing. What happened when an Empyrean Guard died? Did he go straight to the Ethereal Eternity? Or did he go to the Timeless Oblivion to be judged? Or was he immediately sent to the Perpetual Inferno? There were so many things I didn’t know about the Empyrean Guard, and right then Chris was my only link to them. I had been so focused on Chris’s still form that I didn’t notice Q had been glaring at me with his cold, dagger eyes. I involuntarily took a step back, desiring to be as far away from him as possible. Behind me, Joseph made a choking noise of despair. “Illuminator,” Q leered as I backed into the wall. “You cannot defeat us. Join us now and your Angels can live out eternity in the Ethereal Eternity. Doesn’t that sound nice?” He said it like I was a three-year-old, which pissed me off. “You’re wrong,” I said confidently. “I can kill you where you stand.” Against my better judgment, I stepped forward, being bold. I had my rage now, and my fury frequently brought out the best of my magic. “If you refuse to help us defeat the Ladies of Light, I will make sure every day you refuse, someone you love will die.” He paused, and a wicked grin crept up his face. “In the most horrific ways you could ever imagine.” I had no doubts with him. “Why don’t you take a step closer and say that to my face,” I threatened. My electricity manifested as it wrapped

around my body like a comforting blanket. “Gabby!” exclaimed Ehno from behind Q. “You don’t scare me, Illuminator.” Q stepped forward with no hesitation, though Andrew placed himself between us. “All you have are pretty lights.” He ignored Andrew in his condescending way, which only caused me to grow more furious. All rational parts of my brain left me as I rushed around Andrew and leapt forward to attack. My electricity sprung from my fingers like lightning bolts as I arched through the air. Q disappeared into thin air, and I tumbled across the floor, my head landing on Chris’s still chest. Q was gone, the calamity in the house the only reminder he had been there . . . and the tragedy that was Chris. My ire made a hasty retreat as so many other emotions submerged me. No one said a word, nor did anyone move as I rose up to kneel next to Chris. What could they say to fix this? If he hadn’t left the Empyrean Guard and come to us in the first place, this never would have happened. I placed my hands on either side of his cheeks and turned his head my direction. His face was detached and lifeless. Dead. I didn’t know Chris—not any more than the rest of the people in this room—but that didn’t stop the sorrow from creeping in, latching on, and sucking away any cheerfulness in my body. Death was a leech; no matter which side of the spectrum you were on, either dead or alive, it fed. It either acquired your soul, or would devour all your joyful emotions. So what if death was not the end? Sometimes it certainly felt that way. I cried as I held onto Chris’s face. I sobbed so hard I didn’t know if I would ever be able to stop. And even though I realized it was hopeless, I couldn’t stop myself from trying to heal him. I placed my forehead on his shoulder and wept as I became weaker and weaker. I tried my best to hold him to me, but he was gigantic, and my arms could barely cover the front of his chest. Still, I held on. I wasn’t quite sure if my Angels were still around me or not because it was so quiet, but then I felt Andrew gently caress a finger down the arm I had draped over Chris. I just couldn’t let go of him, doing that would mean it was real. But there was no saving him. So I just let my body drain of energy as I tried anyway. Andrew attempted to unlatch me from my death grip—and that was precisely what it was. I had seized death with my magical hooks, and demanded it to let Chris go. To let him have one more chance. And even though I knew the Gods would not help me, I begged. I was not below begging at this point. I became sleepy—really, really sleepy. My grip lost its strength, though Andrew was careful about not tugging too hard on me. Then I started to slip away . . . far away. Maybe this was all a dream and I’d wake up in Andrew’s arms with the sun shining. “It’s time to let go,” he said as he pried me away from Chris. I rose on shaky limbs and, in a dreamlike state, made my way to the door where Joseph stood in the archway, completely still and rigid. My heart dipped in my chest. “Jenna! Jules!” I cried, and rushed toward the door. 24 RADIANCE The tremor started in my fingertips, like the rumble of thunder after lightning has lanced across the sky. I gripped the doorframe so firmly that my knuckles turned white and wood splintered under my touch. The trembling spread with alarming speed through my nerves and attacked the rest of my body. Then it hit my heart, jerking me so fiercely that a contraction of power surged forward. Everyone around me felt it, but they said nothing. All was terribly silent. I stumbled forward, nothing more than a quivering jumble of flesh and bones as I fell to my knees. Right in the middle of a river of gold. Not red. Relief rushed me, then I felt guilty for it. But I had to know: where were Jenna and Jules? Firen. Her body was drenched in her golden blood, her eyes wide in shock as she stared at the ceiling. Her face looked more stark and fierce than I’d ever seen it. She blinked rapidly as golden tears trailed from her eyes and into her hair. Then those grey stormy eyes found mine, terrified. She was dying, but she was still alive. There was hope. Her hand trembled as she reached for me, her lips moving as she rasped incoherent words.

“Closet,” she choked. Joseph rushed forward, though Lucia was already there, snapping the doorknob off in her haste, as if it were made of tissue paper. Inside, Jenna had wrapped herself around Jules, protecting her with her body. Joseph, crying in relief, pushed Lucia away and surrounded Jenna and Jules with his protective arms, embracing them as Jenna cried into his shoulder, Jules quiet in shock. They were safe! Then Firen groaned, and I turned my attention back to her. Her body was growing colder. There were stab wounds that had already begun to heal before my eyes. It was the magical wounds that stayed stubbornly open, gushing their molten rivers. “What happened?” I gasped. “Empyrean . . . Guard . . .” My breath was ragged in my throat and my body was already preparing for what I knew I would do. She saved my sister and niece. For that, the only payment was to save Firen’s life, no matter how much of mine it drained. Andrew knelt beside me as if praying; one arm wrapped around my waist. Firen’s grip was going slack so I held on in steadfast. With attentive fingers, Andrew surrounded our grasped hands. His breath was warm in my ear as he spoke delicately, his words just a swirl of air. “I’m yours.” I inhaled another ragged breath as I felt my new power grow inside me. It was like a spring afternoon; storm clouds gathering in the sky, full of rain, lightning, and thunder. The intense energy contained inside, the insubstantial clouds, ready to slip through its grip and rain down on the ground to feed the ravenous plant life below. It held the life of all things on Earth. The storm curled inside me, churning with my power like a big spoon was stirring it, the friction irritating and angering the contents inside. Then I felt Andrew’s immense strength flow into my body, the gentle kisses he left on my neck leaving a fiery path of electricity. When it was too much, the cloud—the power— inside me burst and rained upon Firen. I threw my head back and screamed as it exited my body. It stormed a fierce spring rain, carving a path of destruction through my body, like a wild tornado, as our life-giving force showered onto Firen. I slumped forward as more and more of my life went into Firen. Andrew held me with firm, yet gentle, hands, lending me his strength. Firen arched her back off the ground as her wounds began to light with an intense glow, healing and sealing as if it had never happened. As the light went out like an exploded light bulb, my body went completely limp. Andrew swiftly caught me and scooped me up and into his arms. “I’ve got you,” he whispered against my forehead as he carried me from the room. How my mother had healed several people in one day was a mystery to me. I felt as though someone just tried to pull my skeleton from my body. “Need to see Jenna. Jules,” I rasped. “Shh,” Andrew shushed. “Relax. I’ll bring them in to see you after you’re lying down.” I barely nodded against his chest. The last thing I remembered was his lips lightly brushing over my forehead as he placed me gently on a bed. <> “Gabby?” Jenna’s tender voice coaxed me from my dreamless sleep. My eyes slowly opened to reveal Jenna’s brown curly hair framing her round, sweet face. Her hair was wet—she’d probably taken a shower to wash off the filth of the night. Her eyes were filled with unshed tears. At the sight of her, my heart began to ache something fierce. This was all my fault—Jenna would have been killed. And Jules. . . . Gods. I couldn’t even think about it. It was too awful. Too horrific.

“Where’s Jules?” I asked, looking around in the dark room. “She’s asleep—Andrew sung her to sleep. He really is wonderful, Gabby.” She attempted a smile, but it failed halfway there. “I’m so sorry,” I said faintly. “If it wasn’t for me . . .” Tears came to me then, rushing up like a flood and spilling over. “Forgive me.” Jenna shook her head, silently mouthing “don’t be silly” as she leaned forward and encircled me in her arms. Love radiated between us. I didn’t know where I’d be if I lost my sister. And I had no idea what I would do if it was my fault. “I love you,” Jenna cried, her body shaking with sobs as we gripped each other and held on for dear life. “I love you too,” I said, holding her closer, breathing her in. She smelled like home and cookies and love. “You’re amazing, you know that?” she asked, still gripping me with all her strength. I shook my head. “You are,” she continued, “you saved Chris and Firen! You’re a goddess.” “Chris?” I choked, crying into her shoulder. “Yes. He’s alive.” My heart exploded with joy at the news. Over Jenna’s shoulder I saw Andrew silhouetted in the doorway. “I’m afraid I have some bad news,” he said, his voice raw with emotion. He came forward in the dark room as Jenna and I pulled apart. He placed a comforting hand on Jenna’s shoulder. My heart did a quadruple pump at the thought of Joseph hurt. Or worse—dead. “You should check on Jules. I think I heard her stir.” I let out a breath. Jenna nodded solemnly and rose from the bed, giving me one last glance before she turned and exited. Firen was in the hallway and encircled Jenna’s shoulders with a slender arm, pulling her away from the door. At least Firen was feeling better. Andrew murmured a few Italian words and the door swung shut with a tiny click and a lamp turned on in the corner of the room, blinding me for a moment. We weren’t at Joseph’s anymore, we were at Aiden’s. The gaunt and pale look on Andrew’s face made my stomach roll with nausea. I sat up in the bed as he perched on the edge. I wanted to reach into his mind and pluck the thoughts right out of his head, but I knew I couldn’t do that. He needed time, and I’d try to be patient. “What is it?” I barely whispered, leaning forward and rubbing his back in soothing circles. His eyes fixated on the ground as he leaned forward, his elbows resting on his knees. Each of his actions made my anxiety spike. Who was it? What was it? Tears pricked my eyes, and I didn’t even know what was going on. I was feeling Andrew’s emotions wash over me like a hot, acidic bath. He put his head into his palms and rubbed roughly. “Andrew?” I murmured. “You’re scaring me.” He didn’t speak. I waited a few more minutes, the clock on the wall ticking loudly in the silence, my Angelic hearing picking it up twice as loud. I moved even closer to him, embracing him fully, and resting my head on his shoulder. “I’m yours,” I said and let my love envelop him. His shoulders started to shake. My heart literally felt like it was ripped in two. To see someone you love in so much pain—especially emotional pain that can’t be remedied—was the worst form of torture. At first, his sobs were quiet, but then they grew louder and more gut-wrenching. I was crying too, unable to take his obvious pain. I felt so helpless. I opened my mouth several times to try and form words that could help, but I wasn’t even sure why he was crying. Honestly? I wasn’t even sure I wanted to know at this point. I made sure to keep out of his mind, even though his emotions came through so loud and clear it made me breathless.

My fingers raked through his hair, pulling it from his fevered forehead. “Oh, Andrew. My heart is aching like it’s been torn in two. Won’t you tell me what it is? Please.” Ever so slowly, he lifted from his hands, our eyes meeting for the first time in what felt like a lifetime. “Ella . . .” he said, choked. His skin was covered in silver tears that I quickly wiped away with gentle fingers. He reached up, captured my hands, and clasped them between his. It looked like it took everything in him to keep it together. He swallowed thickly as he seized my eyes with his. “It’s . . . I don’t know how to tell you . . . Oh, Gods.” His face scrunched in pain as he tried to stop the onslaught of more tears. “If I could protect you from this I would. But I can’t.” “Please, Andrew, just tell me. My mind is wandering and every unimaginable thing has gone through my thoughts.” Was it my parents? Carmela? Leo? Luke? Who was it? Or what had happened? Every second I became more and more sick, and I stared at Andrew pleadingly. “It’s Eleanor, Gabriella.” He paused. “She . . . she was killed.” My heart sank through the floor and an invisible iron fist punched me square in the gut with the full force of a Mack truck barreling down the highway going a hundred miles an hour. “How?” I sounded strangled. Hell, I felt strangled. “Please, Ella. Don’t make me give you the gory details,” he begged. “Let me protect you as much as I can.” I shook my head, tears streaming down my face. “I . . . I need to know. What happened?” “She was ambushed by the Empyrean Guard. They . . . oh, this is so awful. They positioned her so she was sitting at the kitchen table . . .” His voice lowered to almost nothing. “They drained her . . . and poured her blood in a pitcher and glass cup and left it in front of her.” I gasped, horrified. It took several seconds for me to process his words. “How’d they find her?” “I don’t know,” he murmured and pressed his forehead against mine. “I just don’t know.” He sounded frustrated. My voice was tiny. “There was a message for me, wasn’t there?” “The same as what Q threatened,” he said faintly. “Oh, Gods. I don’t know what to do, Andrew,” I cried. He knew it was coming—the onslaught. I burst into tears as he held me to him, both of us holding on to the other and crying. The lamp flickered off. He pulled me down to the bed and wrapped himself around me, comforting me the only way he knew how. Hours passed and no one bothered us. Andrew informed me that Paolo was here and practically inconsolable. The thought just didn’t fit with the Stone Man I always thought him to be. I was still in total shock that Eleanor was dead, and it only made me hate the Empyrean Guard more. I loathed them with so much malice my thoughts bordered on murderous. “Andrew?” I whispered in the dark. “Yes?” “It’s time to fight back. No more planning or talking. No more waiting.” My voice was firm and held no room for argument. “I agree,” he said with conviction. “Has Sebastian found as many of the Shadow of the Sun as he could?”

“Indeed he has.” “Tell him it’s time. I’ll meet them in the cemetery at dawn.” “Done,” Andrew said. “He’s gathering them now.” “Thank you,” I murmured against his neck and placed a gentle kiss over his pulse. I trailed kisses up to his ear and breathed softly into it. He shivered. “I love you.” “And I, you.” He sighed softly. “And I, you.” He turned and engulfed me in his arms. “If I ever lost you . . .” His arms tightened. “You can’t think like that,” I said quietly, my ear against his chest. “You are in the center of all this violence. It’s hard not to think about—it’s a very real possibility that I could lose you.” His heart picked up its pace. “No, it’s not,” I argued. “If I die, I come back. I’m like a cat—I have eight lives left.” I smiled, the first one in what felt like years, when in reality it wasn’t even a whole day. Andrew’s chest shook as he chuckled softly, but it soon faded and his concerns hadn’t vanished with it. “I’ve known that pain, Ella. And that was before we bonded.” His muscles tightened around me. “I thought you were dead for weeks. Ehno had to drag me to your funeral because I was in such a state of shock. I had just shut down.” He went quiet on me, his body vibrating tension. “You died on me too,” I barely whispered. We were both quiet for a time. It was Andrew who broke the silence. “I’ve lived for almost four-thousand years, and it wasn’t until you that I understood the true meaning of love. What it means to give yourself completely to someone. My first instinct was to protect you—as was Ehno’s and Lucia’s, but when I touched you for the first time I knew there was something different about you. There was no denying or fighting what you were to me.” His fingers brushed through my hair gracefully. “I knew who my kindred soul was for exactly a week before you died, Ella. One week.” From the outside, it sounded insane—you know someone for a week and you know they are your kindred soul? The one for you, and only for you, for the rest of eternity? It sounded silly and lame, but I felt it too. I almost died fighting to get him back. You don’t just do that for anybody. “It almost killed me,” he admitted, choked. “I wished for death every day so I could be with you again. I can’t imagine what it would be like now—after everything we’ve been through. And I certainly couldn’t imagine it from Aiden’s or Paolo’s perspective.” Oh, wow. He was right. There was no word ever created that could describe that kind of pain. It was decided then: the Empyrean Guard would pay. And dearly. “I’m sorry,” I breathed. His arms tightened around me, his nose in my hair. “There’s nothing to forgive,” he said softly. “Now sleep, Ella. Dawn’s fast approaching and you need to recover from healing.” <> The sun was just peeking over the horizon, the grass of the cemetery shimmering with frost. Shadows gathered between the white tombstones that dotted the glazed grass. There were hundreds of them—possibly a thousand. Sebastian had done his job, and done it well. Andrew, Ehno, Lucia, Patrick, and Aiden stood at my back. Birds chirped merrily as the Shadows waited for me to speak. “I’m sure you’ve all heard the rumors,” I began, my voice resonating through the Shadows. “They’re true.”

Murmurs broke out through the crowd until it grew to a roaring of voices. I gave them a few minutes to settle down before I spoke again. “I’m Gabriella—the Illuminator.” Several Shadows backed away in fear. “I’m not here to kill you,” I reassured with a chuckle. A few faces in the crowd looked relieved. “There is an enemy attacking Angels, and though you all must be wondering why you should help in any way, you should understand that you were once Angels too. The Empyrean Guard will not stop with us—they will come after you and kill you one-by-one. “So here’s where I come in.” I pointed to one of the Shadows nearby and beckoned him forward. He looked at the Shadows beside him before stepping toward me, apprehension marked all over his charcoal-black skin. His fiery eyes, though fierce as they might be, actually appeared frightened. “I won’t hurt you,” I promised with a small smile. When he finally stood before me, I placed a hand on his shoulder. His muscles twitched under my touch, but he didn’t back away. I turned him around and circled him so the other Shadows could see me. With barely a bat of an eyelash, I sent my powers into the Shadow behind me who inhaled sharply. I bowed my head as one of his memories slammed into my head forcefully. It was as I had feared—it was awful and bloody and full of death. This was just one Shadow—who knew what it would be like when I Illuminated all the Shadows with their worst memories rushing through me. Could I handle it? It didn’t really matter—I’d do it anyway because it was right. It was why I was here. My destiny and all. As soon as the memory played out, I stared up at the crowd who were stunned into silence, practically frozen like statutes. When I turned around to see the Shadow behind me, he was an Angel. His eyes full of golden tears. He was remembering—finally pushing through all the lies and magic, and seeing the truth. And the truth, no matter how much easier it would be if it were sugarcoated, was always better served up with no lies. That was what I offered these Shadows: the truth. “This,” I addressed to the Shadows, “is why I’m here.” Cheers rang out. Andrew came to my side as I grinned at the Shadows’ joyous faces. The Halos would be reunited with the Guardians and we would have our army again. We would not be alone in this fight anymore. Without preamble, I let my power, this essence in me that grew stronger and stronger every day, explode out of me in waves, reaching out and enveloping the Shadows around me. Silence fell like an iron curtain. Abruptly, hundreds of memories from the Shadows flew into me like a blow to the gut. Andrew’s arm quickly wrapped around my waist as I fell forward. “Whoa,” he said softly, lowering me to the ground slowly. There was a horror movie playing in my mind, except I knew it was real. These things had happened. Everything from gruesome murder to gut-wrenching heartache. Each memory was accompanied by their feelings. It was overwhelming. Grief. Death. Blood. Wars. Who would have ever known there was that much sadness in the world? That much darkness and evil? That much anguish? “It’s too much,” I cried out as I gripped Andrew as if he were a lifeline, my only means to come back to the real world. Andrew responded, but I was far too gone to understand his softly spoken words. I took in one last shuddering breath before I passed out, the blackness of unconsciousness soothing me. I was roused minutes later by Andrew lightly shaking my shoulder. I woke with such a start that I jumped up and startled poor Andrew. Spinning around and around, I noticed there wasn’t a Shadow in sight. I was surrounded by Angels—beautiful, real Angels. My eyes pricked with tears at the sight, and through Andrew’s mind, I knew they had reconnected with the Halos, their leaders. The sun was on its way to climbing high in the sky. Today was going to be magnificent.

“Guardians,” I greeted loudly. “I asked Sebastian to bring you all to this part of the cemetery today to ask something of you. All around you are soldiers and leaders who have fallen in battle. They were honorable in their time of service, and are now honored in death.” My voice lowered and I looked down. “This may very well be your fate. Death.” I inhaled a deep breath and stared back up at the hundreds of Angels. “Even knowing this may be your ending, I’m still going to ask this of you—not command you. Plus, put your past behind you. Your time as Shadows was a lie— I offer you the truth. Guardians, will you fight with me? Will you fight against our enemies that threaten to terminate us? Will you join the Halos once again? Will you lay your life down to protect the Angels and all that is right?” There was a moment of awed silence before cheers erupted, a thousand times louder than before. Whistles and chanting and clapping. Several minutes passed before they all became silent again. “Welcome back, Guardians.” I grinned widely at them. “I’ll leave you with the Halos to regroup. It’s time we prepare for battle.” 25 EVE We all like to think that it will never happen to us. But it does. All our lives, the world continues to go on no matter if there is life or death. Sometimes death surprises us, and sometimes you know it’s coming, but no matter what, your heart always aches. I didn’t know Eleanor that well, and I wasn’t expecting her to be the one who died. Maybe her supposed immortality led to the surprised state I was in.. Even though the Empyrean Guard had been killing Angels. Regardless, death, no matter how it was dealt, was never easy. In my eyes, Eleanor seemed like a mother figure to the Elders. She was a woman that I wanted to get to know, a mentor of sorts. And now I would never have that chance. It was the missed opportunity that drove it home for me—her death. That was when I decided I would not take no for an answer again. All the Shadows were Illuminated now, and it was still not enough to fight off the Empyrean Guard. I was going back to the Abyss. I hadn’t realized it, but Andrew had been watching me for quite some time. He knew something was going on inside my head. Not because he could read my thoughts, but because he knew me that well. Or it might have been the fact I’d been staring at a TV that wasn’t even on for over an hour. I turned to him and bit my lip. “You think I’m crazy don’t you?” Andrew smiled gently and scooted closer. “Well, yes.” He smiled wider. “But not because of your thoughts.” He chuckled. “I meant what I said before, about believing in you. So I’ll do everything you ask me to.” The things that came out of Andrew’s mouth should not surprise me anymore, but his faith in me—so unwavering —always made me wonder if I was in some strange dream. My mind immediately went to the tattoo on my stomach, and I hoped the costly forfeiture didn’t mean I would lose a part of my soul. Because that part could be Andrew, and how could I lose him? Andrew’s eyes danced between mine, reading not only my mind, but also my facial expressions. His small smile vanished as he moved even closer to me. His gentle fingers sweetly caressed my cheek, and then he placed a single finger under my chin and lifted my mouth to his. This kiss was different than all the others I had ever shared with him. There was fear in this kiss, and so many other emotions I was afraid to swallow. He had put his thoughts on that subject into the back of his mind, and, now that I was thinking about it, he couldn’t hide his fear anymore. And the crazy thing was, it wasn’t fear for himself, it was fear for me. He had seen Aiden after losing Abelie—he had seen things Aiden had kept from me—but now the flashes of everything that Aiden went through invaded my mind. His screaming, his begging the Gods, his shriveling up into a ball on the floor and demanding the Gods to take him too. It wasn’t only the outside struggle I witnessed either—it was also the internal struggle he couldn’t hide from the other Halos. The words “half my soul is missing” does not even begin to describe how Aiden felt. Every time his heart beat it ached so fiercely sometimes he thought he would die—and to his disappointment he never did. That was what Andrew feared would happen to me if I lost him. He knew that pain once when I died, but we weren’t bonded then. Now, the thought of him losing me hurt so much he couldn’t fathom the pain.

“I refuse to lose you.” My voice was so soft, like a sigh. Andrew placed his forehead against mine. “I’d like to say you would never lose me, Ella.” His beseeching eyes closed. “But a time may come when you must choose humanity over me.” Before I could speak, he placed a finger over my lips, and his eyes opened once again. “I know we’ve discussed this, but I need you to know it’s not my life you need worry about. If I die, I’ll be okay. I’ll be fine; I’ll be sent to the Ethereal Eternity. Heaven, Ella.” He paused for a second. “Heaven,” he whispered ever so softly. “I have to be honest with you, Andrew. I will be selfish on this one thing. I have given myself—everything I have. Am I meant to continue to give it all away? Don’t I deserve this one thing—don’t I deserve you?” He pulled away from me and sighed. “You deserve everything your heart desires.” “I will not lose you; I will do everything in my power to keep us together. There is no force in the entire universe that could keep us apart. You remember that, Andrew, because I don’t want to feel that fear from you anymore,” I said fervently. He nodded slightly, though I could still read apprehension on his face. I refused to listen to his thoughts at that moment; he deserved privacy until he could organize them. I mean, there has to be some kind of psychic rules to follow, right? Proper etiquette, perhaps? “I’m going to talk with my father,” I said. “Good idea.” I rose to my feet, leaned over and placed a tender kiss on Andrew’s lips, and walked down the hallway to Aiden’s room. I knocked. The door opened slowly and my father peeked his head out. “Gabriella, is everything okay?” “Yeah,” I said. “I just need to talk to you for a minute. Do you have time?” “Yeah, yeah.” He opened the door wider. “Come on in.” I strode in, sat on the bed, and crossed my legs. “Dad . . . Sebastian’s taken all the Guardians back to headquarters. I’ve got a few things I need to take care of here, but I need you to go ahead and go to headquarters. Do you mind?” He brushed his hand through his dark brown hair and fidgeted. “No, of course I don’t mind. Is there something in particular you want me to do while I’m there?” he asked. This time it was me who fidgeted and ran my hand through my hair. “You know, Dad, I’m not really good with the whole ‘military’ thing—that’s more Joseph and Director Morris’s gig. And yours. So if you could just take point while you’re there . . . you know . . . keep everyone in line until I arrive. Or perhaps . . .” I waved my hand in the air to try and get him to finish my sentence for me. He finally picked up on what I was trying to do and said, “I guess I could make sure they’re all battle ready, if that’s what you mean?” “Yes!” I exclaimed. “That would be perfect. Patrick’s already there with the CIA.” “All right, when do you want me to leave?” I could tell that just the thought of being useful right now was helping my father overcome his grief. He had something to do now—a purpose. “After dinner,” I answered. <> Magic, I’d come to learn, was more of a force of will than anything. Spoken words could form spells, as could

thoughts, but really it was about what the Angel willed. That was how we were able to keep Aiden’s house a secret —we willed it invisible to hide it from the Empyrean Guard’s view. Though this required an inordinate amount of energy, there were several who helped with the spell at any one time. But now the house was empty besides Chris, Firen, Ehno, Andrew, Aiden, and Lucia. Jenna and Jules had been sent back to my house in Oregon for safety reasons—which Firen wasn’t happy about. She’d become fiercely attached to them, but knew this was the only way until the situation in Italy had been neutralized. I couldn’t handle another attack like the one at Joseph’s. “I’m going back to the Abyss,” I told my Angels as we gathered in the dining room around our dinner. I could have called this our last super before our battle. They protested over mashed potatoes, green beans, and steak. “The Angels need you here right now,” exclaimed Lucia. I glanced at Chris, who barely fit at the table, then back to the others. “We’ve seen the Empyrean Guard’s strength first hand. How are we going to defeat them without the help of the Fallen?” I challenged. “I’ll go back,” offered Firen. “They’re right—you should stay here. If any of the Fallen Angels could convince them to come back to Earth and fight, it’s me.” Before I could protest, Andrew gripped my hand and peered at me with his piercing gold eyes. “It’s a good idea,” he said. I nodded. “Thank you, Firen.” My voice was tight—I appreciated her assistance, but still felt like it should be me who asked for their help. “You can’t do everything, Ella.” Andrew’s thumb rubbed over my knuckles. He was right. The rest of the evening we strategized for the battle that we were about to walk into. Later, Andrew held my hand as he led me upstairs to the bedroom we’d shared last time we were here together. I lounged on the comfy couch under the large, arched window. “I have something for you,” Andrew said as he approached me. “It’s not my birthday,” I objected. “No, but tomorrow’s Christmas, and I didn’t want you to think I forgot,” he said calmly. “Oh. I forgot.” I closed my eyes and laughed. Andrew joined in. “I think you have enough on your mind.” He held out a tiny box with a red ribbon wrapped around it. “This is for you.” He placed it in my palms. “Andrew . . .” “Open it,” he said excitedly. I sighed, drew the ribbon free, and pulled the top off. Inside was a silver necklace with the Halo symbol dangling from it. It was small and delicate and absolutely perfect. He moved closer to me and put his lips to my ear. “I’ll always be your Guardian Angel,” he breathed, making me shiver. “It’s beautiful. Help me put it on,” I urged and placed the box in his hands eagerly. His graceful fingers slid across my neck to pull my hair away, then he lifted the necklace and drew it around my neck, clasping the back. When I saw his face again, his eyes were maroon and hungry. I flung my arms around his neck and ravenously kissed his lips. He held my face with tender hands as I straddled him on the couch. “Thank you,” I said when his lips trailed across my jaw, down my neck, and found their way to my collarbone. I moaned and grabbed his hair, yanking his lips back to mine. He echoed my moan. In a swift motion, he wrapped

his arms around my body and stood. I clung to his body, my legs circling his waist, as he lowered me to the bed. I pulled his shirt over his head, and he yanked the buttons free from mine. Soon we were completely undressed and melting into each other with fervent kisses and heated caresses. I arched into his body as he entered me, exalting in the sensation of being with my kindred soul. Tomorrow won’t ruin what we have, I promised myself. We will not fail. 26 BATTLE I knew that waking up in Andrew’s arms would be the only good thing that would happen today. Sleep evaded me most of the night, but eventually exhaustion kicked in. My hands shook all morning with nerves as I dressed because today we would seek out the Empyrean Guard for the first time. We’d also be dealing with the Ladies of Light. To say I wasn’t terrified would be a lie. Of course I was, as I should be. One look at Chris, who has to duck to stand inside most rooms, and anyone would feel the same. His fists were like steal hammers, and his arms were as big around as logs. I considered giving some inspirational speech to the Angels, or a pep talk, but nothing I could say would make this any easier. Headquarters buzzed with adrenaline as we prepared for Chris to punch a hole in the Ladies of Light’s barrier. The plan was to enter into Avella as stealthily as possible, help the humans snap out of their magic-induced enslavement, and move as many of them out of the city as we could. We already had a strategy to help the humans regain their minds, but the rest would be tricky. The night before, a team of CIA agents had entered Avella —thanks to Chris—and witnessed our most staggering of problems. The Ladies of Light had taken up headquarters in Avella’s town hall, using their “human shield” as Chris had warned us. And around the humans were the Empyrean Guard. There wouldn’t be much stealth involved in our execution—we’d have to attack this situation head on. Though I knew the Empyrean Guard didn’t harm humans, Chris had made it perfectly clear this was an issue they’d discussed before he went rogue. For being so old, they weren’t a patient bunch. That was the only reason why we would be quick with our implementation of the plan. My heart ached for those humans who’d been enslaved and were now threatened by these giant men. We had to get them out of there before things went downhill any further. “Where’s Firen?” I asked Andrew as we divided the Guardians into smaller units. He shook his head, eyes downcast. “What if they don’t show? What if only Firen returns?” Anxious, who me? “Ella, calm down. Lucia’s supposed to open the portal every five minutes for the full hour; there’s ten minutes left. There’s still time,” he soothed. Five minutes passed, and Lucia opened another portal. No one came through. Another five minutes passed, and again Lucia formed a portal. No luck. We were out of time—and short a legion of Fallen Angels. My heart pounded in my chest as we made our way toward the barrier. Director Morris worked with the Italian government to have the area cleared before we arrived. This was a massive effort considering Angels were now a known being. People from all around the world had traveled to Italy just to glimpse the dark Angels and their supernatural barrier. Chris marched ahead of us as we arrived to the marked line the scientists had made. He probed the air with his massive hand until the blood red electrical current shot from the middle of where he touched. We all watched in anticipation and anxiety. Once we crossed the line, the danger would begin. And worse, there was a possibility we’d be trapped inside if the hole didn’t hold. On the other side, we’d all separate from each other as we implemented our plan. The CIA would stay on the outside to help rush any humans to safety. Joseph was in charge of that unit, which helped me relax considerably. I couldn’t handle him being hurt again—not after watching his insides spill and bleed out in a crimson pool. Andrew reached for me and pulled me into his arms. I held onto him as if I’d never see him again—and I had to admit to myself that it was a real possibility I’d lose people I loved today. For the few seconds we hugged, our

hearts beat as one against each other. He backed away and held me at arms length. “I love you, Ella. Remember that,” he stated with such sincerity I had to swallow back tears. “I love you too,” I choked. He opened his mouth to say something else, but I held my hand up to stop him. “Don’t. If you say anything else, it’s going to sound like goodbye, and this isn’t goodbye.” He nodded once and kissed my forehead. Chris’s arm wound back, coiled muscle in his log-like arms straining, as he prepared to punch. When his fist connected with the barrier, crimson electricity spread out wildly across it. The sound it made was like lightning striking right next to us, making the ground rumble. He hit the barrier over and over again as he smashed his way through. With each snap of his arm, it rippled like waves crashing onto shore. Blow after blow echoed around us, an intense drumming war cry. As soon as the hole was sizeable enough for us to enter, Aiden, Ehno, and Andrew dispatched their Guardian units, separating and spreading out inside the barrier with fluid motions of graceful stealth. Lucia and Sebastian followed with their own units. Chris and I were the last ones through the hole. He’d requested to stay by my side to protect me, and no one protested. Chris had been different with me ever since I saved his life—gentle, somehow, but fiercely protective too. On the other side, we watched as the barrier knitted and weaved back together like a complicated wicker basket. The Ladies of Light undoubtedly already knew someone had penetrated their barriers. I inhaled deeply before stepping forward. We rushed through the deserted streets toward the center of town. The eerie quiet reminded me of one of those apocalyptic movies. The kind of movie where the hero knows that the unnerving quiet is the sign before the world was about to explode in a magnificent burst of chaos. However, there was no comparison between the movies and real life. It left a chill on my skin, goose bumps on my forearms, and a rush of energy up my neck made the hairs stick straight up. My steps slowed as the first signs of battle reverberated with an explosion so fierce it shattered the windows on the buildings around me. Smoke wafted in the air from the center of town, and I immediately began to run. Andrew’s thoughts invaded my mind. The Guardians used their magic to free the humans of enslavement, as the Empyrean Guard took the opportunity to attack them. It was mass hysteria at the center of town—the war had finally begun. My mind raced with a mixture of emotions, but one thing was crystal clear: I had to fly to my Angels. I grasped Chris’s forearm, apologized, and took flight with strong, fluid strokes of my wings. Wind rushed around me as I ascended into the sky. “Illuminator!” Chris shouted desperately from below. “Come back!” “Town hall,” I yelled. I had to reach my Angels before any of them were killed. The closer I flew, the crazier it became. People darted through the decimated streets, crying, screaming, and many of them rioting. I dropped down as I closed in on Andrew’s location, running as soon as my feet touched the ground. The Empyrean Guard had been taken by surprise, so the Guardians only had to fend off a few of them for now. The others rushed humans to safety through several homes linked together. Behind them, Lucia had formed a portal in a winterized flower garden. Cries rang out as more and more humans filtered through the homes and into the portal. They were confused and petrified, but Joseph would be there to help soothe them as soon as they were freed. “Why didn’t we use a portal to bypass the barrier?” I had to shout at Lucia to be heard. I guided more people toward the portal. Over her shoulder, Lucia said, “I tried; it didn’t work. But I’m not having a problem now that I’m on the other side.” She shrugged. I peered down an alleyway between two of the homes. I watched as Guardians applied their magical skills of popping in and out of existence to battle with the Empyrean Guard. They moved with a smooth elegance I’d only ever seen on the Matrix. I was impressed by their abilities; it was clever of them and made them almost impossible to catch. People were walking aimlessly through the streets, disoriented. Between the dazed were the screaming. I couldn’t even imagine what it would have been like to be a prisoner in your mind while someone controlled your every action. I, too, would probably run screaming through the streets the second I had clarity. Gunfire echoed down the street as rioters became more hostile and aggressive. Everyone was coated in soot—

just like the city. “I’ll be back,” I said to Lucia. “It’s a little crazy out there, and the Guardians are a tad busy.” I didn’t wait for a response as I dashed down the alley. I turned a corner and was met with a disaster zone. Between the fighting and rioters, the streets had turned into a certifiable warzone. It rained ashes; little grey snowflakes fluttering down to coat the world in gloom. The lines between my two lives were vanishing before my eyes, like vapor wafting and disappearing into space. The human and Angelic worlds crashed into each other in a splash of blood. A mixture of magic and gunfire echoed and reflected from every surface of the city. Pillars of smoke rose into the air in dark swirls as the wind blew it farther inland. I could see everything I’d worked for slipping through my fingers as easily as water would. Draining . . . draining away as I stood motionless on the street. I wasn’t trained for battle—I wasn’t prepared for this. How was I supposed to protect everyone? More Empyrean Guards flickered into view, filling the streets with their massive, muscled bodies. Dressed in ancient warrior battle ware, they unsheathed swords as they charged down the street toward the fighting Guardians. I instantly went into action. Powerful magic flew from my fingertips and rebounded off countless surfaces as I thrust protective spells at Guardians fighting Guards. My Angels weren’t far, but they had their own troubles. I was on my own. BOOM! A building next to me exploded; shards of splintered wood and bits of plaster and rock hurtled toward me like tiny missiles. I threw up another protective spell and caught the debris before it slammed into me. A ball of fire rose from the center of the destroyed building until it consumed all the oxygen it could. Even in the midst of the scariest event of my life, my movements slowed. Or maybe everyone around me did. Bright sparks from spells skidded across the pavement near my feet. Gunshots rang out and caused the hearing in my left ear to go a little fuzzy. Or was it from the explosion? More buildings caught fire as people fought in the streets, several filthy with dried blood. Some covered with fresh. The combination of sorrow and war stirred within me, producing a new emotion. My heart ached at the scene and my body shook with a fury I didn’t know I could possess. It captured me with an iron fist and twisted and pulled at my insides. My anger was hungry. And that hunger cultivated and warped into a severe, unnatural urge to kill. There was no Phantom inside me, no corruption of my body. It was my fury that wanted to devour the Ladies of Light for their cruelty. It wanted to slice, dice, and ravage the Empyrean Guard for their plans to eradicate the world of Angels. Deep down, no matter the veiled, overwhelming emotions, I wanted my rage to take over. This was more than war; it was genocide. And there was no way I would let them get away with it. I was tired of losing those I loved. Tired of fearing for my Angels’ lives. What was it going to take? How much more would I have to lose? A man behind me shouted in Italian for me to duck. Luckily my reflexes were quicker than a normal humans’ because, the second I dropped to the ground, gunfire sprayed inches above my head. With my fingers in my ears, I glanced up to see who the gunman had aimed at. One of the Empyrean Guards had just rounded the corner of the burning building, his eyes trained on me with an uncomfortable intensity. It was effortless for him to pull a sword from his belt and swivel it back and forth in a blinding motion. The bullets ricocheted off the metal with little clangs and sparks. I narrowed my eyes at him as I let go of my ears and pressed my palms into the dirty ground. Rocks, broken glass, and other debris lodged in my skin as I pushed my weight forward. He would not win. I threw my hand behind me along with a spell to stop the bullets and sent the guy flying backwards into the building where I knew Ehno would stop his momentum. Then I slammed the door between us. Guardians were still trying to herd them toward Lucia’s portal. I rose to my feet to face the Empyrean Guard. There was one thing I learned about these giant men: they feared me. They feared me more than the Ladies of Light with their city of slaves, more than the Halos and the Guardians, more than the wrath of the Gods. To them I was a legend. A prophecy come to fruition. And that scared them. I scared them. It was Q. My stomach plummeted to the ground, and I had to swallow back my hatred for this—this thing that tried to kill Chris! He showed no expression on his face; his emotions hidden behind a mask of hostility. That was fine with me. He could be as hostile as he wanted to be—it would make it easier to fight him. Two Guardians

appeared on either side of me, their faces covered in soot. Andrew sent them to me. “You could send a million of your disgraceful Angels and never defeat us,” said Q. His voice was cold and calculating. Not even a tremor leaked, but it didn’t have to. His eyes told a different story. One of the Guardians snarled, and I threw up my hand in a gesture that said: “wait.” “Speaking of disgrace,” I said smoothly, “where are the rest of the Guard? Dead? Afraid?” I laughed coldly. No more nice Gabriella; the gloves were coming off. “Or are you too concerned with picking off innocent Angels to notice? You”—I pointed at him, my finger stabbing the air—“are the disgraceful one.” “Hah-hah,” boomed Q without humor. “No one is innocent.” “Perhaps you’re right. Or maybe you’re wrong.” Power pulsed just beneath the surface of my skin, an electrical current of vitality. I was glowing again, exactly like I had when I Illuminated the Shadows. Lustrous with a side of raw strength. “But I do know one thing . . .” I trailed off, a smirk growing on my face. Q’s eyebrows rose in question. “I’m definitely not innocent.” My smirk had developed into something sinister. Pure energy exploded out of me and slammed into the Guard. His eyes grew wide as the fury of my magic blasted him backward. His back struck the corner of the building with a bone-crunching thud. I didn’t move forward or attack again; I only watched as the Guard leapt to his feet in a blindingly fast movement. “Let’s not play games, Illuminator. You need us just as much as we need you.” He moved his hands as if showing off his biceps would make me change my mind. “No. I’m pretty sure I don’t need you or anything from you. But you’re right about one thing.” I chuckled with actual humor. “You do need me. You’re lucky I don’t relish murder like you do, or you’d already be dead. You won’t kill me —you couldn’t kill me even if you tried. I’m stronger than you. More powerful.” I stepped forward, crossing the empty street littered with debris. “And if you were smart, you’d go back with your tail between your legs.” “We’re not going anywhere,” a voice behind me seethed. I whirled to see another Empyrean Guard. If I was being honest with myself, their height and undeniable strength intimidated me, but I was so infuriated I was able to push the thought away. “You can come with us willingly, or we can do this the hard way,” said another. I twirled around like a ballerina as I took in the Guards that surrounded me. They continued to flicker into existence until there were more than three, ten; more than a hundred. The Empyrean Guard had an army more vast than I had ever realized. I swallowed thickly and my palms began to sweat. Don’t show fear. Do not show fear, I commanded myself. You have the upper hand—they said as much when you eavesdropped in the Divine Library. I instinctively reached out mentally for Andrew, but I was too late. Several Guards had descended upon him and the Guardians, and they were overcome. I cried out for them, distressed, and the psychic bond between us vanished. One of the Guards to my right laughed, and I jerked around, chest heaving. This was what I had dreaded all along: if I gave myself to Andrew he would be susceptible to the Guards. I hated that I had been spot-on about this; there was nothing I desired more than to be mistaken. The Guard parted, and two of them carried an unconscious Andrew between them, his feet dragging on the pavement. His dark hair fell over his eyes as his head lolled forward, swinging back and forth, lifeless. His blue Tshirt and jeans were painted in his silver blood, metallic and shimmering as it caught the light. My stomach rolled at the sight and nausea had my throat contracting. A part of me wanted to curl into the fetal position and die, the other part wanted to lash out in bloodthirsty violence. I screamed over and over in my head for him to answer me, but there was no response. He was blank—something that had never happened, even in sleep. If it wasn’t for the pulse at his throat, I would have thought him dead.

“No,” I whispered in disbelief as one of the Guardians placed a hand on my shoulder in comfort. There was no gesture that would take away the sickening feeling in my body. In my heart. “Oh yes, Illuminator,” said Q cruelly. “If you don’t help us stop the Ladies of Light, we’ll take your kindred soul instead. Or do you not believe me? Didn’t you receive the message I left for you?” Air left my lungs, and it hurt to suck in another breath. Eleanor’s face flashed in my mind, and a tear leaked down my cheek. I was struck silent. The sounds of the battle had diminished—or I just couldn’t focus on anything but Andrew’s limp form. So still . . . so quiet. Another tear trailed down my face and soaked into my lips. He would not be my costly forfeiture. 27 VIOLENT TEMPEST The sky rapidly darkened, and everyone glanced up to see why. My heart erupted as it pumped with undiluted vigor in my chest, and my lungs expanded as I inhaled a raspy gasp. That darkness was a sinuous, undulating cloud of obsidian wings descending upon us. It was the Legion of Fallen Angels, so striking and magnificent I wanted to snatch the first one I lay eyes on and plant a kiss on his or her lips! I nearly cried out in elation, rejoicing over the probable victory their support would provide us. Halos, Guardians, and the Fallen filled the streets and stood so close to the Empyrean Guards that snarls of fury escaped their lips as if they were cats in the wild—one pride against the other. Aiden landed beside me, bent to one knee, and released from his palm a torrent of fire that raced between our feet to form a protective circle. He stood and placed a tentative hand on my lower back, leaning in to whisper in my ear. “The Fallen have them surrounded.” His words should have provided comfort, but the Guards still held my kindred soul prisoner. My eyes landed on Andrew through the flickering flames, his midnight hair, dusty with soot, fluttered in the wind. These Guards were unlike anything I’d ever seen. Swift, fast, and virtually unkillable. Giants among men. The biggest question was no longer who feared whom the most, but who had the superior threat. And right now I wasn’t sure. “Now,” said Q, unperturbed, “you have something we need, and we have something you need. Would you sacrifice his life just to defy us?” What kind of options were those? Help them stop the Ladies of Light so they could exterminate the world of Angels, or let them kill Andrew? Bile rose in my throat, burning all the way up like an acidic bubble. My elation vanished as I glanced back at Andrew, limp and unmoving. “What, no witty response? No cunning remarks?” Q goaded. Flames ravenously devoured the air between us, and my body gravitated to the defined boundaries of their quivering fervor. It was as if Andrew had compelled me, drawing me closer with an iron chain bound around my waist. He was mere feet from me, yet so far away. The distance was a vast field of landmines. The Empyrean Guard who held Andrew’s motionless body grinned savagely, relishing in my distress more than one should. I stared into his shadowy eyes and allowed my emotions to illustrate the copious degree of honest agony this truthfully produced. And vehemence. “Gabriella,” Aiden warned from behind. “What are you doing?” I stepped closer to the inferno until the heat nearly set my skin a flame. I was numb to the physical pain. If my anger was hungry before, it was now an unquenchable beast. So over zealous to clamp its teeth into the first person who held their hand out, like a rabid dog. “You’re a monster,” I growled in a harsh whisper. I glared at the Guard with the bursting intensity of my violent gaze, scrutinizing his cruel grin. “You’re supposed to be the noble one, and this is how you act? You savor my pain like a juicy steak right off the grill?” It all came out through gritted teeth. “You take pleasure in this brutality? You disgust

me.” His smile faded as I relentlessly threw daggers with my eyes. I opened my mouth to speak again when whispers rippled through the Empyrean Guard in a swell of revulsion. “Traitor,” floated on the ash-ridden breeze. Chris strolled up beside me, and his massive form threw a shadow over me. His determined blue eyes checked me over. “Are you hurt?” I shook my head. “Good. Don’t run off again.” His voice was firm and final, but concern laced his words. I nodded my head once. Chris’s forehead wrinkled as he examined my face before turning his attention to the Guards. He scowled at them and folded his arms, his eyes transforming to icy blue. Biceps the size of tree trunks flexed as his hands made mallet-sized fists at his sides. “This isn’t what we’re about,” he said flatly in his deep voice. The Guards who detained the unmoving Andrew glanced at each other, and then back at Chris. Many emotions flashed on their faces until they settled on nonchalance—expressionless faces and a shrug of shoulders. “There’s no we,” the one on the right said as he gestured between him and Chris. The Guard’s hair was a tangle of greasy tendrils, and a scar marred the right side of his face, crafting a more gruesome appearance as it pulled his lip up into an eternal leer. “There’s us, and then there’s you, Traitor!” the other snarled, jerking Andrew roughly between them, causing his head to shift so I could see where the cut had been on his forehead. It had healed, but the glistening hue of his blood stained the reminder into his flesh. I began to glow with power again, my skin burning silver through the light. “The only traitors I see here are you,” I retorted. All eyes jerked down to me, instantly making me feel like a dwarf. There was a slight curling up of Chris’s lips at my words. Ever since I saved his life, he’d been a faithful servant to our cause and me. A groan caught my attention as Andrew’s head moved. It required every fiber of my being not to sprint through the insatiable flames and go to him. His thoughts echoed through my head, and it was the sweetest sensation in the world. The emptiness faded, but concern burst through me. He was disoriented, but, through his perplexed and befuddled state, one name was clear: mine. Play dead, I thought to Andrew. He instantly grasped the situation he was in and went limp in the Guards’ arms. He deserved an Oscar for his performance; if it hadn’t been for our bond, his feigning unconsciousness would have fooled me. “Such a weakling,” Scar Face said with a delighted chuckle. “Shut up.” I took two steps forward until I was outside the protective circle of trembling flames. The fire was now cool to the touch, but I knew in an instant it would burn anyone Aiden decided he didn’t want passing through. Don’t believe anything I’m about to say, I thought to Andrew. I peered over my shoulder at my father, hopeful he’d forgive me for what I was about to do—which would probably cause him to have a heart attack. I drew my dagger from my back; the metal blazed under my touch, as if it sensed my energy. “Here’s the deal,” I said to Q, facing him. “Let Andrew go free or . . .” I lifted my chin and positioned the dagger to slice my own throat. Gasps rang out on both sides. Voices of protests mixed together. “You wouldn’t dare!” Q bellowed, his jaw clenching. “Wouldn’t I?” I laughed bitterly. “If you take Andrew from me I will have lost my true love. It would be the same as

dying on the inside. So what’s the difference? If you truly need me, you’ll find another way. You won’t use the ones I love against me because I’ll just take myself out of the picture.” “You’re bluffing.” A vein throbbed in his temple, though his voice held a hint of uncertainty. “I wish I were, but I’m not!” I pressed the tip of the blade into the side of my neck, gasping at the sharp stab. Cutting my finger or arm really wasn’t that awful. But my neck? Oh, it stung at first, swiftly followed by an intense burn as the contaminated air hit my open flesh. “Illuminator!” someone screamed out. People behind me cried, and I didn’t even want to know how my father was taking this. Maybe Andrew passed the message along—but I hoped he hadn’t. I needed the Guard to believe my threat. “Let him go or you’ll see how much blood my body holds,” I threatened. Blood trickled in a steady pace down my neck and into the collar of my shirt, soaking it. Q took a cautious step forward, his hand twitching to stop me. “What in Celeste’s name are you doing, idiot girl?” With gritted teeth, I lowered my voice for only him to hear—though the Angels’ super senses would still pick up my words—and said, “Proving who’s the strongest, and it’s not you.” Any color in his face drained. “Let him go,” I practically growled out, my skin glowing brighter and brighter, a ball of unnatural energy. He nodded as he stepped closer. He was almost three feet taller than me, a towering mass of wound muscle and strength. Chris passed through the flames and put himself between us. The muscles on Chris’s back and shoulders tensed in anticipation of a fight. “Release him!” Q finally ordered. “But sir—” “I said to release him!” he shouted. The next few seconds happened so blindingly fast it took me a few minutes to figure it out. Q lunged around Chris just as I opened myself up to Andrew, who still feigned unconsciousness. Chris snarled in an unknown language as Guards tackled him to the ground. Before Andrew could fall on to the ground after his release, his head snapped up to see Q capture me. Q pried the dagger from my fingers, threw it into the crowd where Lucia caught it, twisted me around, and hugged me to his chest. My breath knocked out of me as he squeezed, and my feet dangled off the ground. His other hand came up to my bleeding throat while Andrew ducked out of the other Guards’ grasps. Lucia ran forward and formed a tornado-like portal that sucked several of the Guards away as Aiden’s fires spread through the crowd, attacking and devouring—the beast finally released. Ehno stood completely still in the chaos as fights erupted between the Guard and Angels. My air supply was quickly running out as Q clutched me with bone-crunching strength, but I couldn’t stop focusing on Ehno. What was he doing? Beside him, Lucia guaranteed no one bothered him, and on the other side was Luke. I didn’t know if at the sight of him I should have been elated or scared. If Luke was here then . . . The Ladies of Light are here! Andrew’s thoughts came screaming into my head like a chilling wind, and I tried to glance his direction but failed due to Q’s constricted grasp on my neck. For some strange reason I didn’t fight against the Guard. It was as if he’d compelled me not to. It was the thought of the Ladies of Light descending upon us that made me snap out of it. Memories of my last encounter with them plagued my thoughts. I had been so weak compared to them, but the Empyrean Guard had been convinced I was the only one who could defeat them. Q’s insanely large bicep tightened so there was no hope to breathe. My body panicked and seized authority over my mind; electricity swelled in me like a magnificent ocean in the midst of a hurricane and burst from my skin in a violent tempest. It spread into a cyclone of blue and encompassed us. Unlike

with Andrew, my energy electrocuted Q relentlessly, surging, expanding, and burning with each brilliant tendril. He screamed as his body convulsed and released his firm grip. Just in time, too, because I had run out of oxygen. It took a second for the blackness and stars to go away before I regained my sight. Q solidified in my vision first, smoke drifting off his skin like ghostly vines, before he dropped to his knees. Andrew yanked me away from the storm of electricity and drew me in close. We only hugged for a second before we had to fight again, but his embrace helped clear my mind. The Guards were twice our size and also had powerful magic of the Ethereal Eternity, so they had the advantage. Andrew squatted and pulled two daggers from his back, slicing the ankles of two Guards who’d been rushing at us like freight trains on a suicide mission. He’d cut so deep he snapped their ligaments. They cried out and went down like massive boulders. Andrew stood and grabbed my hand. We ran through the bedlam. Angels with huge black wings flew above and shot spells into the crowd. Colorful sparks of magic exploded everywhere I looked. Smoke and fire billowed from the building that had exploded earlier. “Where are we going?” I shouted over the loud blasts of magic. “I’m taking you somewhere safe.” I immediately dug my heels into the hard pavement, and our hands detached, an electric spark zapping between us. Andrew twisted around with a dagger raised to attack. He lowered it when he saw no one was hurting me. Then he pried into my head. “Ella—” “No, Andrew! They’re my Angels, and I won’t let them die for me while I hide away.” Someone nearby screamed, and I looked through the pandemonium. I didn’t even wavier as I sprinted into the chaos to rescue one of the Angels. It was Carmela and her eyes were wide as she stared at the sword the Guard had jammed into her shoulder, barely missing her vital organs. I hopped over one downed Guard, twisted around and ducked as a sword flew over my head, almost giving me a deadly haircut, and rushed to Carmela. Lucia had my dagger, and I suddenly felt naked. I was wary to send electricity while the Guard still held the hilt of the sword, so I threw my hand out and thought with all my heart of just stopping him from pulling it back out and running it through Carmela again. What was she doing here anyway? She wasn’t a soldier; she was an Elder. But I had also seen Luke—then it hit me. They’re here with the Ladies of Light, acting the part of an oblivious Angel. Magic the color of a sunset flew from my palms and slammed into the Guard’s back. He froze in place as the orange sparks of my spell latched onto his spine and flowed upward, securing itself to him like a leech. And that was exactly what it was; his essence began to flow into me. My body felt stronger, my legs moved faster than ever, and the spell that bound me to the Guard only fed more ravenously from his essence. My anger was finally being fed. When he dropped the sword, Carmela slumped to her knees. Golden blood barely seeped from the wound, but I knew if the sword were extracted it’d be a lot worse. By the time I reached her, the Empyrean Guard was dead on the ground, all his power, energy . . . his life had entered me, leaving the shell of his body behind. I didn’t have time to think about what it meant. I slid to my knees before Carmela and wrapped my arm around her torso to stop her from falling backward. She didn’t speak, though her eyes conveyed everything I needed to know. Large diamonds blinking away golden tears begged me to help. “Gabriella!” shouted Andrew as he raced to catch up to me. “What did you do to him?” I stared up into his face, my eyes watering over Carmela. Sweet, sweet Carmela. “Do what you can,” he said so softly it was almost a whisper. “I’ll make sure no one bothers you.” I lowered Carmela to the ground; she had to lie on her side because the sword had come out the other side of her shoulder. She tried to talk, but I put a finger to her mouth. “Shh. I’ll heal you.” She couldn’t hold her pain in any longer and began to cry as her whole body shook. She wasn’t used to battle or death. Surely the Ladies of Light didn’t demand the Elders go and fight? Though it was a real possibility that they

had been trapped in crossfires. This had turned into one big, hot mess. I held the hilt of the sword and yanked it out in one fluid motion. She screamed out as I clamped my hands on both sides to stop the flow of blood, then I concentrated as I began to heal her. A golden light glowed under my palms as the energy I had consumed from the Guard seeped out of me and into her. She quit screaming, and eventually stopped crying. When I was finished I collapsed forward, but Andrew caught me before I could hit the pavement. “I need to get you out of here,” he said fervently. “I’ll be fine, Andrew. Please don’t ask me to leave.” He and Carmela helped me stand. As soon as I was on my feet, Carmela engulfed me in a hug. “Thank you. Thank you. Thank you,” she chanted. “You’re welcome, sweetie.” I stared at Andrew over her shoulder. “If anyone needs to not be here, it’s the Elders, and anyone who isn’t with us.” Carmela stepped back, her skin glowing once again. “You’re right. We shouldn’t be fighting.” A Guard saw us and ran our direction, anticipation in his dusky eyes. Andrew stepped between us and began to fight with sheer force and magic. “Then why are you here?” I asked Carmela and gripped her shoulders. “The Ladies of Light are furious with you for hindering their plans. Then the Empyrean Guard started killing Angels, and we were left defenseless. You have all the fighters, so we’ve been hit worse since we aren’t. They came here hoping to go forward with their previous plans, using the barrier that could not be breached.” She snorted sarcastically. “Well, that didn’t stop the Empyrean Guard,” Carmela explained quickly. Andrew was still battling the Empyrean Guard. “Listen, I’ve got to check on my Angels. Stay with Andrew; he’ll protect you. There’s a building just down the street we used as a way to help the humans escape. It’s the only building with a red door. Gather those who aren’t fighters and take them there. Got it?” Carmela nodded and grabbed my wrist. “Gabriella, you need to know that the Ladies have grown in their powers, especially over the last few days. They’ve tapped into some sort of power source and are feeding off it.” “Thanks, Carmela.” I took a deep breath. “Be safe.” I kissed her cheek and turned to run off into the battle. “That’s not all,” she added quickly, stopping me in my tracks. “They have Abelie.” “They WHAT?” I exploded, whipping around so fast I frightened Carmela. “How is that possible?” My voice had risen in a cocktail of emotions. “I don’t know.” Her voice was breathy as she backed away. “Where is she?” “I don’t know,” she cried. I backed away, realizing I had been screaming at Carmela. My chest heaved as I tried to organize a coherent thought. “Is she in Avella?” Carmela shook her head. “I’m sorry, Gabriella. I just don’t know.” “I have to find her.” I stared into the fighting, not really seeing anything. I could not wish to hope she really was on Earth, but I also feared it to be true. If it was, the Ladies of Light now had possession of her and knew I would do anything to have her back.

Andrew and one of the Fallen had joined together to fight against another Guard. I couldn’t waste time—I raced into the chaos without him. Andrew is going to be so upset with me. 28 CARNAGE OF HEARTACHE As I passed Angels I knew were not fighters, I led them to the house with the red door. I used my newfound spell to drain the power from the Empyrean Guards to heal the wounded; all the while my mind had become a wild animal. Abelie might be alive and here. But I had to tell myself I couldn’t focus on it right that second; too many of my Angels were down or losing. The more I drained from the Guards, the quicker and lighter I was on my feet. Everything around me slowed as I sprinted faster and faster from one Angel to the next. Then I noticed the Guards retreating and couldn’t help but smile—word of my new power must have spread. The smile didn’t last long as a part of my soul felt like it had just been ripped from my body. I dropped to the ground with a cry of pain. What the hell was that? Some kind of spell? Oh, Gods, it hurt. The most horrible, bloodcurdling scream erupted from the middle of the fighting. I couldn’t see what happened through the masses, but I knew exactly where the scream had originated. What looked to be crimson electricity in the shape of a cone rose from the spot, stretching up into the sky, above the ash clouds, until I couldn’t see it anymore. The ground began to crack and shake as the sky darkened and showered fire. Andrew shouted in utter hysteria in my head to get to Ehno. Something horrific had happened, and Lucia was the one causing this. My heart didn’t speed up or bang against my chest. No, it stopped. Frozen. Unmoving for several lengthy seconds. I jumped to my feet. My wings expanded, and I shot into the air with such force the ground cracked beneath my feet. Spinning, diving, and twisting in midair was the only way I could bypass the flames dropping from the ash cloud as if dragons had taken up residence. I flew over the madness and throughout other Fallen Angels somersaulting in the air with languid elegance and authority. When my eyes finally landed on Ehno, he was spread awkwardly on the pavement, his skin paler than I’d ever seen it. And that was pale considering he was practically an albino. Lucia was on the ground with him, holding him to her chest as she screamed the most gut-wrenching, tear-jerking cries I’d ever heard. I wasn’t even sure she was aware of the consequences of her grief. The flames blew away on the wind, and golden rain began to pour down in torrents, as if they were crying her golden tears too. Red lightning lanced through the sky, rumbles of thunder echoing through the deluge. I dropped down next to Lucia and grabbed for Ehno immediately. Lucia fought for a second until she realized it was me. I’d never seen her like this before; usually she was so strong. A warrior. Never had I seen her dissolve under stress or admit her fears, let alone crumple to the ground and completely lose herself in the carnage of heartache. “Bring him back!” Lucia screeched. “Please, Gabby, bring him back.” It was the most desperate plea I’d ever heard. Tears painted her face in gold as they leaked from her eyes and dripped from her chin and onto Ehno. “I’ll do everything I can.” There were no visible wounds on his body, plus the golden rain made it extremely difficult to see anything. “Where’s he hurt?” I asked, a little hysterically. “Here,” she choked out. She twisted his head until I saw what had happened. I gasped at the sight. Someone had stabbed him in the back of the head, and the dagger protruded from the wound. I put my fingers to his neck to check for a pulse but found none. “There’s no pulse.” “There has to be!” Lucia shouted at me frantically. “My heart’s still beating!” She pounded her chest. “Gabby, mine’s still beating,” she cried out. “There’s no way.” She shook her head over and over. “No way! My heart would have stopped too . . .” Her voice softened. “Mine cannot beat without his.”

I nodded my head, though I was terrified. So petrified he was really dead and nothing I could do would save him. Relentless tears trailed down my face as I gently pulled the knife from his skull. My stomach rolled; I’d worked on dead bodies for years, but he was my friend, my protector. One of my Angels. I choked on my own tears as they threatened to drown me. I had to keep it together for Lucia. With my hand over the wound, I let any and all power I possessed enter into Ehno. I sent wave after wave into his body as I felt myself slowly losing everything I had left. He wasn’t healing. His pulse was still dead in his throat. I wouldn’t give up, though. Not ever. Lucia would do the same for me. I searched for any of the Empyrean Guard to consume their energy, but found none. More and more of my magic, my power, my essence left me. Drained away like a plug pulled from a full bathtub. Until I could barely hold myself up any more. Hands from every direction touched me, offering strength. Lucia gripped my arm as if the world would end if she let go. More and more hands reached out to make contact, but when they realized there was nowhere else to make contact, they shared their strength with someone who was touching me. Hundreds of Angels, even the Fallen, all huddled together to offer themselves to this one Halo. To this hero. To this Angel. The tears came harder as glowing, shining, beautiful energy rushed through my body in a soothing wave as I passed it to the lifeless Ehno. And though all of the Angels gave me strength, my body began to protest against the torrent. With one last burst of magic, an unearthly light exploded from Ehno’s chest, lit the darkened skies like a spotlight, and calmed the incensed storm Lucia had created. I stared into the pillar of light and begged the Gods one more time to save someone who I could not. And, just as the light began to fade, I saw Abelie and then the light was no more, taking Abelie with it. Hunched over Ehno, weakened, and exhausted, I wept. I stared up at Lucia, knowing I’d have to deliver bad news. Her eyes, like blue fire, jumped back and forth between mine. “He’s gone,” I whispered. Her expression froze for a second, then she shook her head in disbelief. “No. You’re wrong.” Her hand patted over her heart again and again. “It’s still beating,” she sobbed. “Lucia, I have nothing left. He has no pulse.” My body shook with tears. “There’s nothing more I can do. I’m sorry . . .” “Awe,” a female said behind us, making both of us jump. “So touching.” I whipped around to see the Ladies of Light. Liz and Mimi, their white eyes and hair streaked with the golden rain, watched us comically. The Angels had parted like the Red Sea against their will to make way for them. I jumped to my feet, coiled for a fight, but waivered, drained from trying to heal Ehno. I had to choke down my sadness and pain. My weakness. The iron fist of death squeezing my heart so painfully it hurt to hold it in. “Did you do this?” I growled, surprising myself. Patrick, Aiden, and Andrew ran through the crowd of Angels that surrounded us. Chris followed behind, angry welts and cuts covering his body. “Take down one of your best fighters?” Mimi asked cheerfully. “Absolutely,” Liz answered. “You bitches!” Lucia snarled and went after them, hands reaching for their throats. My wings expanded out with their pearly feathers and luminescence. I flew toward Lucia, snatched her in my arms, and dropped down on the other side of the Ladies of Light. The small amount of movement wore me out so I passed her to Patrick to hold onto. The Ladies laughed as they turned toward us. “Here’s how this is going to go,” said Mimi. “We’ll not harm another of your Angels as long as you leave Italy and never return,” continued Liz. “And trust me—if you ever step foot back on Italian ground, I will end you.”

“Not a chance in hell,” yelled Lucia, fighting against Patrick. I stepped forward, borrowing strength from Andrew’s light touch on my lower back. “Not if you plan on harming humans.” “I don’t know if you noticed,” said Mimi with a laugh. “But none of the humans were harmed until you helped the Empyrean Guard by unbinding the enslavement spell,” finished Liz. I gritted my teeth to stop my retort. “I amend. As long as you don’t enslave, mess with, order around, or harm any humans in any way.” Mimi and Liz stared at each other as if communicating silently. They probably were. “For how long?” Mimi finally asked with one eyebrow raised. “Forever,” I said with the word “duh” silently trailing. “That won’t work for us,” said Liz, shaking her head and finger, tsking us. “We have an offer,” said Mimi, bored. “An offer?” This was not at all what I would have predicted, and I made disgust show on my face with a curl of my top lip. “We both have a problem: the Empyrean Guard,” said Mimi. “The enemy of our enemy is our friend,” continued Liz calmly. They had to be joking. Were they seriously offering me a truce after murdering Ehno? What kind of sick, sadistic person would actually say that without blinking. Swallowing my nasty retort, I said, “Give me a second.” I whirled around—it was my turn to silently communicate. Do you believe them? I asked Andrew, knowing he’d convey everything to the others for me. Fifty percent say yes, fifty percent say no. Great. I turned back to the Ladies of Light. “And what would this ‘partnership’ entail?” I made little quotes are “partnership.” My heart began to burn with a warmth I’d never felt before. It wasn’t painful . . . it was like a soothing balm over its lingering ache. Mimi was speaking, but I hadn’t heart a word she said because, on the ground behind them, Ehno twitched. Was he alive or was it just post death nerves? I blinked and rubbed my eyes, worried I was hallucinating. Andrew, try to communicate with Ehno. I waited a few seconds. He’s alive! Andrew cheered mentally. I couldn’t stop the smile that grew across my face as I watched Ehno sit up and stare in puzzlement between the two Ladies of Light as they spoke. Mimi and Liz must have thought I was in on their plan, though I hadn’t heard a single thing they had said. Andrew and Ehno spoke quickly and silently until they formed a plan. Lucia quit struggling in Patrick’s arms, and I could tell it took everything for her not to run to him. Ehno, as silently as he could, grabbed the dagger that had killed him and rose to his feet. He noiselessly crept up behind Mimi who was speaking, and jammed the knife into her back, and pulled upward. Mimi stopped midsentence and looked at Liz who stared back in bewilderment, her eyebrows coming together. Liz’s eyes swiveled back to me, and she barely whispered, “You bitch.” Golden blood trickled from her mouth as she fell to her knees. She blinked twice as I watched the life escape from her white eyes, open but unseeing. Dead. Then she face-

planted into the pavement. I’d never wanted to cheer so boisterously in my entire life. Liz screamed with fury and flashed toward Ehno with blinding speed, nothing more than a blur in my vision. Liz’s fingers, inches from curling around his neck, barely missed him as he spread his wings and flew out of her reach. There was a collective gasp as we gaped at his radiant, white wings—no longer black like the Fallen’s. With Liz distracted, Lucia darted forward and shot magic into Mimi, the sound like a gunshot. Liz whipped back around and lunged for Lucia, who backed out of her grasp. Liz wasn’t even trying to use any magic she was so furious and grief-stricken. “And now her soul is severed. Payback is a bitch, bitch.” Lucia backed away, glaring with such intensity I thought laser beams would shoot from her eyes. Liz dropped to her knees next to Mimi, her eyes downcast. This was the perfect opportunity to kill the last Lady of Light. I stalked toward her, my senses on high alert. I was no fool—last time I had gone against one of the Ladies magically, I had fallen flat on my behind. Andrew held out a dagger as I passed him, my movements slow and cautious. I grabbed it and closed the distance between Liz and me. I placed the dagger under her chin, and her white eyes shot up to mine. They held so much anger and hate, as if all the horrible deeds they’d seen were etched into their every molecule. I wanted to kill her and let it be over with. I wanted to watch her blood drain away and finally pay for everything she’d done. But I couldn’t do it. Carmela said they had Abelie, and though I thought I saw Abelie in the light earlier, it could have just been my imagination run rampant. And, suffice it to say, we might actually need her to solve our little infestation of Empyrean Guard on Earth. “If you harm another human or Angel, and I find out about it,” I said evenly to her, my teeth gritted, “I will hunt you down and kill you like the rabid animal you are.” Liz’s cold eyes glared at me. “You will never defeat me!” Her powerful magic flung me through the air, and I flipped and flailed, tumbling. The only reason I didn’t crash to the pavement was because Chris caught me midsomersault. All around me the Angels had been thrown backward. Liz’s chest heaved as she drilled holes into my skull with her crazy-eyes. Another blast of magic exploded from her as the buildings around us crashed to the ground simultaneously. The reverberations of each building crumbling away were jarring in their explosive impacts. Liz, her arms raised as if orchestrating a symphony in the middle of a war zone, began to glow white right before she vanished. The Empyrean Guard were nowhere in sight, except for Chris who’d become part of our dysfunctional family. Angels of all types were rising to their feet and brushing themselves off. Coughing, I waved the dust from my face. Avella had been leveled; the aftermath of our first battle—the first of many. We’d won this one, but there was still a war to come. I could feel it deep within my soul. There was no peace for me in this small victory, because I knew this would not be the last time I’d see the Empyrean Guard or Liz. It was strange that the Guard conceded so easily, and it only made me wonder what they were really up to. This was just the beginning, and that terrified me. A sickening feeling told me this had only been a test, and next time we wouldn’t be so lucky. Andrew found me immediately and wrapped his solid arms around my body, refusing to let go. I leaned into his warmth, my head on his chest, and watched as Ehno and Lucia embraced. They didn’t speak aloud, but they didn’t have to. Ehno’s gentle caresses across her cheek, his tender kisses upon her mouth, and the way they fit together as if they’d been skillfully molded and crafted for each other was one of the sweetest reunions I’d ever witnessed. I thought of my time apart from Andrew and our reunion and remembered the relief that followed. We walked hand in hand through the debris toward the portal Lucia started to form. “Merry Christmas,” I said to Andrew. He stopped walking and pulled me into his arms again, gently raising my chin so I had to stare directly into his golden eyes. “Merry Christmas,” he whispered right before his lips descended onto mine. EPILOGUE Party hats, balloons, champagne; this was how I’d spend my evening. Oh, and a countdown—the whole reason we were here: New Year’s Eve. We’d missed Thanksgiving and Christmas, but there was no way I’d miss another

celebration. Andrew stayed at my side all evening as I mingled with the Guardians and the Fallen Angels. It was easy to tell the two apart, as the Fallen had the silver patterns on their faces. “Forgive me if I’m being rude,” I said to Firen, “but why the silver markings?” I made a gesture around my own face. Firen, turning to fill her cup with punch, smiled. “Why the tattoos?” she asked me with a laugh. “So it’s a marker of . . .?” “It’s to show what side we chose during the war.” She sipped the punch, and her nose scrunched up. “Gods, this is awful!” Joseph ran up to her. “Um, you might not want to drink anymore of that.” He smiled charmingly at her. “It’s been spiked.” “Joseph!” I admonished. He threw his hands up. “It was one of yours.” He laughed. “None of us drink.” Just then I caught Sebastian’s eyes, and he winked. I gave my attention back to Joseph. “I’m sorry. The Guardians have all been wound a little too tight lately. I’ll go make some more.” “Nah, I’ll get it,” Joseph offered. Before I could protest, he trotted off to the kitchen. Andrew filled his own cup with punch and took a sip. His face mimicked Firen’s from earlier. “That’s potent.” Firen shrugged her shoulders, downed her drink, and filled her cup again. I gaped at her as she grinned and turned away, melting into the crowd. “This can’t be good,” I said and faced Andrew. He took another sip of his drink, smiling at me. He grabbed the top of my party hat, wiggling it, and said, “Relax, Ella. They’re adults.” “I know, but—” “Relax,” he repeated, stepping closer and pulling me into him. My breath hitched. “They all need to unwind. Let them.” “There are better ways to do that,” I whispered with a shy smile. He put his cup down and kissed me. He tasted like fruit punch and vodka. “Two minutes until the New Year!” shouted one of the CIA agents over the crowd. There were about thirty of them, mingling in with the crowd easily. I had yet to see Layla, but I heard she’d helped with the Avella situation. It made me pleased to hear we didn’t scare her too much after the Zola rescue. Through the mass of people, I saw Aiden turn the TV on so we could watch the celebrations going on throughout Italy. He was cheery and enjoying himself, which made my heart squeeze for him. I had yet to tell anyone about what Carmela said to me, and the other Elders had been trying to gather the Angels that were under the Ladies of Light’s spell so we could help them. If there even was the slightest chance Abelie was back on Earth, I would find her and bring her back to Aiden. What I didn’t understand was how she could be back. Her soul had been severed from her body, which, from what I understood, meant she didn’t have a physical body so she could be on Earth. There was no putting her back in her body. She’d been buried. “59 . . . 58 . . . 57 . . .” everyone started shouting at once. “You really should tell him,” Andrew said, reading my thoughts. He was the only one who knew about Abelie.

“It might just hurt him more.” “You’d want to know if it was the other way around.” “I know.” I sighed. “You’re right. But not tonight; he looks so happy right now. I just can’t take that away.” “Tomorrow,” he agreed and lifted my face so we were eye-to-eye. “20 . . . 19 . . . 18 . . .” The electrical current that was always attracted to Andrew wrapped around us as the New Year approached. “13 . . . 12 . . . 11 . . .” A bright light coming from the kitchen distracted me from the moment I was having with Andrew. No one else seemed to notice the disturbance. It grew brighter and brighter, so I grabbed Andrew’s arms and made him sidestep closer. He pivoted in my grasp to follow my gaze. “Do you see that?” I whispered. “Only in your thoughts . . .” he trailed off. I could see into the kitchen, and standing there in a beautiful white dress was Abelie. Her smile was blinding, her figure glowing just as my skin did sometimes. She held her hands out to embrace me, beckoning me toward her. “7 . . . 6 . . . 5 . . .” “Mom?” I choked and took off, ripping myself from Andrew’s arms. My heart slammed into my chest as I pushed my way through the crowd, receiving some odd looks. “Mom!” I shouted. I threw my arms out as I reached the kitchen, ready to embrace my mom. As soon as I was close enough to touch her, she disappeared without a trace, the light dimmed. I stood alone in the middle of the kitchen with my thudding pulse and tears trailing down my face. “Ella! Are you okay?” Andrew threw his arms around me and hugged me to his body. I shook my head against his chest as shivers ran up my arms. “No,” I breathed. “3 . . . 2 . . . 1 . . .” Happy New Year. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS As always, thank you Lisa Langdale for everything you’ve done for me. Your support, love, and guidance has been sent from the Angels. We are an unstoppable force, and one day we will take the world by storm! I’d also like to thank Cesya Cuono, a girl who has blossomed into a confident woman since I’ve met her. You’ve never let me down, C. Thanks for that. TO MY FANS! This book is for you . . . all three of you! Haha! Thank you, my lovely fiancé, for without your loyalty and love I would have never been able to accomplish what I have. No matter how many times I’ve had to hide away due to work, you’ve always understood. You are amazing baby! To my family. There are too many of you to name, but you know who you are. Fictionista Workshop: you help make writers’ dreams become a reality. Thank you for letting me be a part of that.

Last, but certainly not least, are my friends who give me advice and support: Brianne, Shanda, Annie, and Tiffany. Amazing ladies and friends! Gabriella’s journey continues in . . . FALLEN LEGION The full force of the Empyrean Guard leaves Gabriella trembling where she stands. She had it all wrong; they’re stronger than she ever imagined. Even with the Fallen at her back, she lacks the proper training and knowledge to win the inevitable Angelic War. In the Timeless Oblivion, Gabriella seeks the advice of the one person who’s never failed her and comes back with more than she bargained for. Now Gabriella must do the unthinkable: break the most important law the Celestial Gods decreed thousands of years ago to protect the Angels. Now that she’s crossed the line, will she find a way to save the Angels? Or has she doomed them all? Winter 2011 OBSIDIAN MOUNTAIN PUBLISHING